E7 Users Manual en

Manual No.
TOE-S616-56.1-03-OY
VARISPEED E7
Variable Torque Frequency Inverter
USER’S MANUAL
Table of Content
Warnings ............................................................................................... VII
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use........................................ VIII
EMC Compatibility ................................................................................. X
Line Filters ............................................................................................ XII
Registered Trademarks......................................................................... XV
1 Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1

Varispeed E7 Introduction ...........................................................................1-2
Varispeed E7 Applications ............................................................................................. 1-2
Varispeed E7 Models ..................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery .......................................................................1-4
Checks ........................................................................................................................... 1-4
Nameplate Information .................................................................................................. 1-4
Inverter Software Version .............................................................................................. 1-5
Component Names ........................................................................................................ 1-6
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ..............................................................1-9
IP00 Inverters ................................................................................................................1-9
NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters .............................................................................................. 1-10
IP54 Inverters .............................................................................................................. 1-10
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ...........................................1-13
Installation Site ............................................................................................................ 1-13
Controlling the Ambient Temperature .......................................................................... 1-13
Protecting the IP00 or NEMA 1 Inverter from Foreign Matter ...................................... 1-13
Additional Installation Precautions for the IP54 Inverters ............................................ 1-14
Keeping the IP54 protection ........................................................................................ 1-14
Installation Orientation and Space .............................................................1-15
Accessing the Inverter Terminals ..............................................................1-16
Removing the Terminal Cover (IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters) ........................... 1-16
Attaching the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-16
Opening the Door (IP54 Inverters) .............................................................................. 1-17
Closing the Door (IP54 Inverters) ............................................................................... 1-17
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover .......................1-18
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less ........................................................................................ 1-18
Inverters of 22 kW or More .......................................................................................... 1-20
2 Wiring....................................................................................... 2-1
Connection Diagrams ..................................................................................2-2
Circuit Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 2-4
Terminal Block Configuration ......................................................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................................................2-7
Applicable Wire Sizes and Crimp Terminals .................................................................. 2-7
Main Circuit Terminal Functions .................................................................................. 2-15
Main Circuit Configurations .......................................................................................... 2-16
Standard Connection Diagrams ................................................................................... 2-18
Wiring the Main Circuits ............................................................................................... 2-20
I
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ............................................................... 2-27
Wire Sizes ................................................................................................................... 2-27
Control Circuit Terminal Functions .............................................................................. 2-31
Control Circuit Terminal Connections .......................................................................... 2-35
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions .............................................................................. 2-36
Wiring Check ............................................................................................. 2-37
Checks ........................................................................................................................ 2-37
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ............................................................ 2-38
Option Card Models .................................................................................................... 2-38
Installation in IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters ........................................................ 2-38
Installation in IP54 Inverters ........................................................................................ 2-39
3 Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1

Digital Operator ........................................................................................... 3-2
Digital Operator Display ................................................................................................ 3-2
Digital Operator Keys .................................................................................................... 3-3
Modes ......................................................................................................... 3-5
Inverter Modes .............................................................................................................. 3-5
Switching Modes ........................................................................................................... 3-6
Drive Mode .................................................................................................................... 3-8
Quick Programming Mode ............................................................................................. 3-9
Advanced Programming Mode .................................................................................... 3-11
Verify Mode ................................................................................................................. 3-15
Autotuning Mode ......................................................................................................... 3-17
4 Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1

Trial Operation Procedure ........................................................................... 4-2
Trial Operation ............................................................................................ 4-3
Application Confirmation ............................................................................................... 4-3
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper
(400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher) ................................................................... 4-3
Power ON ...................................................................................................................... 4-3
Checking the Display Status ......................................................................................... 4-4
Basic Settings ................................................................................................................ 4-5
Selecting the V/f pattern ................................................................................................ 4-7
Autotuning ..................................................................................................................... 4-7
Application Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-9
No-load Operation ......................................................................................................... 4-9
Loaded Operation .......................................................................................................... 4-9
Check and Recording User Parameters ...................................................................... 4-10
Adjustment Suggestions ........................................................................... 4-11
5 User Parameters ......................................................................5-1

User Parameter Descriptions ...................................................................... 5-2
Description of User Parameter Tables .......................................................................... 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels .......................................... 5-3
User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode ............................................. 5-4
II
User Parameter Tables ...............................................................................5-6
Setup Settings: A ........................................................................................................... 5-6
Application Parameters: b .............................................................................................. 5-8
Tuning Parameters: C .................................................................................................. 5-15
Reference Parameters: d ............................................................................................. 5-18
Motor Parameters: E .................................................................................................... 5-20
Option Parameters: F .................................................................................................. 5-22
Terminal Function Parameters: H ................................................................................ 5-23
Protection Function Parameters: L .............................................................................. 5-29
Special Adjustments: n ................................................................................................ 5-35
Digital Operator Parameters: o .................................................................................... 5-36
Motor Autotuning: T ..................................................................................................... 5-40
Monitor Parameters: U ................................................................................................. 5-41
Setting Values that Change with the V/f Pattern Selection (E1-03) ............................. 5-46
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) ................................ 5-47
6 Parameter Settings by Function............................................ 6-1

Carrier Frequency Selection ........................................................................6-2
Setting the Carrier Frequency ........................................................................................ 6-2
Frequency Reference ..................................................................................6-5
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source .................................................................. 6-5
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation ................................................................................ 6-7
Run Command ............................................................................................6-9
Selecting the Run Command Source ............................................................................ 6-9
Stopping Methods ......................................................................................6-11
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input ................................. 6-11
Using the DC Injection Brake ....................................................................................... 6-13
Using an Emergency Stop ........................................................................................... 6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........................................6-15
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times .............................................................. 6-15
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function) .......................................................... 6-17
Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function ............................................................ 6-19
Adjusting Frequency References ..............................................................6-21
Adjusting Analog Frequency References .................................................................... 6-21
Jump Frequency Function (Operation Avoiding Resonance) ...................................... 6-23
Speed Limit
(Frequency Reference Limit Function) ......................................................6-24
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency .......................................................................... 6-24
Limiting Minimum Frequency ....................................................................................... 6-24
Frequency Detection .................................................................................6-25
Speed Agreement Function ......................................................................................... 6-25
Improved Operating Performance .............................................................6-27
Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start
and Low-speed Operation ........................................................................................... 6-27
Hunting Prevention Function ....................................................................................... 6-28
Machine Protection ....................................................................................6-29
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation ................................................................ 6-29
Load Detection ............................................................................................................. 6-30
Motor Overload Protection ........................................................................................... 6-33
III
Motor Overheat Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs ........................................... 6-35
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation .................................... 6-37
Automatic Restart ...................................................................................... 6-38
Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss .............................................. 6-38
Speed Search .............................................................................................................. 6-39
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost .......... 6-44
Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function) ........................... 6-45
Inverter Protection ..................................................................................... 6-47
Inverter Overheat Protection ....................................................................................... 6-47
Input Phase Loss Detection Level ............................................................................... 6-48
Ground Fault Protection .............................................................................................. 6-48
Cooling Fan Control .................................................................................................... 6-49
Setting the Ambient Temperature ............................................................................... 6-49
OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed .............................................................................. 6-50
Soft CLA Selection ...................................................................................................... 6-51
Input Terminal Functions ........................................................................... 6-52
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator
and Control Circuit Terminals ...................................................................................... 6-52
Blocking the Inverter Output (Baseblock Command) .................................................. 6-53
Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable/Enable ............................................................ 6-53
Drive Enable/Disable ................................................................................................... 6-54
Bypass Drive Enable ................................................................................................... 6-54
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration
(Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) ...................................................................... 6-54
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using
Digital Input Signals (UP/DOWN) ................................................................................ 6-55
Trim Control Function .................................................................................................. 6-58
Analog Frequency Reference Sample/Hold ................................................................ 6-59
Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card ..................................... 6-60
Switching Operation Source to MEMOBUS communication ....................................... 6-60
AUTO/HAND Mode Switching by Digital Input ............................................................ 6-61
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG) 6-62
Stopping the Inverter on External Faults (External Fault Function) ............................. 6-63
Output Terminal Functions ........................................................................ 6-64
Monitor Parameters ................................................................................... 6-67
Using the Analog Monitor Parameters ........................................................................ 6-67
Individual Functions .................................................................................. 6-69
Using MEMOBUS Communications ............................................................................ 6-69
Using the Timer Function ............................................................................................ 6-86
Using PI Control .......................................................................................................... 6-87
Energy-saving ............................................................................................................. 6-98
Setting Motor Parameters ........................................................................................... 6-99
Setting the V/f Pattern ............................................................................................... 6-100
Motor Preheat Function ............................................................................................. 6-106
Emergency Override Function ................................................................................... 6-108
High Slip Braking ....................................................................................................... 6-109
Digital Operator Functions ...................................................................... 6-110
Setting Digital Operator Functions ............................................................................ 6-110
Copying Parameters .................................................................................................. 6-113
Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator ......................................... 6-117
Setting a Password ................................................................................................... 6-117
Displaying User-set Parameters Only ....................................................................... 6-118
IV
7 Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................................................7-2
Fault Detection ...............................................................................................................7-2
Alarm Detection ............................................................................................................. 7-8
Operator Programming Errors ..................................................................................... 7-11
Autotuning Faults ........................................................................................................ 7-13
Digital Operator Copy Function Faults ......................................................................... 7-13
Troubleshooting .........................................................................................7-15
If Parameters Cannot Be Set ....................................................................................... 7-15
If the Motor Does Not Operate ..................................................................................... 7-16
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ....................................................... 7-17
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow ................................. 7-17
If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference ...................... 7-17
If Motor Deceleration is Slow ....................................................................................... 7-18
If the Motor Overheats ................................................................................................. 7-18
If peripheral devices like PLCs or other are influenced
by the starting or running inverter 7-................................................................................ 19
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates when a RUN Command is Input ................... 7-19
If There is Mechanical Oscillation ................................................................................ 7-19
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped ....................................... 7-20
If OV (Overvoltage) or OC (Overcurrent) is Detected
When a Fan is Started, or a Fan Stalls ........................................................................ 7-20
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ..................................... 7-20
8 Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1

Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................8-2
Periodic Inspection ........................................................................................................ 8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-4
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ................................................................................. 8-5
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card .......................................... 8-7
9 Specifications ......................................................................... 9-1

Standard Inverter Specifications ..................................................................9-2
Specifications by Model ................................................................................................. 9-2
Common Specifications ................................................................................................. 9-5
10 Appendix ............................................................................... 10-1

Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................10-2
Selection ...................................................................................................................... 10-2
Installation .................................................................................................................... 10-2
Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10-3
Handling ....................................................................................................................... 10-3
Motor Application Precautions ...................................................................10-4
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor ....................................................... 10-4
Using the Inverter for Special Motors .......................................................................... 10-5
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains) ..................... 10-5
User Parameters .......................................................................................10-6
V
VI
Warnings
CAUTION
Cables must not be connected or disconnected, nor signal tests carried out, while the power is
switched on.
The Varispeed E7 DC bus capacitor remains charged even after the power has been switched off. To
avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect the frequency inverter from the mains before carrying out
maintenance. Then wait for at least 5 minutes after all LEDs have gone out.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the Varispeed. The frequency inverter con-
tains semiconductors, which are not designed for such high voltages.
Do not remove the digital operator while the mains supply is switched on. The printed circuit board
must also not be touched while the inverter is connected to the power.
Never connect general LC/RC interference suppression filters, capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to
the inverter input or output.
To avoid unnecessary overcurrent faults, etc. being displayed, the signaling contacts of any contac-
tor or switch fitted between inverter and motor must be integrated into the inverter control logic
(e.g. baseblock).
This is absolutely imperative!

This manual must be read thoroughly before connecting and operating the inverter. All safety pre-
cautions and instructions for use must be followed.
The inverter may must be operated with the appropriate line filters, following the installation
instructions in this manual and with all covers closed and terminals covered.
Only then will adequate protection be provided. Please do not connect or operate any equipment
with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or
equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
VII
Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use
General
Please read these safety precautions and instructions for use thoroughly before installing and operating this
inverter. Also read all of the warning signs on the inverter and ensure they are never damaged or removed.
Live and hot inverter components may be accessible during operation. Removal of housing components, the
digital operator or terminal covers runs the risk of serious injuries or damage in the event of incorrect installa-
tion or operation. The fact that frequency inverters control rotating mechanical machine components can give
rise to other dangers.
The instructions in this manual must be followed. Installation, operation and maintenance may only be carried
out by qualified personnel. For the purposes of the safety precautions, qualified personnel are defined as indi-
viduals who are familiar with the installation, starting, operation and maintenance of frequency inverters and
have the proper qualifications for this work. Safe operation of these units is only possible if they are used
properly for their intended purpose.
The DC bus capacitors can remain live for about 5 minutes after the inverter is disconnected from the power.
It is therefore necessary to wait for this time before opening its covers. All of the main circuit terminals may
still carry dangerous voltages.
Children and other unauthorized persons must not be allowed access to these inverters.
Keep these Safety Precautions and Instructions for Use readily accessible and supply them to all persons with
any form of access to the inverters.
Intended Use
Frequency inverters are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
Their installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Volt-
age Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10, Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices
EN 60204-1, 1997-12Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/
Please note: Includes Corrigendum of September 1998
EN 61010-1, A2, 1995Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950, 1991 + A1, 1992 + A2, 1993 + A3, 1995 + A4, 1996, modified)
CE marking is carried out to EN 50178, using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appro-
priate installation instructions.
Transportation and storage

The instructions for transportation, storage and proper handling must be followed in accordance with the tech-
nical data.
Installation
Install and cool the inverters as specified in the documentation. The cooling air must flow in the specified
direction. The inverter may therefore only be operated in the specified position (e.g. upright). Maintain the
specified clearances. Protect the inverters against impermissible loads. Components must not be bent nor insu-
lation clearances changed. To avoid damage being caused by static electricity, do not touch any electronic
components or contacts.
VIII
Electrical Connection
Carry out any work on live equipment in compliance with the national safety and accident prevention regula-
tions. Carry out electrical installation in compliance with the relevant regulations. In particular, follow the
installation instructions ensuring electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), e.g. shielding, grounding, filter
arrangement and laying of cables. This also applies to equipment with the CE mark. It is the responsibility of
the manufacturer of the system or machine to ensure conformity with EMC limits.
Your supplier or Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative must be contacted when using leakage cur-
rent circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency inverters.
In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the
relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified.
Notes
The Varispeed E7 frequency inverters are certified to CE, UL, and cUL except the IP54 version which is cer-
tified to CE only.
IX
EMC Compatibility
Introduction
This manual was compiled to help system manufacturers using OMRON YASKAWA Motion Control
(OYMC) frequency inverters design and install electrical switch gear. It also describes the measures necessary
to comply with the EMC Directive. The manual's installation and wiring instructions must therefore be fol-
lowed.
Our products are tested by authorized bodies using the standards listed below.
Product standard: EN 61800-3:1996
EN 61800-3; A11:2000
Measures to Ensure Conformity of OYMC Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive

OYMC frequency inverters do not necessarily have to be installed in a switch cabinet.
It is not possible to give detailed instructions for all of the possible types of installation. This manual therefore
has to be limited to general guidelines.
All electrical equipment produces radio and line-borne interference at various frequencies. The cables pass
this on to the environment like an aerial.
Connecting an item of electrical equipment (e.g. drive) to a supply without a line filter can therefore allow HF
or LF interference to get into the mains.
The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components, proper grounding and
shielding of cables.
A large contact area is necessary for low-impedance grounding of HF interference. The use of grounding
straps instead of cables is therefore definitely advisable.
Moreover, cable shields must be connected with purpose-made ground clips.
Laying Cables
Measures Against Line-Borne Interference:
Line filter and frequency inverter must be mounted on the same metal plate. Mount the two components as
close to each other as possible, with cables kept as short as possible.
Use a power cable with well-grounded shield. For motor cables up to 50 meters in length use shielded cables.
Arrange all grounds so as to maximize the area of the end of the lead in contact with the ground terminal (e.g.
metal plate).
Shielded Cable:
– Use a cable with braided shield.
– Ground the maximum possible area of the shield. It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable
to the ground plate with metal clips (see following figure).
X
Ground clip Ground plate
The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal. Remove any coats of varnish and paint.
– Ground the cable shields at both ends.
– Ground the motor of the machine.
Further informations can be found in the document EZZ006543 which can be ordered at Omron Yaskawa
Motion Control.
XI
Line Filters
The IP54 version is already equipped with a internal EMC filter. For the IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 versions of
the Varispeed E7 the recommended line filters are as follows:
Recommended Line Filters for Varispeed E7 (IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20)

Inverter Model Line Filter
Varispeed E7 EN Current Weight Dimensions
Model
(IP00/20) 55011 Class (A) (kg) WxDxH
CIMR-E7Z40P4
CIMR-E7Z40P7
3G3RV-PFI3010-SE 10 1.1 141 x 46 x 330
CIMR-E7Z41P5
CIMR-E7Z42P2
CIMR-E7Z43P7
CIMR-E7Z44P0 3G3RV-PFI3018-SE B, 25 m*1 18 1.3 141 x 46 x 330
CIMR-E7Z45P5
CIMR-E7Z47P5
3G3RV-PFI3035-SE 35 2.1 206 x 50 x 355
CIMR-E7Z4011
CIMR-E7Z4015
3G3RV-PFI3060-SE 60 4.0 236 x 65 x 408
CIMR-E7Z4018
CIMR-E7Z4022
3G3RV-PFI3070-SE 70 3.4 80 x 185 x 329
CIMR-E7Z4030
CIMR-E7Z4037
CIMR-E7Z4045 3G3RV-PFI3130-SE 130 4.7 90 x 180 x 366
CIMR-E7Z4055
CIMR-E7Z4090 A, 100 m
3G3RV-PFI3200-SE 250 11 130 x 240 x 610
CIMR-E7Z4110
CIMR-E7Z4132
3G3RV-PFI3400-SE 400 18.5 300 x 160 x 610
CIMR-E7Z4160
CIMR-E7Z4185
3G3RV-PFI3600-SE 600 11,0 260 x 135 x 386
CIMR-E7Z4220

*1. Class A, 100 m
Permissible emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment (EN61800-3, A11)
(general availability, 1st environment)
XII
Inverter Model Line Filters
EN
Varispeed E7 Current Weight Dimensions
Type 55011
(IP00/20) (A) (kg) WxDxH
Class
CIMR-E7Z20P4
CIMR-E7Z20P7 3G3RV-PFI3010-SE 10 1.1 141 x 45 x 330
CIMR-E7Z21P5
CIMR-E7Z22P2 3G3RV-PFI3018-SE 18 1.3 141 x 46 x 330
CIMR-E7Z23P7
3G3RV-PFI2035-SE B, 25 m*1 35 1.4 141 x 46 x 330
CIMR-E7Z25P5
CIMR-E7Z27P5
3G3RV-PFI2060-SE 60 3 206 x 60 x 355
CIMR-E7Z2011
CIMR-E7Z2015
3G3RV-PFI2100-SE 100 4.9 236 x 80 x 408
CIMR-E7Z2018
CIMR-E7Z2022
3G3RV-PFI2130-SE 130 4.3 90 x 180 x 366
CIMR-E7Z2030
CIMR-E7Z2045
3G3RV-PFI2200-SE A, 100 m 200 11.0 130 x 240 x 610
CIMR-E7Z2055
CIMR-E7Z2075
3G3RV-PFI3400-SE 400 18.5 300 x 160 x 564
CIMR-E7Z2090

*1. Class A, 100 ambient temperature: 45°C max
EMC Specifications of Varispeed E7 (IP54)

The Varispeed E7 IP54 is already equipped with an internal EMC filter. The Varispeed E7 IP54 complies with
EN55011 class A with a motor cable length up to 25m.
For the wiring methods to comply with the EMC regulations for the Varispeed E7 (IP54) refer to page Chap-
ter 2, Wiring.
XIII
Installation inverters and EMC filters
L1 L3
PE L2
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
PE
Line
Inverter
Filter
Load L1 L3 U W
PE L2 V PE
Cable Length
as short as possible
Metal Plate
Motor cable
screened
Ground Bonds
( remove any paint )
M
3~
XIV
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.

• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association, Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echelon.
• Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc.
• CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e.V.
XV
XVI
1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed E7 Introduction..................................................1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery..............................................1-4
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ....................................1-9
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .................1-13
Installation Orientation and Space ...................................1-15
Accessing the Inverter Terminals.....................................1-16
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover1-18
Varispeed E7 Introduction
Varispeed E7 Applications
The Varispeed E7 is ideal for the following applications.
• Fan, blower and pump applications with variable torque characteristics.
Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation. Refer to page 4-1, Trial Operation.
Varispeed E7 Models
The Varispeed E7 Series includes Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. The maximum motor capacities
vary from 0.55 to 300 kW. The inverter is available in protection classes IP00, IP20 and IP54 according to the
following table:
Table 1.1 Varispeed E7 Models

Maximum Specifications
Varispeed E7
Motor (Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Voltage Class
Capacity Output IEC IP00 NEMA 1 (IEC IP20) IEC IP54
kW Basic Model Number
Capacity kVA CIMR-E7Z CIMR-E7Z CIMR-E7Z
0.55 1.2 CIMR-E7Z20P4 20P41 -
0.75 1.6 CIMR-E7Z20P7 20P71 -
1.5 2.7 CIMR-E7Z21P5 21P51 -
2.2 3.7 CIMR-E7Z22P2 22P21 -
3.7 5.7 CIMR-E7Z23P7 Remove the top and bot- 23P71 -
tom covers from the IP20
5.5 8.8 CIMR-E7Z25P5 model. 25P51 -
7.5 12 CIMR-E7Z27P5 27P51 -
11 17 CIMR-E7Z2011 20111 -
15 22 CIMR-E7Z2015 20151 -
200 V class
18.5 27 CIMR-E7Z2018 20181 -
22 32 CIMR-E7Z2022 20220 20221 -
30 44 CIMR-E7Z2030 20300 20301 -
37 55 CIMR-E7Z2037 20370 20371 -
45 69 CIMR-E7Z2045 20450 20451 -
55 82 CIMR-E7Z2055 20550 20551 -
75 110 CIMR-E7Z2075 20750 20751 -
90 130 CIMR-E7Z2090 20900 - -
110 160 CIMR-E7Z2110 21100 - -
1-2
Varispeed E7 Introduction
Maximum Specifications
Varispeed E7
Motor (Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Voltage Class
Capacity Output IEC IP00 NEMA 1 (IEC IP20) IEC IP54
kW Basic Model Number
Capacity kVA CIMR-E7Z CIMR-E7Z CIMR-E7Z
0.55 1.4 CIMR-E7Z40P4 40P41 -
0.75 1.6 CIMR-E7Z40P7 40P71 -
1.5 2.8 CIMR-E7Z41P5 41P51 -
2.2 4.0 CIMR-E7Z42P2 42P21 -
3.7 5.8 CIMR-E7Z43P7 Remove the top and bot- 43P71 -
4.0 6.6 CIMR-E7Z44P0 tom covers from the IP20 44P01 -
5.5 9.5 CIMR-E7Z45P5 model. 45P51 -
7.5 13 CIMR-E7Z47P5 47P51 47P52
11 18 CIMR-E7Z4011 40111 40112
15 24 CIMR-E7Z4015 40151 40152
18.5 30 CIMR-E7Z4018 40181 40182
22 34 CIMR-E7Z4022 40220 40221 40222
400 V class
30 46 CIMR-E7Z4030 40300 40301 40302
37 57 CIMR-E7Z4037 40370 40371 40372
45 69 CIMR-E7Z4045 40450 40451 40452
55 85 CIMR-E7Z4055 40550 40551 40552
75 110 CIMR-E7Z4075 40750 40751 -
90 140 CIMR-E7Z4090 40900 40901 -
110 160 CIMR-E7Z4110 41100 41101 -
132 200 CIMR-E7Z4132 41320 41321 -
160 230 CIMR-E7Z4160 41600 41601 -
185 280 CIMR-E7Z4185 41850 - -
220 390 CIMR-E7Z4220 42200 - -
300 510 CIMR-E7Z4300 43000 - -
1-3
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks upon delivery
Item Method
Has the correct Inverter model been delivered? Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components loose? Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
Additionally check that following parts are delivered in the package with the IP54 inverter:
Table 1.3 Additional Deliveries with IP54 Inverters
Part Name Qty.
Cable Gland (for Input) 1
Cable Gland (for Motor Output) 1
Cable Gland (for Control) 1
Cable Gland (for Fieldbus) 1
Door Key 1
Blind Plug (Control Cable Entry) 1
Blind Plug (Fieldbus Cable Entry) 1
If any irregularities in the above items are found, contact the agency from which the Inverter was purchased or
your Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifica-
tions, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard European Inverter: 3-phase, 400 VAC, 0.55 kW,
NEMA 1 / IP20 standards
Inverter model MODEL: CIMR-E7Z40P4 SPEC: 40P41A Inverter

Input specifications specifications
Output specifications OUTPUT: AC3PH 0-480V 0-200Hz 1.8A 1.4kVA

Lot number Mass
Serial number Software Number
Fig 1.1 Nameplate Example
1-4
Inverter Model Numbers

The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR – E7Z40P4
Inverter Max. Motor Power
0P4 0.55 kW
Varispeed E7 0P7 0.75 kW
to to
European Spec. 300 300 kW
Voltage Class
2 200 V
4 400 V
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity,
the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
40P41A
Voltage Class Revision
2 200 V
4 400 V Protection
0 IP00
Max. Motor Power 1 IP20
0P4 0.55 kW 2 IP54
0P7 0.75 kW
to to
300 300 kW
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
Inverter Software Version

The Inverter software version can be read out from the monitor parameter U1-14. The parameter shows the
last four digits of the software number (e.g. display is “3021” for the software version VSE103021).
This manual describes the functionality of the inverter software version VSE103021.
Older software versions do not support all described functions. Check the software versions before
starting to work with this manual.
IMPORTANT
1-5
Component Names
Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4, the terminal arrangement
in Fig 1.5
Top cover
Front cover
Mounting hole
Digital Operator Diecast case
Terminal cover
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
Fig 1.4 NEMA 1 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)
The top cover is a protection against foreign bodies (screws, metal scrap from drilling etc.), which could fall
into the inverter during the installation in the cabinet.
Remove the top cover when the installation is finished!
IMPORTANT
SN SC SP A1 A2 +V AC -V MP AC RP R+ R- M5 M6 MA MB MC
E(G) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 FM AC AM IG S+ S- M3 M4 M1 M2 E(G)
Control Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Terminals
NOT USED
Charge Indicator
Ground Terminal
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or less)
1-6
Inverters of 22 kW or More
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.6, the terminal arrangement
in Fig 1.7
Mounting holes
Inverter cover
Cooling fan
Front cover
Digital Operator
Nameplate
Terminal cover
Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)
Carge Indicator
Ground Terminals
Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22kW or More)
1-7
Protection Class IP54
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.8.
Inverter enclosure
Digital Operator
Door Locks
Nameplate
Mounting Holes
Door
Cable Entry Plate
Fig 1.8 IP54 Inverter Appearance
1-8
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
IP00 Inverters
W1 W1 4-d
4-d
H1
H1
H
t1
t1
H2
H2
W D1
D1
3 D Max.10 W Max.10 5 D
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 110 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW
W1
Ø
W2
H1
t1
W3
D1
H2
W1 D
5
W
15
Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of IP00 Inverters
1-9
NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters
W1 4-d
W1 4-d
H1
H0
H1
H0
H
H
H2
t1 t1
H3
Max.10
H2
H3
W D1 D1
Max.10 W Max.10 5 D
3 D
Grommet
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.55 to 18.5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 to 75 kW
Fig 1.10 Exterior Diagrams of NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters
IP54 Inverters
2 - lifting holes
W D W1 4-d
H
H1
H2
t1
Fig 1.11 Exterior Diagrams of IP54 Inverters
1-10
Table 1.4 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) from 0.4 to 160 kW, IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20
Caloric Value
Max. Dimensions (mm)
(W)
Appli- Cool-
Protection Class IP00 Protection Class NEMA 1 / IP20 Total ing
Voltage cable
Class Motor Moun Exter Inter- Heat Metho
Appr Appr
Output ting nal nal Gen- d
W H D W1 H1 H2 D1 t1 ox. W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1 ox. era-
[kW] Holes
Mass Mass tion
d*
0.55 20 39 59
0.75 27 42 69 Natu-
157 39 3 157 39 3
1.5 50 50 100 ral
140 280 126 266 7 5 140 280 126 280 266 7 5 M5
2.2 0 70 59 129
3.7 112 74 186
177 59 4 177 59 4
5.5 164 84 248
7.5 6 300 6 219 113 332
200 300 197 186 285 7.5 65.5 200 197 186 300 285 8 65.5
11 7 310 10 7 374 170 544
200 V 15 350 0 429 183 612
(3- 240 350 207 216 335 8 78 2.3 11 240 207 216 350 335 78 2.3 11 M6
phase) 18.5 380 30 501 211 712
7.5
22 250 400 195 385 21 254 535 195 400 385 135 24 586 274 860
258 7.5 100 258 100 Fan
30 275 450 220 435 24 279 615 220 450 435 165 27 865 352 1217
37 298 100 57 298 100 62 1015 411 1426
375 600 250 575 380 809 250 600 575 209
45 328 63 328 68 1266 505 1771
12.5 3.2 12.5 3.2 M10
55 86 94 1588 619 2207
450 725 348 325 700 130 453 1027 348 325 725 700 302 130
75 87 95 2019 838 2857
90 500 850 358 370 820 108 504 1243 358 370 850 820 15 390 4.5 114 2437 997 3434
15 4.5 M12
110 575 885 378 445 855 140 150 --- 2733 1242 3975
0.55 14 39 53
Natu-
0.75 157 39 3 157 39 3 17 41 58
ral
1.5 36 48 84
2.2 140 280 126 266 7 5 140 280 126 266 266 7 5 M5 59 56 115
3.7 80 68 148
177 59 4 177 59 4
4.0 0 91 70 161
5.5 127 82 209
7.5 193 114 307
200 300 197 186 285 8 65.5 6 200 300 197 186 300 285 8 65.5 6
11 252 158 410
400 V 15 326 172 498

240 350 207 216 335 78 10 240 350 207 216 350 335 78 10
(3- 18.5 426 208 634
phase) 22 2.3 2.3 M6 466 259 725
279 450 258 220 435 100 21 279 535 258 220 450 435 100 24 Fan
30 7.5 7.5 85 678 317 995
37 635 784 360 1144
45 325 550 283 260 535 105 36 329 283 260 550 535 105 40 901 415 1316
715 165
55 1203 495 1698
75 88 96 1399 575 1974
450 725 348 325 700 12.5 3.2 453 1027 348 325 725 700 12.5 302 3.2 M10
90 89 97 1614 671 2285
130 130
110 102 122 2097 853 2950
500 850 358 370 820 15 504 1243 358 370 850 820 15 393
132 4.5 120 4.5 130 M12 2388 1002 3390
160 575 916 378 445 855 45.8 140 160 579 1324 378 445 916 855 46 408 140 170 2791 1147 3938
Table 1.5 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) of 400V Class Inverters of 185 kW to 300 kW, IP00
Max. Dimensions (mm) Caloric Value (W)
Applica- Protection Class IP00 Total
Voltage Mount- Cooling
ble Motor Exter- Heat
Class Approx. ing Internal Method
Output W H D W1 W2 W3 H1 H2 D1 t1 nal Genera-
[kW] Mass Holes d tion
185 260 3237 1372 4609
400V 710 1305 413 540 240 270 1270 15 125.5 4.5
220 280 M12 3740 1537 5277 Fan
(3-phase)
300 916 1475 413 730 365 365 1440 15 125.5 4.5 405 5838 2320 8158
1-11
Table 1.6 Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) of 400V class inverters 7.5 to 55 kW, IP54
Max. Dimensions (mm)

Applica-
Voltage Total Cooling
ble Motor Mount-
Class Approx. Heat Method
Output W H D W1 H1 H2 t1 ing
Mass Genera-
[kW] Holes d
tion
7.5 302
240 25
11 ∅ 10 423
350 600 260 576 9 2.5
15 M8 531
260 30
18.5 655
400V
22 ∅ 12 754 Fan
(3-phase) 410 650 300 270 620 12 2.5 43
30 M10 989
37 1145
∅ 14
45 580 750 330 410 714 11 2.5 71 1317
M10
55 1701
1-12
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment.
Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity
Protection Class IP20 and IP54 -10 to + 40 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection Class IP00 -10 to + 45 °C 95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the NEMA 1 and IP00 Inverters. Be sure to remove the
top cover before operating a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or less inside a panel.
• Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally
enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or
other foreign matter does enter the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location without in direct sunlight.
• The IP54 Inverters provide protection from non-conductive dust and splashing water from all directions.
Install the Inverter indoors in a heated and controlled environment to avoid condensation inside the
Inverter.
• Keep any water or dust outside of the IP54 Inverter when wiring.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature

To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the IP00 or NEMA 1 Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box,
use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.
When the IP54 Inverter is installed in a environment with low temperatures or when the Inverter remains
switched off for a long time, condensation may occur inside the Inverter. In that case additional heaters may
effectively prevent condensation inside the inverter.
Protecting the IP00 or NEMA 1 Inverter from Foreign Matter

Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1-13
Additional Installation Precautions for the IP54 Inverters
• Ensure that the door locks are closed before carrying the Inverter. Always hold the case when carrying the
Inverter, do not carry it holding the door or the cable glands. If the door locks are open or the Inverter is
held by the door (or cable glands) when carrying the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting
injury.
• Pay attention not to damage the cable glands when lifting. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged by
ingress of water or dust.
Keeping the IP54 protection

• Mount the blind plugs attached for option and control entry if these terminals are not connected
• Pay attention not to damage the cable glands during the installation
1-14
Installation Orientation and Space
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always pro-
vide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
A
B
Air
30mm min. 30mm min. 120mm min.

50mm
min. Air
Horizontal Space Vertical Space
A B
200V class inverter, 0.55 to 90 kW
50 mm 120 mm
400V class inverter, 0.55 to 132 kW
200V class inverter, 110 kW
120 mm 120 mm
400V class inverter, 160 to 220 kW
400V class inverter, 300 kW 300 mm 300 mm
Fig 1.12 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for Inverters of all protection classes, either
IP00, NEMA 1 / IP20 and IP54 Inverters.
2. Always remove the top cover after installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW
or less in a panel.
IMPORTANT
3. Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a
200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 kW or more in a panel.
4. When IP54 Inverters are installed side by side provide a distance of 60mm or more between the
Inverters
1-15
Accessing the Inverter Terminals
Removing the Terminal Cover (IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters)

Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc-
tions of arrows 1, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.13 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-E7Z25P51 Shown Above)
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
Fig 1.14 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-E7Z20220 Shown Above)
Attaching the Terminal Cover

When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce-
dure.
For Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove
on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1-16
Accessing the Inverter Terminals
Opening the Door (IP54 Inverters)

Unlock the door locks with the provided key by pushing and rotating it 90 degrees in the directions of arrow 1
and open the door in the direction of arrow 2.
When opening the door, always take special care so that powder, oil, water or other foreign materials do not
enter the Inverter.
OPEN
1
2
CLOSE
Fig 1.15 Opening the door on a IP54 inverter
Max. permitted door opening angle is approx. 135 degrees.

Opening the door over 135 degrees may damage the door hinges.
If the inverter is put into horizontal orientation for wiring or maintenance, the door should be supported
IMPORTANT
and operation should be finished quickly to avoid stress to the door hinges.
Closing the Door (IP54 Inverters)

Close and lock the door tightly by reversing the opening procedure.
1-17
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
The digital operator can only be removed on Inverters in protection class IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20

To attach optional cards or change the terminal board, remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition
to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the front
cover itself.
The removal and attachment procedures are described below.
Removing the Digital Operator

Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
2 1
Fig 1.16 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-E7Z45P5 Shown Above)
1-18
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover

Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
Fig 1.17 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-E7Z45P5 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover

After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front
cover in reverse order.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
1. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator

After attaching the terminal cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following proce-
dure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
1. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
Fig 1.18 Mounting the Digital Operator
1-19
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other
than those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
IMPORTANT
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
For inverters with an output of 22 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce-
dures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover

Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2.
Fig 1.19 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-E7Z2022 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover

After completing required work, such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card, attach the
front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator

Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
1-20
2
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal
wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connection Diagrams ........................................................2-2

Terminal Block Configuration.............................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ............................................2-7
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ......................................2-27
Wiring Check....................................................................2-37
Installing and Wiring Option Cards ..................................2-38
Connection Diagrams
The connection diagrams of the Inverters are shown in Fig 2.1 and Fig 2.2
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
DC reactor to improve input
power factor (optional)
U X
Short-circuit bar
1
Main 1 2
contactor
Fuse Varispeed E7 Motor
L1 R/L1 U/T1
3-phase power
supply L2 Line S/L2 CIMR- V/T2 M
380 to 480 V L3 Filter T/L3 E7Z47P51 W/T3
50/60 Hz
PE
Forward Run/Stop S1 MA
Fault contact output
MB 250 VAC, 1 A max.
Reverse Run/Stop S2 30 VDC, 1 A max.
MC
External fault S3
Fault reset S4 M1
Multi-function Contact output 1
Multi-step speed setting 1 S5 M2 [Default: During run]
digital inputs
[Factory settings] Multi-function digital
Multi-step speed setting 2 S6 M3 output
Contact output 2
250 VAC, 1 A max.
M4 [Default: Zero speed]
Jog frequency selection S7 30 VDC, 1 A max.
SN
SC
SP
24V
E(G) E(G)
Shield Shield 3
terminal terminal
Adjustment,
Adjustment +V Analog input power supply 20 k Ω
+15 V, 20 mA Multi-function analog output 1
2k Ω FM
+ - (0 to 10 V, 2 mA)
3
0 to 10V A1 Analog input 1: Master FM
[Default: Output frequency , 0 to 10 V]
2k Ω frequency reference
2 0 to 10 V (20 k Ω )
1 Adjustment,
20 k Ω
4 to 20mA A2 Multi-function analog input 1:
[Default: Frequency Bias + - Multi-function analog output 2
AM
P P 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω )] AM (0 to 10 V, 2 mA)
AC [Default: Output power, 0 to 10 V]
0V AC
-V
Analog input power supply
-15 V, 20 mA
2CN
Input Option Cards
Terminating
resistance
R+
P R-
MEMOBUS
communication S+
RS-485/422
P S-
IG
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires P
shielded wires
Fig 2.1 Connection Diagram of IP20 Inverters (Model CIMR-E7Z47P51 Shown Above)
2-2
Connection Diagrams
DC reactor to improve input

power factor (optional)
U X
Short-circuit bar
1
Main 1 2
contactor
Fuse Varispeed E7 Motor
3-phase power L1 R/L1
CIMR-E7Z47P52 U/T1
supply
L2 S/L2 V/T2 M
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz L3 T/L3 W/T3
PE
Forward Run/Stop S1 MA
Fault contact output
Reverse Run/Stop S2 30 VDC, 1 A max.
MC
External fault S3
Fault reset S4 M1
digital inputs
Contact output 2
250 VAC, 1 A max.
SN
SC
SP
24V
E(G) E(G)
Shield Shield 3
terminal terminal
Adjustment,
Adjustment +V Analog input power supply 20 k Ω
+15 V, 20 mA Multi-function analog output 1
2k Ω FM
+ - (0 to 10 V, 2 mA)
3
0 to 10V A1 Analog input 1: Master FM
[Default: Output frequency, 0 to 10 V]
2kΩ frequency reference
2 0 to 10 V (20 k Ω )
1 Adjustment,
20 k Ω
4 to 20mA A2 Multi-function analog input 1:
[Default: Frequency Bias + - Multi-function analog output 2
AM
P P 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω )] AM (0 to 10 V, 2 mA)
AC [Default: Output power, 0 to 10 V]
0V AC
-V
Analog input power supply
-15 V, 20 mA
2CN
Input Option Cards
Terminating
resistance
R+
P R-
MEMOBUS
communication
S+
RS-485/422
P S-
IG
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires P
shielded wires
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram of IP54 Inverters (Model CIMR-E7Z47P52 Shown Above)
2-3
Circuit Descriptions
Refer to the numbers indicated in Fig 2.1 and Fig 2.2.
1 These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation.
2 These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and
reinforced insulation. These circuits may be interconnected with SELV (or equivalent) or non-
SELV* circuits, but not both.
3 Inverter supplied by four-wire-system source (neutral grounded)
These circuits are SELV* circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation
consisting of double and reinforced insulation. These circuits may only be interconnected with
other SELV* (or equivalent) circuits.
Inverter supplied by three-wire-system source (ungrounded or corner grounded)

These circuits are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective separation, but only with
basic insulation. These circuits must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible,
unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation.
* SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) circuits have no direct connection to the primary power and are supplied
by a transformer or equivalent isolating device. The circuits are designed and protected, so that, under normal
and fault condition, its voltage does not exceed a safe value. (See IEC 61010)
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
2. The output current capability of the +V terminal is 20 mA.

3. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single cir-
cles.
4. The wiring of the digital inputs S1 to S7 is shown for the connection of relay contacts or NPN transistors (0V com-
mon and sinking mode). This is the default setting.
For the connection of PNP transistors or for using a 24V external power supply, refer to page 2-33, Sinking/Sourc-
ing Mode.
5. The master speed frequency reference can be input either at terminal A1 or at terminal A2 by changing the setting
of parameter H3-13. The default setting is terminal A2.
6. DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters from 22 up to 110 kW and 400
V Class Inverters from 22 up to 300 kW. A DC reactor is an option only for Inverters of 18.5 kW or less. Remove
the short circuit bar when connecting a DC reactor.
2-4
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangements are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
M M
SN SC SP A1 A2 +V AC -VF P ACARP R+ R- M5 M6 MA MB C E(G
E(G) S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 M AC M IG S+ S- M3 M4 M1 M2 )

NOT USED
Charge Indicator
Ground Terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200V / 400V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW)
Carge Indicator
Ground Terminals
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200V / 400V Class Inverter of 22 kW or more)
2-5
Control Terminals
Output Terminals
- N OT U SED MOTOR
+1 +2 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
CAUTION Terminal tightening torque;

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 Refer to manual for connections. M5:2.5N.m
Use 75°C Cu wires or equivalent. M6:4.0-5.0N.m
NPJU 30012 -1-1
Input Terminals
Ground Terminals
Fig 2.5 Terminal Arrangement (IP54 Inverter of 18.5kW)
Control Terminals
Shielding Clamp
for Control Cables
R/L1 S/L2 S/L3
Input Terminals
Output Terminals
Shielding Clamp
for Motor Cables
Ground Terminals
Fig 2.6 Terminal Arrangement (IP54 Inverter of 37kW)
2-6
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Crimp Terminals

Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from the following tables.
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Recom-
Inverter Termi- Tightening Possible
mended
Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Type
Wire Size
CIMR- Screws (N•m) mm2(AWG)
mm2 (AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1.5 to 4 2.5
E7Z20P4 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1.5 to 4 2.5
E7Z20P7 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1.5 to 4 2.5
E7Z21P5 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1.5 to 4 2
E7Z22P2 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 4
E7Z23P7 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(12 to 10) (12)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 6
E7Z25P5 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(10) (10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 10
E7Z27P5 M5 2.5
(8 to 6) (8)
Power cables,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, e.g., 600 V vinyl
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 16
E7Z2011 M5 2.5 power cables
(6 to 4) (6)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/ 25 25

M6 4.0 to 5.0
T2, W/T3 (4 to 2) (4)
E7Z2015 10
B1, B2 M5 2.5 -
(8 to 6)
25 25
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/ 25 to 35 25
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T2, W/T3 (3 to 2) (3)
E7Z2018 10
B1, B2 M5 2.5 -
(8 to 6)
25 25
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(4) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 25 to 35 25
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (3 to 1) (3)
E7Z2022 10 to 16
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
25 to 35 25
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 50 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1 to 1/0) (1)
E7Z2030 10 to 16
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
25 to 35 25
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
2-7
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
CIMR- Screws (N•m) mm2(AWG)
mm2 (AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 70 to 95 70
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
6 to 16
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
E7Z2037 (10 to 4)
35 to 70 35
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(2 to 2/0) (2)
0.5 to 4 1.5
r/l1, Δ/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 U/T1, 95 95
M10 17.6 to 22.5
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (3/0 to 4/0) (3/0)
6 to 16
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
E7Z2045 (10 to 4)
50 to 70 50
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(1 to 2/0) (1)
0.5 to 4 1.5
r/l1, Δ/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
50 to 95 50 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
90 90
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 M10 17.6 to 22.5
(4/0) (4/0)
6 to 70
E7Z2055 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
(10 to 2/0)
35 to 95 50
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3 to 4/0) (1/0)
0.5 to 4 1.5
r/l1, Δ/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
95 to 122 95 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M12 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 250) (3/0 × 2P)
95 95 × 2P Power cables,
(3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P) e.g., 600 V vinyl
6 to 70 power cables
E7Z2075 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
(10 to 2/0)
95 to 185 95
M10 17.6 to 22.5
(3/0 to 400) (3/0)
0.5 to 4 1.5
r/l1, Δ/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
150 to 185 150 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 (250 to 400) (250 × 2P)
M12 31.4 to 39.2
95 to 150 95 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
(4/0 to 300) (4/0 × 2P)
6 to 70
E7Z2090 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
(10 to 2/0)
70 to 150 70 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 300) (2/0 × 2P)
0.5 to 4 1.5
r/l1, Δ/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
240 × 2P, or
240 to 300 50 × 4P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 (350 to 600) (350 × 2P, or
1/0 × 2P)
M12 31.4 to 39.2
150 × 2P, or
150 to 300 50 × 4P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
(300 to 600) (300 × 2P, or
E7Z2110 1/0 × 4P)
6 to 70
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 –
(10 to 2/0)
150 150 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(300) (300 × 2P)
0.5 to 4 1.5
r/l1, Δ/l2 M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°
2-8
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes, NEMA 1/ IP20 and IP00 Inverters
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
CIMR- Screws (N•m) mm2 (AWG)
mm2 (AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1.5 to 4 2.5
E7Z40P4 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1.5 to 4 2.5
E7Z40P7 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1.5 to 4 2.5
E7Z41P5 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 1.5 to 4 2.5
E7Z42P2 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) (14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 4

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 to 4 (12)
E7Z43P7 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2.5
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 4
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 to 4 (12)
E7Z44P0 M4 1.2 to 1.5
(14 to 10) 2.5
(14)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 4 4
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (12 to 10) (12)
E7Z45P5 M4 1.2 to 1.5
2.5 to 4 2.5
Power cables,
(14 to 10) (14)
e.g., 600 V vinyl
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 6 6 power cables
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (10) (10)
E7Z47P5 M4 1.2 to 1.5
4 4
(12 to 10) (12)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 10
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 to 10 (8)
E7Z4011 M5 2.5
(10 to 6) 6
(10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, B1, B2, 10 10
M5 2.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 (8 to 6) (8)
E7Z4015
M5 2.5 6 to 10 6
(M6) (4.0 to 5.0) (10 to 6) (10)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 2, U/T1, V/ 10 to 35 10
M6 4.0 to 5.0
T2, W/T3 (8 to 2) (8)
E7Z4018 10 10
B1, B2 M5 2.5
(8) (8)
10 to 16 10
M6 4.0 to 5.0
(8 to 4) (8)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/ 16 16
M6 4.0 to 5.0
T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (6 to 4) (6)
E7Z4022
16 to 25 16
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(6 to 2) (6)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, 3, U/T1, V/ 25 25
M6 4.0 to 5.0
T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (4) (4)
E7Z4030
25 to 35 25
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
2-9
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 25 to 50 35
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (4 to 1/0) (2)
E7Z4037 10 to 16
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
25 to 35 25
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, W/ 35 to 50 35
M8 9.0 to 10.0
T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (2 to 1/0) (2)
E7Z4045 10 to 16
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
25 to 35 25
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1, U/T1, V/T2, 50 50
M8 9.0 to 10.0
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1 to 1/0) (1)
E7Z4055 10 to 16
3 M6 4.0 to 5.0 -
(8 to 4)
25 to 35 25
M8 9.0 to 10.0
(4 to 2) (4)
70 to 95 70
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M10 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 4/0) (2/0)
50 to 100 50
(1/0 to 4/0) (1/0)
6 to 16
E7Z4075 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(10 to 4)
35 to 70 35
M10 31.4 to 39.2
(2 to 2/0) (2)
r/l1, Δ200/l2200, Δ400/l2400 0.5 to 4 1.5 Power cables,
M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16) e.g., 600 V vinyl
95 95 power cables
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 M10 31.4 to 39.2
(3/0 to 4/0) (4/0)
95 95
(3/0 to 4/0) (4/0)
10 to 16
E7Z4090 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 4)
50 to 95 50
M10 31.4 to 39.2
(1 to 4/0) (1)
r/l1, Δ200/l2200, Δ400/l2400 0.5 to 4 1.5
M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 50 to 95 50 × 2P
M10 31.4 to 39.2
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (1/0 to 4/0) (1/0 × 2P)
10 to 70
3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
E7Z4110 (8 to 2/0)
70 to 150 70
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(2/0 to 300) (2/0)
r/l1, Δ200/l2200, Δ400/l2400 0.5 to 4 1.5
M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
95 95 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 (3/0 to 4/0) (3/0 × 2P)
M10 31.4 to 39.2
75 to 95 75 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
(2/0 to 4/0) (2/0 × 2P)
10 to 70
E7Z4132 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
95 to 150 95
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(4/0 to 300) (4/0)
r/l1, Δ200/l2200, Δ400/l2400 0.5 to 4 1.5
M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
2-10
Recom-
mended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
95 to 185 95 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , 1 (4/0 to 400) (4/0 × 2P)
M12 31.4 to 39.2
95 to 185 95 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
(3/0 to 400) (3/0 × 2P)
10 to 70
E7Z4160 3 M8 8.8 to 10.8 -
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150 50 × 2P
M12 31.4 to 39.2
(1/0 to 300) (1/0 × 2P)
r/l1, Δ200/l2200, Δ400/l2400 0.5 to 4 1.5
M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
150 × 2P
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
(300 × 2P)
120 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
(250 × 2P)
95 to 300 300 × 2P
M16 78.4 to 98
, 1 (4/0 to 600) (600 × 2P)
E7Z4185
3 –
95 × 2P
(3/0 × 2P
r/l1, Δ200/l2200, Δ400/l2400 0.5 to 4 1.5
M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
Power cables,
240 × 2P e.g., 600 V vinyl
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
(500 × 2P) power cables
240 × 2P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
(400 × 2P)
95 to 300 120 × 4P
M16 78.4 to 98
, 1 (4/0 to 600) (250 × 4P)
E7Z4220
3 –
120 × 2P
(250 × 2P)
r/l1, Δ200/l2200, Δ400/l2400 0.5 to 4 1.5
M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 4P
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 (250 × 4P)
120 × 4P
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
(4/0 × 4P)
95 to 300
M16 78.4 to 98 240 × 4P
, 1 (4/0 to 600)
E7Z4300 (400 × 4P)
3 –
120 × 2P
(250 × 2P
r/l1, Δ200/l2200, Δ400/l2400 0.5 to 4 1.5
M4 1.3 to 1.4
(20 to 10) (16)
2-11
Table 2.3 400 V Class Wire Sizes, IP54 Inverters
Recom- Possible
mended Minimum
Termi- Tightening Clamp-
Inverter Model Wire Size Cable Gland Diam Over
Terminal Symbol nal Torque ing Cable
CIMR- size Braid Shield
Screws (N•m) mm2 Diam.
(mm)
(AWG) (mm)
INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, ) M5 2.5 6 M32 (Plastic) 11 to 21 -

E7Z47P52 OUTPUT (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, ) M4 1.8 6 M32 (Metal) 11 to 21 9.0
, 1 M4 1.8 6 - - -

E7Z40112 OUTPUT (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, ) M5 2.5 10 M32 (Metal) 11 to 21 9.0
, 1 M5 2.5 10 - - -

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 M5 2.5
E7Z40152 OUTPUT 10 M32 (Metal) 11 to 21 9.0
( ) M6 4.0 to 5.0
, 1 M5 2.5 10 - - -

E7Z40182 OUTPUT (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, ) M6 4.0 to 5.0 10 M32 (Metal) 11 to 21 9.0
, 1 M6 4.0 to 5.0 10 - - -
INPUT (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, ) M6 4.0 to 5.0 16 M40 (Plastic) 19 to 28 -

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) M6 4.0 to 5.0
( ) M8 9.0 to 10.0
, 1 M6 4.0 to 5.0 16 - - -

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) M6 4.0 to 5.0
( ) M8 9.0 to 10.0
, 1 M6 4.0 to 5.0 25 - - -

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) M8 9.0 to 10.0
E7Z40372 OUTPUT 35 M50 (Metal) 19 to 28 -
( ) M8 9.0 to 10.0
, 1 M8 9.0 to 10.0 35 - - -

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) M8 9.0 to 10.0
( ) M8 9.0 to 10.0
, 1 M8 9.0 to 10.0 35 - - -

(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3) M8 9.0 to 10.0
( ) M8 9.0 to 10.0
, 1 M8 9.0 to 10.0 50 - - -
Table 2.4 Recommended Wire Types for IP54 Inverters
INPUT 4-core Power Cable*1
OUTPUT 4-core shielded Power Cable*1
(-), (+1) e.g. 600V Vinyl Power Cable

*1. 4-core power cables or 4-core shielded power cables are available e.g. Lappkabel (Ölflex) or Pirelli
2-12
Table 2.5 Tightening Torques for Cable Gland
Tightening Torque (Nm)

Cable Gland Size
Plastic Metal
M16 3.0 10.0
M20 6.0 12.0

M25 8.0 12.0
M32 10.0 18.0
M40 13.0 18.0
M50 15.0 20.0
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage.
Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:
IMPORTANT Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
2-13
Recommended Crimp Terminals
Table 2.6 Recommended Crimp Terminals
Recommended Crimp Terminals
Wire Cross Section
Terminal Screws Klaukey
(mm²) JST
a b
0.5-1.0 M4 620/4 1620/4 GS4-1
1.5 M4 630/4 1620/4 GS4-1
2.5 M4 630/4 1630/4 GS4-2.5
4 M4 650/4 1650/4 GS4-6
M4 650/4 1650/4 GS4-6
M5 101 R/5 1650/5 GS5-6

6
M6 101 R/6 1650/6 GS6-6
M8 101 R/8 1650/8 GS8-6
M5 102 R/5 1652/5 GS5-10
10 M6 102 R/6 1652/6 GS6-10
M8 102 R/8 1652/8 GS8-10
M5 *1 1653/5 GS5-16
103 R/5
16 M6 103 R/6 1653/6 GS6-16
M8 103 R/8 1653/8 GS8-16
M6 104 R/6 1654/6 GS6-25

25
M8 104 R/8 1654/8 GS8-25
M6 105 R/6 1655/6 GS6-35
35 M8 105 R/8 1655/8 GS8-35
M10 105 R/10 1655/10 GS10-35
M8 106 R/8 1656/8 GS8-50
50 M10 106 R/10 1656/10 GS10-50

M12 106 R/12 1656/12 GS12-50
M8 107 R/8 1657/8 GS8-70
70 M10 107 R/10 1657/10 GS10-70
M12 107 R/12 1657/12 GS12-70
M10 108 R/10 1658/10 GS10-95
95 M12 108 R/12 1658/12 GS12-95
M16 108 R/16 1658/16 GS16-95
M12 109 R/12 1659/12 GS12-120

120
M16 109 R/16 1659/16 GS16-120
M12 110 R/12 1660/12 GS12-150

150
M16 110 R/16 1660/16 GS16-150
M12 112 R/12 1662/12 GS12-240

240
M16 112 R/16 1662/16 GS16-240
300 M16 113 R/16 - -
*1. not applicable for E7Z2011
2-14
Main Circuit Terminal Functions

Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.7. Wire the termi-
nals correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.7 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Model: CIMR-E7Z
Purpose Terminal Symbol
200 V Class 400 V Class
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
Main circuit power input
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31 2022 to 2110 4022 to 4300
Inverter outputs U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
DC bus terminals 1, 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
DC reactor connection 1, 2 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018
Braking Unit connection 3, 2022 to 2110 4022 to 4300
Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300
2-15
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Table 2.8
Table 2.8 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations (IP00, NEMA 1/IP20 Inverters)
200 V Class 400 V Class
CIMR-E7Z20P4 to 2018 CIMR-E7Z40P4 to 4018
B1 B2 B1 B2
+ 1 + 1
+ 2 + 2
U U
R R
S V S V
T T
W W
- -
Power Control Power Control

Supply Circuit Supply Circuit
CIMR-E7Z2022 to 2030 CIMR-E7Z4022 to 4055

+ 3 +3
+ 1 +1
R R
U U
S S
T V T V
R1 R1
W W
S1 S1
T1 T1
- -


+ 3 + 3
+ 1 + 1
R/L1 R/L1
U/T1 U/T1
S/L2 S/L2
T/L3 V/T2 T/L3 V/T2
R1/L11 R1/L11
W/T3 W/T3
S1/L21 S1/L21
T1/L31 T1/L31
- -
400/200
r/l1 r/l1
s 200/l2200 s 200/l2200
s 400/l2400
Note: Consult your Omron Yaskawa Motion Control representative before using 12-phase rectification.
2-16
Table 2.9 Main Circuit Configurations (IP54 Inverters)

400 V class
CIMR-E7Z47P52 to 40182
1
2
R/L1 U/T1
EMC
S/L2 V/T2
filter
T/L3 W/T3
Power Control
supply circuits
CIMR-E7Z40222 to 40552
3
R/L1 U/T1
EMC
S/L2 V/T2
Filter
T/L3 W/T3
Power Control
Supply Circuits
2-17
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter (NEMA 1 / IP20) connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.7. These are the same for both
200 V Class and 400 V Class Inverters. Fig 2.8 shows the standard Inverter connection diagrams for the IP54
Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-E7Z20P4 to 2018 CIMR-E7Z2022, 2030
and 40P4 to 4018 and 4022 to 4055
Braking Braking
Resistor (optional) Resistor (optional)
CDBR Braking CDBR Braking

Unit (optional) Unit (optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
+ 1 + 3 -
- + 1 + 2
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
R/L1 U/T1
T/L3 W/T3
S/L2 V/T2 M 3 Phase 200VAC or
T/L3 W/T3 400VAC R1/L11
3 Phase 200VAC or S1/L21

400VAC
T1/L31
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reac- The DC reactor is built in.
tor.

Braking
Braking Resistor (optional)
Resistor (optional)
CDBR Braking
CDBR Braking Unit (optional)
Unit (optional)
+ 1 + 3 -
+ 1 + 3 - U/T1
R/L1
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3
T/L3 W/T3
3 Phase 200VAC or
3 Phase 200VAC or 400VAC R1/L11
400VAC R1/L11
S1/L21
S1/L21
T1/L31
T1/L31
r / l1
r / l1
200 / l2 200
/ l2
400 / l2 400
Control power is supplied internally from the DC bus at all inverter models.
Fig 2.7 Main Circuit Terminal Connections for NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters
2-18
CIMR-E7Z47P72 to 4055
Braking
Resistor (optional)
CDBR Braking
Unit (optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
- + 1 + 2
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2 M
T/L3 W/T3
3 Phase 400VAC
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC reac-

tor.
Fig 2.8 Main Circuit Terminal Connections for IP54 Inverters
2-19
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs

Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input.
Installing Fuses
To protect the inverter, it is recommended to use semiconductor fuses like they are shown in the table below.
Table 2.10 Input Fuses
Rated Inverter Fuse Selection Selection Example (Ferraz)
Inverter Type Output 2 2
Current (A)
Voltage (V) Current (A) I t (A s) Model Rating I2t (A2s)
20P4 3.2 240 10 12~25 A60Q12-2 600V / 12A 17
20P7 4.1 240 10 12~25 A60Q12-2 600V / 12A 17
21P5 7.0 240 15 23~55 A60Q15-2 600V / 15A 26
22P2 9.6 240 20 34~98 A60Q20-2 600V / 20A 41
23P7 15 240 30 82~220 A60Q30-2 600V / 30A 132
25P5 23 240 40 220~610 A50P50-4 500V / 50A 250
27P5 31 240 60 290~1300 A50P80-4 500V / 80A 640
2011 45 240 80 450~5000 A50P80-4 500V / 80A 640
2015 58 240 100 1200~7200 A50P125-4 500V / 125A 1600
2018 71 240 130 1800~7200 A50P150-4 500V / 150A 2200
2022 85 240 150 870~16200 A50P150-4 500V / 150A 2200
2030 115 240 180 1500~23000 A50P200-4 500V / 200A 4000
2037 145 240 240 2100~19000 A50P250-4 500V/ 250A 6200
2045 180 240 300 2700~55000 A50P300-4 500V / 300A 9000
2055 215 240 350 4000~55000 A50P350-4 500V / 350A 12000
2075 283 240 450 7100~64000 A50P450-4 500V / 450A 20000
2090 346 240 550 11000~64000 A50P600-4 500V / 600A 36000
2110 415 240 600 13000~83000 A50P600-4 500V / 600A 36000
40P4 1.8 480 5 6~55 A60Q10-2 600V / 10A 10

40P7 2.1 480 5 6~55 A60Q10-2 600V / 10A 10
41P5 3.7 480 10 10~55 A60Q12-2 600V / 12A 17
42P2 5.3 480 10 18~55 A60Q15-2 600V / 15A 26
43P7 7.6 480 15 34~72 A60Q20-2 600V / 20A 41
44P0 8.7 480 20 50~570 A60Q30-2 600V / 30A 132
45P5 12.5 480 25 100~570 A60Q30-2 600V / 30A 132
47P5 17 480 30 100~640 A60Q30-2 600V / 30A 132
4011 24 480 50 150~1300 A70P50-4 700V / 50A 300
4015 31 480 60 400~1800 A70P70-4 700V / 70A 590
4018 39 480 70 700~4100 A70P80-4 700V / 80A 770
4022 45 480 80 240~5800 A70P80-4 700V / 80A 770
4030 60 480 100 500~5800 A70P100-4 700V / 100A 1200
4037 75 480 125 750~5800 A70P125-4 700V / 125A 1900
4045 91 480 150 920~13000 A70P150-4 700V / 150A 2700
4055 112 480 150 1500~13000 A70P200-4 700V / 200A 4800
4075 150 480 250 3000~55000 A70P250-4 700V / 250A 7500
4090 180 480 300 3800~55000 A70P300-4 700V / 300A 11000
4110 216 480 350 5400~23000 A70P350-4 700V / 350A 15000
4132 260 480 400 7900~64000 A70P400-4 700V / 400A 19000
4160 304 480 450 14000~250000 A70P450-4 700V / 450A 24000
4185 370 480 600 20000~250000 A70P600-4 700V / 600A 43000
4220 506 480 700 34000~400000 A70P700-4 700V / 700A 59000
4300 675 480 900 52000~920000 A70P900-4 700V / 900A 97000
2-20
Installing a Moulded-case Circuit Breaker

When connecting the power input terminals (R/L2, S/L2, and T/L3) to the power supply using a moulded-case
circuit breaker (MCCB) observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times of the inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
Installing an Earth Leakage Breaker

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. If an earth leakage
breaker should be used, select a breaker that detects only the leakage current which is in the frequency range
that is hazardous to humans but not high-frequency leakage currents.
• For a special-purpose earth leakage breaker for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitiv-
ity amperage of at least 30 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general earth leakage breaker, choose one with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more
per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.
Installing a Magnetic Contactor

If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off by a control circuit, a magnetic contactor can be used.
The following things should be considered:
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Do not exceed one power up per hour.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the output phase sequence.
Installing an Input AC Reactor

If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or a phase advancing
capacitor is switched nearby, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the
inverter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac-
tor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include mag-
netic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
2-21
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor

Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 respective to the motor lead wires U, V, and W.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output termi-
nals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. If voltage is applied to the output
terminals, the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter cas-
ing, an electric shock or grounding may occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor

Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the
Inverter output may overheat and be damaged and may cause other parts to burn.
Using a Magnetic Contactor

Check the control sequence to make sure, that the magnetic contactor (MC) between the Inverter and motor is
not turned ON or OFF during inverter operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a
large inrush current will be created and the inverter’s overcurrent protection may operate. If the MC is turned
OFF while the Inverter is operating a large induced voltage may occur and damage the inverter output parts.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay Contact for Motor Protection

This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The control circuit
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, caus-
ing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-02) as shown in Table 2.11. (For details, refer to Chapter 5, User Parameters.)
Table 2.11 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length 50 m max. 100 m max. More than 100 m
Carrier frequency 15 kHz max. 10 kHz max. 5 kHz max.
2-22
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and
the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK NO
Fig 2.9 Ground Wiring
Connecting a Braking Unit (CDBR) and a Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB)

Connect a Braking Unit and a Braking Resistor Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2.10.
The Braking Resistor Unit will not work if L3-04 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for decelera-
tion). Hence the deceleration time may be longer than the set time (C1-02/04).
To prevent the braking unit/braking resistor unit from overheating, design the control circuit to turn OFF the
inverter output using the thermal overload relay of the Unit as shown in Fig 2.10.
CDBR
Braking Resistor
Braking Unit
+3 + +3
Thermal
Inverter Overload
Relay Contact
- - - 0
Thermal Overload
Relay Contact
Fig 2.10 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit
2-23
Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and jumper settings like shown in Fig
2.11. There is a jumper for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a master or slave. Select “Master” for
the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).
Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact
Braking Braking Braking

Resistor Resistor Resistor
Unit Unit Unit
Inverter
Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3
Braking Unit #1
Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact Thermal overload relay contact
Fig 2.11 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel
Wiring the Power Cables of IP54 Inverters

Special attention has to be paid for wiring the motor cables of the IP54 inverters. The smaller capacities fea-
ture an EMC cable gland which is used to earth the motor cable shield easily.
Installing the Metal (EMC) Cable Gland on IP54 Inverters 7.5 to 30kW
1. With the Standard Contacting:
Make a round cut into the outer sheath,

with a length of appr. 14mm from the end
of the sheath but do not remove the sheath.
Guide the cable through the gland.
appr. 15 mm
Pull off the cut-off outer sheath, remove

some part of the shield and pull the cable
back until the shield has proper contact to
the springs of the cable gland.
2-24
Close the cable gland.
2. With thin wires and without an inner sheath
Make a round cut into the sheath, with a

length of appr. 15 to 20mm and remove it.
appr. 15 to 20 mm
Pull back the braided shield over the outer

sheath, the inner shield should be kept for
easier guiding through the gland.
Guide the cable through the gland until the

shield has proper contact to the springs of
the cable gland and close the cable gland.
Note:
To ensure conformity to EMC regulations the shielded cable has to be locked tightly by the metal cable gland.
Confirm the cable length and the terminal specifications before fitting the metal cable gland.
2-25
Special Considerations for IP54 Inverters of 22 and 30kW capacity
Install the shielded output cable as shown in the Fig 2.12.
Remove the braided shield on the output cable entirely from the entry hole to the terminal end to avoid short
circuit to the input terminals or the filter.
Remove the braided shield entirely

from the entry hole to the terminal end.
Input Cable Output Cable

(Shielded Cable)
Fig 2.12 Motor Cable Installation for IP54 Inverters of 22 and 30kW
Installing the Motor Cable at IP54 Inverters of 37 to 55kW capacity

Install the shielded output cable as shown in the figure below. Remove the outer sheath and clamp the braided
shield by the earth clamp.
Remove the outer sheath

and clamp the braided
Earth Plate shield by the earth clamp
.
Earth Clamp Output Cable
Fig 2.13 Motor Cable Installation for IP54 Inverters of 37 to 55kW
2-26
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or oper-
ation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from main power lines or other control cir-
cuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency source (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield for the largest area of contact between shield and ground.
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.12.
Table 2.12 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all models)
IP54 Inverters Only
Possible Recom-
Wire mended Possible
Termi- Tighten-
Sizes Wire Size Cable Clamping
Terminals nal ing Torque Wire Type
Gland Cable
Screws (N•m) mm2 mm2
Size Diam.
(AWG) (AWG)
(mm)
FM, AC, AM, SC, SP,
SN, A1, A2, +V, -V, Single wire*1:
S1, S2, S3, S4, 0.14 to 2.5
• Shielded, twisted-
Phoenix Stranded 0.75
S5, S6, S7
type
0.5 to 0.6
(18) M25*2 9 to 17 pair wire*3
MA, MB, MC, M1, wire:
0.14 to 1.5 • Shielded, polyeth-
M2, M3, M4, ylene-covered,
R+, R-, S+, S-, IG (26 to 14)
vinyl sheath cable
0.5 to 2 1.25
E (G) M3.5 0.8 to 1.0 - -
(20 to 14) (12)
*1. We recommend using cable-end sleeves on signal lines to simplify wiring and to improve reliability.
*2. Refer to Table 2.5 for tightening torques for the cable glands.
*3. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
2-27
Cable-End Sleeves for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminals are shown in the following table.
Table 2.13 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wire Size mm2 (AWG) Model d1 d2 L Manufacturer

0.25 (24) AI 0.25 - 8YE 0.8 2 12.5
0.5 (20) AI 0.5 - 8WH 1.1 2.5 14
0.75 (18) AI 0.75 - 8GY 1.3 2.8 14 Phoenix Contact
1.25 (16) AI 1.5 - 8BK 1.8 3.4 14
2 (14) AI 2.5 - 8BU 2.3 4.2 14
Fig 2.14 Cable-End Sleeve Size
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly
Screwdriver Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for

7 mm if no cable-
end sleeve is
Solderless terminal or wire 3.5 mm max.
used. without soldering
Wires Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.15 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2-28
Earthing the Control Cable Shield in IP54 Inverters

For a appropriate shielding earth clamps have been mounted in the IP54 inverters. Fig 2.16 and Fig 2.17 show
where the earth clamps can be found.
Control Terminal
Cable Mounting Base Earth Clamp
Fig 2.16 Earth Clamp of IP54 Inverters with 7.5 to 18.5kW capacity
Control Earth Clamp

Terminal
Cable Tie
(optional)
Earth Clamp
Cable
Mounting
Base Control Cable
Cable Gland
Fig 2.17 Earth clamp of IP54 Inverters with 22 to 55kW
2-29
Use the following procedure to clamp and shield the control cables in the IP54 Inverters.
Loosen
both mounting screws for the earth clamp
Insert the shielded cable for control between earth clamp and cable mounting base
Tighten the screws alternately until screws are fixed to the end.
2-30
Control Circuit Terminal Functions

The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.14.
Table 2.14 Control Circuit Terminals with Default Settings
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
S1 Forward run/stop command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2 Reverse run/stop command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3 External fault input*1 Fault when ON.
S4 Fault reset*1 Reset when ON
Digital input signals
Functions are 24 VDC, 8 mA

S5 Multi-step speed reference 1*1 Auxiliary frequency ref- selected by set- Photocoupler isolation
(Master/auxiliary switch) erence when ON. ting H1-01 to
Multi-step speed 2 when H1-05.
S6 Multi-step speed reference 2*1 ON.
S7 Jog frequency reference*1 Jog frequency when ON.
SC Digital input common – –
SN Digital Input Neutral – –
SP Digital Input Power Supply +24VDC power supply for digital inputs 24 VDC, 250 mA max. *2
+V 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references 15 V (Max. curr.: 20mA)
A1 Frequency reference 0 to +10 V/100% 0 to +10 V (20 kΩ)
Analog input signals
Auxiliary analog fre- Function is 4 to 20 mA (250Ω)

A2 Auxiliary Frequency Reference quency reference; selected by set- 0 V to +10 V (20kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (250Ω) ting H3-09. 0 to 20 mA (250Ω)
-V -15 V power output -15 V power supply for analog references
AC Analog reference common – –
Shield wire, optional ground
E(G) – –
line connection point
M1 During run
Closed during Run
M2 (1NO contact) Function selected
Digital output signals
by H2-01 and Relay contacts

M3 CLOSED when output
Zero speed H2-02 Contact capacity:
frequency at zero level
M4 (1NO contact) 1 A max. at 250 VAC
(b2-01) or below
MA 1 A max. at 30 VDC*3
CLOSED across MA and MC during faults
MB Fault output signal
OPEN across MB and MC during faults
MC
Analog output frequency
Function selected
FM Output frequency signal;
by H4-01
0 to 10 V; 10V=FMAX
analog output
signals
AC Analog common – 0 to +10 V max. ±5%

Analog output power sig- 2 mA max.
nal; Function selected
AM Inverter output power
0 to 10V; 10V=max. by H4-04
appl. motor capacity
2-31
Table 2.14 Control Circuit Terminals with Default Settings
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
R+ MEMOBUS communications Differential input, PHC
R- input For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well isolation
RS-485/
as R- and S-.
422
S+ MEMOBUS communications Differential input, PHC

S- output isolation
IG Signal common – –
*1. The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting
1 for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7.
*2. Do not use this power supply for supplying any external equipment.
*3. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil with DC power supply, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.18
Flywheel diode
The rating of the flywheel diode

External power: Coil must be at least as high as the cir-
30 VDC max. 1 A max. cuit voltage.
Fig 2.18 Flywheel Diode Connection
Switch S1 - Standard Terminal Board

The Switch S1 can be used to terminate the internal RS422/485 port and for selecting the input signal type for
analog input A2. See Fig 2.19 for details.
S1
Off On
RS422/485 Port Termination Resistance
V I Analog Input A2 Current/Voltage Signal Selection
Fig 2.19 Standard terminal board - Switch S1 function
The settings of switch S1 is shown in the following table.

Name Function Setting
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resis- OFF: No terminating resistance
S1-1
tance ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
V: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)
S1-2 Input method for analog input A2
I: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
2-32
Switch S1 and Jumper CN15 - Optional Terminal Board

An optional terminal board which supports switching the signal type of the analog outputs FM and AM
between voltage and current is available.The switch over can be performed using jumper CN15. The switch
S1 has the same function like on the standard terminal board. See Fig 2.20 for details.
CN15
Ch1 Analog Output FM Current/Voltage Signal Selection
Ch2
Analog Output AM Current/Voltage Signal Selection
I V
S1
Off On
RS422/485 Port Termination Resistance
V I Analog Input A2 Current/Voltage Signal Selection
Fig 2.20 Optional terminal board - Switch S1 and jumper CN15 function
The settings of switch S1 and jumper CN15 are described in the following table.
Name Function Setting
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resis- OFF: No terminating resistance
S1-1
tance ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
V: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)
S1-2 Input method for analog input A2
I: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
CN15- Multifunction analog output FM voltage/ I: Current output
CH1 current switch V: Voltage output
CN15- Multifunction analog output AM voltage/ I: Current output
CH2 current switch V: Voltage output
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common, NPN) and sourcing mode
(+24V common, PNP) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external power supply is also supported,
providing more freedom in signal input methods.
Table 2.15 Sinking / Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Source - Sinking Mode (NPN) External Power Source - Sinking Mode (NPN)
External +24V
2-33
Table 2.15 Sinking / Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Source - Sourcing Mode (PNP) External Power Source - Sourcing Mode (PNP)
External +24V
2-34
Control Circuit Terminal Connections

Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.21.
Varispeed E7
CIMR-E7Z47P5
≈ ≈
Forward Run/Stop MA
S1 Fault contact output
Reverse Run/Stop S2
MC 30 VDC, 1 A max.
External fault S3
Fault reset S4 M1
digital inputs
Contact output 2
250 VAC, 1 A max.
SN
SC
SP
24V
E(G) E(G)
Shield Shield
terminal terminal
Adjustment
+V Analog input power supply
+15 V, 20 mA
3 2k Ω Adjustment,
0 to 10V A1 Analog input 1: Master
2kΩ frequency reference 20 k Ω
2 0 to 10 V (20 k Ω ) Multi-function analog output 1
1 FM
+ - (0 to 10 V, 2 mA)
FM
4 to 20mA A2 Multi-function analog input 1: [Default: Output frequency, 0 to 10 V]
[Default: Frequency Bias
P P 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω )] Adjustment,
AC
20 k Ω
0V Multi-function analog output 2
-V AM + -
Analog input power supply AM (0 to 10 V, 2 mA)
-15 V, 20 mA [Default: Output current, 0 to 10 V]
AC
Terminating
resistance
R+
P R-
MEMOBUS
communication S+
RS-485/422
P S-
IG
Twisted-pair
Shielded wires P
shielded wires
Fig 2.21 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-35
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, 1, 2, and 3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, M2, M3, and M4 (relay outputs) from
wiring to other control circuit terminals.
• If using an optional external power supply, it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
• Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults.
• Ground the cable shields so as to maximize the contact area of the shield and ground.
• Cable shields have to be grounded on both cable ends.
2-36
Wiring Check
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform continuity check on control circuits. Per-
form the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have no wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
CAUTION
• Ensure that the door locks are closed and the cable glands are tightened after wiring. Otherwise the
equipment may be damaged by the ingress of water or dust.
• Keep any water or dust outside of the Inverter when wiring. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged
by the ingress of water or dust.
• Use the proper cable gland for each cable. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged by the ingress of
water or dust.
• Mount the blind plugs attached for option and control card entry if these terminals are not connected.
This will keep IP54 protection for the inverter. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged by the ingress
of water or dust.
WARNING
• Be sure to ground the grounding terminal. Moreover be sure to ground the shield of motor cable on the
motor side. Otherwise an electric shock can occur.
2-37
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Option Card Models

Option cards for field bus communications can be mounted in the Inverter like shown in Fig 2.22.
Table 2.16 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications.
Table 2.16 Option Cards
Card Model Specifications
3G3RV-PDRT2 Intelligent DeviceNet option card
SI-P1 Option card for Profibus-DP fieldbus
Communication cards SI-R1 Option card for InterBus-S fieldbus
SI-S1 Option card for CANopen fieldbus
SI-J Option card for LONworks
3G3RV-P10ST8-E PLC option card
PLC Option Card PLC option card with DeviceNet communications
3G3RV-P10ST8-DRT-E
port (Slave)
Installation in IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters

Before mounting an Option Card, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter does not glow anymore. After that remove the Digital Operator, front cover and the option clip. Then
mount the Option Card.
Preventing Option Card Connectors from Rising

After installing the Option Card insert the Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising. The
Option Clip can be easily removed before installing the card by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip
and pulling it out.
CN2
C Option Card connector
C Option Card mounting spacer
C Option Card
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C Option Card)
Fig 2.22 Mounting Option Cards
2-38
Installing and Wiring Option Cards
Installation in IP54 Inverters

Before mounting an Option Card, open the inverter door and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter does not glow anymore. After that remove the option clip and mount the Option Card like with the
IP00 or NEMA 1 Inverter.
Cable Gland Size for Option Cards

Refer to the terminal specification in each option card’s manual..
Table 2.17 Cable Gland Size for Option Cards
Possible Clamping
Cable Gland Size Wire Type
Cable Diameter (mm)
• Shielded twisted-pair wire
M16*1 4.5 to 7 • Shielded, PVC multi-core cable
(e.g. Lappkabel Ölflex)
*1. Refer to Table 2.5 for tightening torques for the cable glands.
Wiring Method for Option Cards

For the wiring refer to page 2-29 and to Fig 2.23 below.
Option Card
Cable Tie
(optional)
Option Cable
Cable Mounting Base
Earth Clamp
Fig 2.23 Option Card Wiring for Inverters with 22 to 55kW
2-39
2-40
3
Digital Operator and
Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and
switching between modes.
Digital Operator..................................................................3-2
Modes ................................................................................3-5
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display

The key names and functions of the Digital Operator for the IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 inverters are described
below. This operator is referred to as “LED Digital Operator” or JVOP-161-OY
Drive Mode Indicators

FWD: Lights up when a forward run command is
input.
REV: Lights up when a reverse run command is
input.
SEQ: Lights up when the run command from the
control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lights up when the frequency reference from
control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has
occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and set-
tings.
Mode Display
DRIVE: Lights up in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lights up in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV: Lights up in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY:Lights up in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE:Lights up in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user parameters,

monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.1 LED Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
3-2
Digital Operator
The IP54 Inverter is equipped with a different type of digital operator, the LCD Digital Operator or JVOP-
160-OY. This Operator features a clear text display with 5 lines while the key names and functions are the
same, see Fig 3.2. This operator is also available as an option for IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters.
Drive Mode Indicators

FWD: Lights up when a forward run command is
input.
REV: Lights up when a reverse run command is
input.
SEQ: Lights up when the run command from the
control circuit terminal is enabled.
REF: Lights up when the frequency reference from
control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lights up when an error or alarm has
occurred.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, parameter numbers, and set-
tings.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user parameters,

monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.2 LCD Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys

The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key Name Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
LOCAL/REMOTE Key the settings in b1-01 and b1-02 (REMOTE).
This key can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter o2-01.
MENU Key Selects the modes.
ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
JOG Key
Digital Operator.
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
FWD/REV Key
operated from the Digital Operator.
Sets the active digit when programming user parameters.

Shift/RESET Key
Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred.
3-3
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key Name Function
Selects user parameter numbers and increments parameter settings.

Increment Key
Used to move to the next item or data.
Selects user parameter numbers and decrements parameter settings.

Decrement Key
Used to move to the previous item or data.
DATA/ENTER Key Enters menus and parameters and validates parameter settings.
Starts operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital

RUN Key
Operator (LOCAL Mode).
Stops Inverter operation (LOCAL and REMOTE Mode).

STOP Key This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from a source
different tan the operator by setting parameter o2-02.
Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate the operating status.
The RUN key indicator will flash and the STOP key indicator will light while a DC current is injected in the
motor. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP keys and the Inverter status is shown in
Fig 3.3.
Output
Frequency
RUN command
Frequency
Reference
RUN
STOP
Lit up Blinking Not lit up
Fig 3.3 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-4
Modes
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it
easier to read and set user parameters. The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.2.
Table 3.2 Modes

Mode Primary function(s)
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Drive mode Use this mode for monitoring values such as frequency references or output current,
displaying fault information and the fault history.
Quick programming mode Use this mode to read and set the basic user parameters to operate the Inverter.
Advanced programming mode Use this mode to reference and set all user parameters.
Use this mode to read/set user parameters that have been changed from their fac-
Verify mode
tory-set values.
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor parameters. During
Autotuning mode
Autotuning the line-to-line resistance is measured and set automatically.
3-5
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from any other operator display. Press
the MENU key to switch between the different modes.
When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed the monitor display is entered. Depending on the entered menu the
monitor data or parameters are displayed.
Example Operations with LED Digital Operator

Fig 3.4 shows the mode transition appearance with the LED digital operator.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU Power ON
Drive Mode
(Operation
ESC possible)
MENU
Quick Programming Mode
ESC ESC
MENU
Advanced Programming Mode
ESC ESC
MENU
Verify Mode
ESC
MENU
Autotuning Mode
ESC
ESC
Lit Up Blinking Not lit up
Fig 3.4 Mode Transitions with LED Digital Operator
3-6
Modes
Example Operations with LCD Digital Operator

Fig 3.5 shows the mode transition appearance with the LCD digital operator.
Display at Startup
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02= 60.00Hz
U1-03= 10.05A
Mode Selection MENU
Display Monitor Display Setting Display
-DRIVE- -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy

RESET Frequency Ref
** Main Menu ** Monitor Frequency Ref
U1 -01 = 0.00Hz U1- 01= 0.00Hz U1- 01= 0 00.00Hz
Operation U1-02= 0.00Hz U1-02= 0.00Hz ~
U1-03= 0.00A U1-03= 0.00A
ESC ESC ESC
MENU
-QUICK- -QUICK- -QUICK-

** Main Menu ** Select Language Select Language
A1-00= 0 *0* A1-00= 0 *0*
Quick Setting English
English "0"
ESC ESC
MENU
-ADV- -ADV- -ADV- -ADV-

** Main Menu ** Initialization
RESET Select Language Select Language
A1 00 = 0 *0* A1-00= 0 *0*
Programming A1 - 00= 0 English English
Select Language "0" "0"
ESC ESC ESC
MENU
-VERIFY- -VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
None Modified
Modified Consts
ESC
MENU
-A.TUNE- -A.TUNE- -A.TUNE-

** Main Menu ** Mtr. Rated Power Mtr. Rated Power
T1-02 = 0.40kW T1-02= 0 00.40kW
Auto-Tuning (0.00 ~ 650.00) (0.00 ~ 650.00)
"0.40 kW" "0.40kW"
ESC ESC
Fig 3.5 Mode Transitions with LCD Digital Operator
3-7
Drive Mode
The Inverter can be operated in the Drive Mode. Monitor parameters, fault information and the fault history
parameters can be displayed.
When b1-01 (Reference selection is set to 0, the frequency reference can be changed from the frequency set-
ting display. Use the Increment, Decrement and Shift/RESET keys to change it. The set value will be accepted
when the DATA/ENTER key has been pressed.

Fig 3.6 shows mode transition examples with the LED digital operator.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Parameter Display Frequency Setting Display
MENU Power ON
Frequency reference setting/
display unit 01-03
Drive Mode Frequency reference
Frequency Reference Setting /
Frequency Reference Display unit set by 01-03
ESC ESC
Output frequency
Output Frequency
ESC
Output current
Output Current
ESC
Monitor setting for o1-01

Monitor setting set by o1-01
ESC
Status Monitor Frequency reference

Status Monitor Frequency Reference
RESET
ESC ESC
Fan operating time
PI Feedback 2
ESC
ESC
Fault Trace Current error

Fault Trace Current error
RESET
ESC ESC
ESC
Operating time at error
Operating time at error
ESC
ESC
Fault History
Fault History 1st previous error
RESET
Previous error
ESC
ESC ESC
Operating time at 4th latest

error
ESC
ESC
Fig 3.6 Operations in Drive Mode with LED Digital Operator
3-8
Modes
Example Operations with LCD Operator

Fig 3.7 shows mode transition examples with the LCD digital operator.
Display at Startup
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02= 60.00Hz
U1-03= 10.05A
Mode Selection MENU Monitor Display

Frequency Setting Display
Display
A B 1 2
-DRIVE- -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy

Monitor RESET Frequency Ref Frequency Ref
** Main Menu **
U1 - 01=60.00Hz U1 - 01 =60.00Hz U1- 01= 0 60.00Hz
Operation U1-02= 60.00Hz U1-02= 60.00Hz (0.00 ~ 60.00)
U1-03= 10.05A ESC U1-03= 10.05A "0.00Hz"
ESC
ESC
MENU
The Frequency Setting
-QUICK-
-DRIVE-
Monitor
Rdy -DRIVE-
Output Freq
Rdy Display will not be displayed
RESET
** Main Menu ** U1 - 02=60.00Hz U1 - 02 =60.00Hz when an frequency
Quick Setting
U1-03= 10.05A U1-03= 10.05A reference source different
U1-06= 203.5VAC U1-06= 203.5VAC
ESC
than the digital operator is
used.
MENU
-DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy
Monitor RESET PI Feedback 2
-ADV- U1 - 53 =13.17% U1 - 53 =13.17%
** Main Menu ** U1-01= 60.00Hz U1-01= 60.00Hz
U1-02= 60.00Hz U1-02= 60.00Hz
Programming ESC
1 2
MENU
3 4
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu ** -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy
Fault Trace RESET Current Fault
Modified Consts U2 - 01= None U2 - 01= None
U2-02= OC U2-02= OC
U2-03= 60.00Hz U2-03= 60.00Hz
ESC
MENU
-A.TUNE-
-DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy Rdy
** Main Menu ** Last Fault
Fault Trace RESET U2 - 02= OC
Auto-Tuning U2 - 02= OC U2 - 02= OC
U2-03= 60.00Hz U2-03= 60.00Hz Over Current
U2-04= 60.00Hz ESC
U2-04= 60.00Hz ESC
3 4
5 6
-DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Rdy Rdy

Fault History RESET Fault History U3 - 01= OC
U3 - 01 = OC U3 - 01 = OC
U3-02= OV U3-02= OV Over Current
U3-03= OH U3-03= OH
ESC ESC
-DRIVE- Rdy Rdy

RESET -DRIVE- Rdy
Fault History Fault History U3 - 02= OV
U3 - 02 = OV U3 - 02 = OV
U3-03= OH
DC Bus Overvolt
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV ESC U3-04= UV ESC
5 6
A B
Fig 3.7 Operations in Drive Mode with LCD Digital Operator
To run the Inverter after viewing/changing parameters press the MENU key and the DATA/ENTER key
in sequence to enter the Drive mode. A Run command is not accepted as long as the Inverter in any other
display.
IMPORTANT
To enable Run commands from other sources during programming set parameter b1-08 to “1”.
Quick Programming Mode

In Quick Programming Mode, the basic parameters required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and
set.
The parameters can be changed in the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement and Shift/RESET keys
to change the settings. The setting will be saved and the display will return to the monitor display when the
DATA/Enter key is pressed.
Refer to Chapter 5, User Parameters for details on the parameters displayed in Quick Programming Mode.
3-9
Fig 3.8 shows example operations in Quick Programming Mode with the LED Digital Operator.
Mode Selection Display Monitor Display
MENU
Quick Programming Mode Reference Source
ESC ESC
RUN Command Source
ESC ESC
Motor Rated Current
ESC ESC
Fig 3.8 Operations in Quick Programming Mode with LED Digital Operators
Example Operations with LCD Operator

Fig 3.9 shows example operations in Quick Programming Mode using the LCD Digital Operator.
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A B
MENU
-QUICK- -QUICK- -QUICK-

Reference Source Reference Source
** Main Menu **
b1-01= 1 *1* b1-01= *1*
Quick Setting Terminals Terminals
"1" "1"
ESC ESC
MENU
-QUICK- -QUICK-
Run Source Run Source
-ADV- b1-02= 1 *1* b1-02= *1*
** Main Menu ** Terminals Terminals
"1" "1"
ESC
Programming
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
-QUICK- -QUICK-
MENU Motor Rated FLA Motor Rated FLA
E2-01= 1.90A E2-01= 001.90A
(0.32 ~ 6.40) (0.32 ~ 6.40)
-A.TUNE- "1.90A" "1.90A"
** Main Menu ** ESC
Auto-Tuning
A B
Fig 3.9 Operations in Quick Programming Mode with LCD Digital Operators
3-10
Modes
Advanced Programming Mode

In Advanced Programming Mode all parameters can be monitored and set.
The parameters can be changed from the setting display. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET
keys to change the settings. The setting will be saved and the display will return to the monitor display when
the DATA/Enter key is pressed.
Refer to Chapter 5, User Parameters for details on the parameters.

Fig 3.10 shows example operations in Advanced Programming Mode with the LED Digital Operator.
Mode Selection Display Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
Initialize Mode: A1-xx Language Selection

RESET
ESC
ESC ESC
Access Level
ESC
ESC
Initialize
ESC
ESC
PI Control: b5-xx PI Control Mode Selection

RESET
ESC
ESC ESC
Proportional Gain
ESC
ESC
PI Unit Selection
ESC
ESC
Copy Function: o3-xx Copy Function Selection

RESET
ESC
ESC ESC
Read Permission Selection
ESC
ESC
Fig 3.10 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode with LED Digital Operator
3-11
Fig 3.11 shows example operations in Advanced Programming Mode using the LCD Digital Operator.
A B 1 2
-ADV- -ADV- -ADV- -ADV-

** Main Menu ** Initialization RESET Select Language Select Language
A1 - 00= 0 A1- 00 = 0 *0* A1 - 01 = 0 *0*
Programming Select Language English English
"0" "0"
ESC ESC ESC
MENU
-ADV- -ADV- -ADV-

-VERIFY-
Initialization RESET Init Parameters Init Parameters
** Main Menu ** A1 - 03= 0 A1 - 03 = 0 *0* A1 - 03 = 0 *0*
Init Parameters No Initialize No Initialize
Modified Consts "0" ESC "0"
ESC
MENU 1 2
-A.TUNE- 3 4
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning -ADV- -ADV- -ADV-
PI Control RESET PI Mode PI Mode
b5 - 01= 0 b5 - 01 = 0 *0* b5 - 01 = 0 *0*
PI Mode Disabled Disabled
MENU
"0" "0"
ESC ESC
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
-ADV- -ADV- -ADV-
PI Control RESET PI Fb SqRt Gain PI Fb SqRt Gain
Operation
b5 - 29= 1.00 b5 - 29 = 1.00 b5 -29= 1.00
PI Fb SqRt Gain (0.00 2.00) (0.00 2.00)
ESC
"1.00" ESC "1.00"
MENU
-QUICK- 3 4
** Main Menu ** A B
Quick Setting
MENU
Fig 3.11 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode with LCD Digital Operator
3-12
Modes
Setting User Parameters using the LED Digital Operator

Below in Table 3.3 the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 sec. to 20 sec. is shown
using the LED Digital Operator.
Table 3.3 Setting User Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode using the LED Digital Operator
Step
Digital Operator Display Description
No.
1 Power supply turned ON.
Press the MENU key to enter the Mode Selec-

2
tion Display.
Press the MENU key to scroll through the

Mode Selection Display.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the

5 Monitor Display in Advanced Programming
Mode.
Press the Increment or Decrement key until

6
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) is displayed.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the set-

7
ting display. The setting can be changed now.
Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flash-

8
ing digit to the right.
Press the Decrement key to change the value to

9
20.00sec.
Press the DATA/ENTER key to validate the

10 new setting. “End” is displayed for 1 sec., then
the new parameter setting for 0.5 sec.
11 The display returns to the Monitor Display.
3-13
Setting User Parameters using the LCD Digital Operator
Below in Table 3.4 the procedure to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 sec. to 20 sec. is shown
using the LCD Digital Operator.
Table 3.4 Setting User Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode using the LCD Digital Operator
Step
No.
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
1 U1- 01=50.00Hz Display after power supply has been turned ON.
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.00A
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu ** Press the MENU key to enter the mode selec-
2 tion
Operation display.
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
3
Quick Setting
Press the MENU key to scroll to the position of
the advanced programming Menu.
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
4
Programming
-ADV-
Initialization
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access the mon-
5 A1-01= 0 itor display.
Select Language
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
Press the Increment or Decrement key until C1-
6 C1-01= 10.0sec 01 (Acceleration Time 1) is displayed.
Accel Time 1
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
Press the DATA/ENTER key to access setting
7 C1-01= 0010.0sec display. The setting can be changed now.
(0.0~6000.0)
10.0sec
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
Press the Shift/RESET key to move the flashing
8 C1-01= 0010.0sec digit to the right.
(0.0~6000.0)
10.0sec
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
Press the Decrement key to change the value to
9 C1-01= 0010.0sec 20.00 s.
(0.0~6000.0)
10.0sec
-ADV-
Accel/Decel
Press the DATA/ENTER key to validate the new
10 C1-01= 0020.0sec setting.
(0.0~6000.0)
10.0sec
-ADV- -ADV- “Entry Accepted” is displayed for appr. 1.0 sec.

Accel/Decel
after the data setting has been confirmed with
11 Entry Accepted C1-01= 20.0sec
(0.0~6000.0)
the DATA/ENTER key. The display returns to
10.0sec the C1-01 monitor display.
3-14
Modes
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings, either by
programming or autotuning. If no parameter setting has been changed the display will show “NONE” with the
LED operator or “None Modified” with the LCD operator.
In Verify Mode the same procedures as in the programming modes can be used to change parameter settings.

Fig 3.12 shows an example of operations in the Verify Mode. In that example following parameters have been
changed from their default settings: Reference Selection (b1-01), Acceleration Time 1 (c1-01), Input Voltage
Setting (E1-01) and Motor Rated Current (E2-01).
MENU
Verify Mode Frequency Reference Selection Frequency Reference Selection
ESC ESC
Acceleration Time 1 Acceleration Time 1
ESC ESC
Input Voltage Setting Input Voltage Setting
ESC ESC
Motor Rated Current Motor Rated Current
ESC ESC
Fig 3.12 Operations in Verify Mode with LED Digital Operator
3-15
Fig 3.13 shows an example of operations in the Verify Mode using the LCD Digital Operator. The same
parameters have been modified like in Fig 3.12
MENU
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
A B
MENU
-VERIFY- -VERIFY- -VERIFY-

** Main Menu ** Reference Source Reference Source
b1 - 01 = 0 *0* b1 - 01 = 0 *0*
Modified Consts Operator Terminals
"1"
ESC ESC "1"
MENU
-VERIFY- -VERIFY-
Accel Time 1 Accel Time 1
-A.TUNE- C1 -01 = 20.0sec C1- 01 =0020.0sec
** Main Menu ** (0.0 6000.0sec) (0.0 6000.0sec)
"10.0sec"
ESC "10.0sec"
Auto-Tuning
-VERIFY- -VERIFY-
MENU
Input Voltage Input Voltage
E1- 01 = 380VAC E1 -01 = 380VAC
(310 510) (310 510)
-DRIVE- "400VAC" "400VAC"
ESC
** Main Menu **
Operation
-VERIFY- -VERIFY-
Motor Rated FLA Motor Rated FLA
E2 - 01 = 2.00A E2- 01 =002.00A
MENU (0.32 6.40) (0.32 6.40)
"1.90A" "1.90A"
ESC
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting A B
MENU
Fig 3.13 Operations in Verify Mode with LCD Digital Operator
3-16
Modes
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically measures and sets the motor line-to-line resistance parameter including the motor
cable in order to compensate the voltage drop and to achieve the best performance.

Set the motor rated output power (in kW) and the motor rated current, specified on the motor nameplate and
then press the RUN key. The motor is automatically run and the line-to-line resistance is measured.
Fig 3.14 shows an example for an Autotuning procedure.
Mode Selection Display Autotuning Monitor Display Setting Display
MENU
Autotuning Motor Output Power Motor Output Power
ESC
Motor Rated Current Motor Rated Current

ESC
ESC
Autotuning Start Autotuning Stop Command Input

ESC RUN STOP
Autotuning Completed
Fig 3.14 Operation in Autotuning Mode with LED Digital Operator
3-17
Fig 3.15 shows an example for an Autotuning procedure with LCD Digital Operator
Autotuning
Mode Selection Display Setting Display
Monitor Display
-A.TUNE- -A. TUNE- -A. TUNE-

** Main Menu ** Mtr Rated Power Mtr Rated Power
T1 - 02= 0.40kW T1 - 02=000.40kW
Auto-Tuning (0.00~650.00) (0.00~650.00)
ESC "0.40kW" ESC "0.40kW"
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
-A. TUNE- -A. TUNE-
Operation Rated Current Rated Current
T1 - 04 = 1.90A T1 - 04 =001.90A
(0.32~6.40) (0.32~6.40)
MENU "1.90A" "1.90A"
ESC
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
-A. TUNE- Rdy RUN -A. TUNE- Rdy -A. TUNE-
Auto-Tuning Auto-Tuning STOP Tune Aborted
MENU
0Hz/ 0.00A 0Hz/ 0.38A
Tuning Ready ? STOP key
Press RUN key START > > > GOAL
ESC
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming -A. TUNE-
Tune Successful
0Hz/ 0.00A
MENU
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
Fig 3.15 Operation in Autotuning Mode with LCD Digital Operator
If a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7, Troubleshooting.

IMPORTANT
3-18
4
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation.
Trial Operation Procedure..................................................4-2

Trial Operation ...................................................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ..................................................4-11
Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.
START
Installation
Wiring
Set power supply voltage jumper.*1
Turn ON power.
*1: Set the jumper for 400V class Inverters
of 75kW and more
Confirm status.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 400V/50Hz
Motor cable over

50 m or heavy load possibly YES
causing motor to stall or
overload?
Non-rotating autotuning
for line-to-line resistance
NO
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
No-load operation
Loaded operation
Optimum adjustments and

parameter settings
Check/record parameters.
END
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
4-2
Trial Operation
Trial Operation
The procedure for the trial operation is described in order in this section.
Application Confirmation
First, confirm the application before using the Inverter. It is designed for:
• Fan, blower, pump
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper

(400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher)
The power supply voltage jumper must be set for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher. Insert the jumper
into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Connector
Jumper (factory-set position)

200 V class power supply
400V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Setting
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
• 200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• 400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status) if possible.
4-3
Checking the Display Status
After normal power up without any faults the operator display will show the following depending on the
operator.
Display with LED Digital Operator

After normal power up without any faults the operator display will show the following:
The frequency reference monitor is dis-

Display for normal operation
played in the data display section.
When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7, Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
The display will differ depending on the

Display for fault operation type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
Display with LCD Digital Operator

After normal power up without any faults the operator display will show the following:
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
The frequency reference monitor is dis-
Display for normal operation U1- 01=50.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz
played in the data display section.
U1-03= 0.00A
When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7, Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
-DRIVE-
The display will differ depending on the
UV
Display for fault operation type of fault.
Main Power Loss A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
4-4
Trial Operation
Basic Settings
Before starting the Inverter ensure that it is initialized, i.e. all parameters are set to their factory defaults.
Therefor set parameter A1-03 to 2220 for 2-wire initialization or to 3330 for 3-wire initialization. Refer to
page 6-9, Run Command for details about 2-wire and 3-wire initialization.
Refer to Chapter 3, Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures. Find a list of the
Quick Programming Parameters on page 5-4, User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode and
details of the parameters in Chapter 6, Parameter Settings by Function.
Table 4.1 Basic Parameter Settings
: Must be set. : Set as required.
Parameter Setting Factory

Class Number
Name Description Page
Range Setting
Sets the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference selec- 6-5
b1-01 1: Control circuit terminal 0 to 3 1
tion 6-52
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option Card
Sets the run command input method.
0: Digital Operator
Operation method 6-9
b1-02 1: Control circuit terminal (digital input) 0 to 3 1
selection 6-52
3: Option Card
Selects stopping method when stop com-
mand is sent.
Stopping method 0: Deceleration to stop
b1-03 0 to 3 0 6-11
selection 1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
Sets the acceleration time in seconds for
Acceleration 4-11
C1-01 the output frequency to climb from 0% to 0.0 to 6000.0 10.0 s
time 1 6-15
100%.
Sets the deceleration time in seconds for
Deceleration 4-11
C1-02 the output frequency to fall from 100% to 0.0 to 6000.0 10.0 s
time 1 6-15
0%.
d1-01 to
Frequency refer-
d1-01 to d1-04: 0.00
ences 1 to 4 and Sets the required speed references for
d1-04 and 0 to 200.00 Hz Hz 6-7
jog frequency ref- multi-step speed operation or jogging.
d1-17 d1-17: 6.00
erence
Hz
Input voltage set- Sets the Inverter's nominal input voltage 155 to 6-19
E1-01 200 V*1
ting in volts. 255 V*1 6-100
Motor rated cur- 0.32 to 6.40 1.90 A 6-33

E2-01 Sets the motor rated current. *2 *3
rent 6-99
Used to enable or disable the motor over-

load protection function.
0: Disabled
Motor protection 1: Protection for general purpose motor
L1-01 0 to 3 1 6-33
selection (fan cooled)
2: Protection for inverter motor (exter-
nally cooled motor)
3: Vector motor protection
4-5
Table 4.1 Basic Parameter Settings
: Must be set. : Set as required.
Parameter Setting Factory

Class Number
Name Description Page
Range Setting
Stall prevention Sets the stall prevention level (current

L3-02 selection during limit) during acceleration as a percentage 0 to 200% 120% 6-17
acceleration of the Inverter rated current.
If using the dynamic brake option (Brak-

Stall prevention
ing Resistor Units and Braking Units), be
L3-04 selection during 0 to 2 1 6-19
sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0 (dis-
deceleration
abled).
*1. Values for 200 V class Inverters are shown. For a 400 V class Inverter the values have to be doubled.
*2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
*3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given
4-6
Trial Operation
Selecting the V/f pattern

• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced program-
ming mode.
Table 4.1 Selecting the V/f Pattern
Motor V/f Selection
E1-03 = 0
General purpose motor at 50 Hz
E1-03 = F (default)(Parameters E1-04 to E-13 are
changeable and preset for 50 Hz)
General pupoase motor at 60 Hz E1-03 = 1
• It is recommended to perform non-rotating autotuning for the line-to-line resistance if the motor cable is 50
m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling.
Autotuning
Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance

Autotuning can be used to improve the performance when very long motor cables are used or when motor and
inverter have different power ratings.
To perform autotuning set T1-02 (Motor rated power) and T1-04 (Motor rated current) and then press the
RUN key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the motor for approximately 20 seconds
and the line-to-line resistance (stator windings and cable resistance) will be measured automatically.
Power will be supplied to the motor during autotuning but the motor will not turn. Do not touch the
motor until autotuning has been completed.
IMPORTANT
Parameter Settings for Autotuning

The following parameters must be set for autotuning.
Param-
eter Factory Set-
Name Display Setting Range
Num- ting
ber
10% to 200% of Same as
Motor out-
T1-02 Set the output power of the motor in Kilowatts. Inverter rated Inverter rated
put power
output output
Same as gen-
10% to 200% of eral-purpose
Motor rated
T1-04 Set the rated current of the motor in Amps. Inverter rated motor with
current
current same capacity
as Inverter
4-7
Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning using LED Digital Operator
The following displays will appear on the LED Digital Operator during autotuning.
Table 4.2 LED Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Motor rated power and current: T1-02 and T1-04
When the Autotuning Mode is entered parameters T1-

02 and T1-04 have to entered.
Autotuning start display: TUn12

The autotuning start display will appear when the
parameter settings have been completed. The
A.TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit.
Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed
from the autotuning start display.
Autotuning in progress Stop command input

If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error
occurs during autotuning an error message will be dis-
play and autotuning will be stopped.
Refer to page 7-13, Autotuning Faults for details.
Autotuning completed
END will be displayed after approximately 20 sec-
onds, indicating that autotuning has been completed.
Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning using LCD Digital Operator

The following displays will appear on the LCD Digital Operator during autotuning.
Table 4.3 LCD Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Motor rated power and current: T1-02 and T1-04
-A. TUNE-
Mtr Rated Power
T1 - 02= 0.40kW When the Autotuning Mode is entered parameters T1-
(0.00~650.00)
"0.40kW" 02 and T1-04 have to entered.
Autotuning start display

-A. TUNE- Rdy
Auto-Tuning The autotuning start display will appear when the
0Hz/ 0.00A parameter settings have been completed. Autotuning
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the auto-
tuning start display.
Autotuning Stop command input

-A. TUNE- Rdy -A. TUNE-
Auto-Tuning Tune Aborted If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error
0Hz/ 0.38A occurs during autotuning an error message will be dis-
STOP key play and autotuning will be stopped.
START > > > GOAL
Refer to page 7-13, Autotuning Faults for details.
Autotuning completed
-A. TUNE- “Tune Successful” will be displayed after approxi-
Tune Successful
mately 20 seconds, indicating that autotuning has been
0Hz/ 0.00A completed.
4-8
Trial Operation
Application Settings
User parameters can be set as required in advanced programming mode. All the parameters that can be set in
quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation or to 3
for output phase rotation and reverse disabled.
• To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 55.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10 V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz (0%
to 90% speed), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To limit the speed range between 20% and 80% set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no-load state, that means the machine is not con-
nected to the motor. To avoid failures caused due to the wiring of the control circuit it’s recommended to use
the LOCAL mode. Press the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the
SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter. For applica-
tions, at which the machine can be driven in one direction only, check the motor rotation direction.
Operation with Jog frequency reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and
releasing the JOG key on the Digital Operator. If the external control circuit prevents operation from the Dig-
ital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then
start operation in REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminal).
Both, a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed com-
NOTE mand) must be provided to start Inverter operation.
Loaded Operation
Connecting the Load

• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when connecting the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
Operation using the Digital Operator

• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• For the case that a fault occurs during operation, make sure that the STOP key on the Digital Operator is
easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed, e.g. to one tenth of the nominal operating speed.
4-9
Checking Operating Status
• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too
high.
• Refer to page 4-11, Adjustment Suggestions if hunting, vibration, or other problems originated by the con-
trol system occur.
Check and Recording User Parameters

Use verify mode to check user parameters that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user
parameter table.
Any user parameters that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function (parameters o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode) can be
used to copy the changed settings from the inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed set-
tings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if the inverter has to be replaced for any reason.
The following functions can also be used to manage user parameters.
• Recording user parameters
• Setting access levels for user parameters
• Setting a password
Recording User Parameters (o2-03)

If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user parameters will be saved in a separate
memory area in the inverter. When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason, the user parameters
can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110.
User Parameter Access Levels (A1-01)

A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user parameters from being changed. A1-01 can also be set
to 1 (User-specified Parameters) to display only parameters required by the machine or application in a pro-
gramming mode. These parameters can be determined by setting the A2- parameters.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)

When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user parameters will
be displayed only when the correct password has been input.
4-10
Adjustment Suggestions
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration or other problems occur during trial operation, adjust the parameters listed in the follow-
ing table according to the control method. This table lists the most commonly used user parameters only.
Table 4.4 Useful Parameters in case of Problems during Trial Operation
Name (Parameter Factory Set- Recommended
Performance Adjustment Method
Number) ting Setting
Controlling hunting and • Reduce the setting if torque is
Hunting-prevention vibration in middle- insufficient for heavy loads.
1.00 0.50 to 2.00
gain (N1-02) range speeds • Increase the setting if hunting or
(20 to 80% FMAX) vibration occurs for light loads.
• Reducing motor mag- • Increase the setting if motor
Carrier frequency selec- netic noise magnetic noise is high.
Depends on 0.4 kHz to
tion • Controlling hunting • Reduce the setting if hunting or
capacity default
(C6-02) and vibration at low vibration occurs at low to mid-
speeds dle-range speeds.
• Increasing torque and • Reduce the setting if torque or
Torque compensation
speed response Depends on speed response is slow.
delay time constant 200 to 1000 ms
• Controlling hunting capacity • Increase the setting if hunting or
(C4-02)
and vibration vibration occurs.
• Improving torque at • Increase the setting in small
low speeds (10 Hz or steps of 0.05 if torque is insuffi-
Torque compensation
lower) 1.00 0.50 to 1.50 cient at low speeds.
gain (C4-01)
• Controlling hunting • Reduce the setting if hunting or
and vibration vibration occurs for light loads.
Middle output fre-
• Increase the setting in small
quency voltage • Improving torque at Default to
Depends on steps of 1 or 2 V if torque is
(E1-08) low speeds “Default + 3 to 5
capacity and insufficient at low speeds
Minimum output fre- • Controlling shock at
quency voltage startup
voltage V”*1 • Reduce the setting if shock at
startup is large.
(E1-10)
*1. The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
The following user parameters will also affect the control system indirectly.
Table 4.5 Parameters influencing performance indirectly
Name (Parameter Number) Application
Acceleration/deceleration times
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
(C1-01 to C1-09)
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 and C2-02) Used to prevent speed shock at start or stop of the acceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04) Used to avoid resonance points during constant speed.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12) Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Used to prevent OV (overvoltage error) and motor stalling for heavy
loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by
Stall prevention (L3-01 to L3-06) default and the setting normally has not to be changed. When using an
optional braking resistor unit and braking unit, however, disable stall pre-
vention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to 0.
4-11
4-12
5
User Parameters
This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Inverter.
User Parameter Descriptions.............................................5-2

Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ................5-3
User Parameter Tables......................................................5-6
User Parameter Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables.
Description of User Parameter Tables

User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as
an example.
Change
Param- MEMO-
Setting Factory during Access
eter Name Description BUS Reg- Page
Range Setting Opera- Level
Number ister
tion
Sets the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
Reference selec-
b1-01 1: Control circuit terminal (ana- 0 to 3 1 No Q 180H –
tion
log input)
3: Option Card
• Parameter Number: The number of the user parameter.

• Name: The name of the user parameter.
• Description: Details on the function or settings of the user parameter.
• Setting Range: The setting range for the user parameter.
• Factory Setting: The default setting of the user parameter.
Indicates whether the parameter can be changed while the Inverter is
• Change during Operation:
in operation or not.
Yes: Changes are possible during operation.
No: Changes are not possible during operation.
Indicates the parameter access level in which the parameter can be
• Access Level:
changed or monitored.
Q: Quick programming mode and advanced programming mode.
A: Advanced programming mode only.
• MEMOBUS Register: The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page: Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.
5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
No. Function Page
MENU Drive Mode U1 Status Monitor Parameters 5-41

U2 Fault Trace 5-44
Inverter can be operated and its
U3 Fault History 5-45
status can be displayed.
A1 Initialize Mode 5-6
A2 User-specified Setting Mode 5-7
b1 Operation Mode Selections 5-8
b2 DC Injection Braking 5-9
Quick Programming Mode b3 Speed Search 5-10
Minimum parameters required b4 Timer Function 5-11

for operation can be monitored b5 PI Control 5-11
or set. b8 Energy Saving 5-14
C1 Acceleration/Deceleration 5-15
C2 S-curve Acceleration 5-15
C4 Torque Compensation 5-16
C6 Carrier Frequency 5-17
Advanced Programming Mode d1 Preset Reference 5-18

d2 Reference Limits 5-18
All parameters can be moni- d3 Jump Frequencies 5-19
tored or set.
d4 Reference Frequency Hold 5-19
E1 V/f Pattern 5-20
E2 Motor Setup 5-21
F6 Communications Option Card 5-22
H1 Multi-function Digital Inputs 5-23
H2 Multi-function Digital Outputs 5-24
Verify Mode H3 Multi-function Analog Inputs 5-25
Parameters changed from the H4 Multi-function Analog Outputs 5-27
default settings can be moni- H5 MEMOBUS Communications 5-28
tored or set.
L1 Motor Overload 5-29
L2 Power Loss Ride through 5-30
L3 Stall Prevention 5-31
L4 Reference Detection 5-32
L5 Fault Restart 5-32
Autotuning Mode L6 Load Detection 5-33
L8 Hardware Protection 5-34
Automatically measures the
n1 Hunting Prevention Function 5-35
line-to-line resistance.
n3 High Slip Braking 5-35
o1 Monitor Select 5-36
o2 Multi-function Selections 5-38
o3 Copy Function 5-39
T Motor Autotuning 5-40
5-3
User Parameters Available in Quick Programming Mode
Commonly needed parameters for start-up of the Inverter can be monitored and set in the Quick Programming
Mode. Those parameters are listed in the following tables. All user parameters, including the Quick Program-
ming Parameters can be found in the Advanced Programming Mode as well.
Quick Programming Parameters that are Always Available

Following table shows the parameter that are always available in Quick Programming Mode.
Change
Parame- MEMO-
ter Num- Name Description BUS
ber Register
tion
method.
Reference 0: Digital Operator
b1-01 0 to 3 1 No Q 180H
source selection 1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
3: Option Card
Sets the run command input method
0: Digital Operator
RUN command 1: Control circuit terminal (digital multi-
b1-02 0 to 3 1 No Q 181H
source selection function inputs)
3: Option Card
Select stopping method when stop com-
mand is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
Stopping
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
b1-03 method selec- 0 to 3 0 No Q 182H
coast to stop, without regenerative
tion
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run com-
mands are disregarded during deceler-
ation time.)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3: PI control enabled (frequency refer-
PI control mode ence + PI output)
b5-01 0, 1, 3 0 No A 1A5H
selection When PI controller is enabled additional
parameters are available in Quick Pro-
gramming Mode and default values are
changed, refer to the following table.
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate
Acceleration
C1-01 from 0 Hz to the maximum output fre- Yes Q 200H
time 1
quency. 0.0 to 10.0
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate 6000.0 sec.
Deceleration
C1-02 from the maximum output frequency to Yes Q 201H
time 1
0 Hz.
Frequency ref- Sets the frequency reference upper limit
0.0 to
d2-01 erence upper as a percentage of the max. output fre- 100.0% No A 289H
110.0
limit quency.
Frequency ref- Sets the frequency reference lower limit
0.0 to
d2-02 erence lower as a percentage of the maximum output 0.0% No A 28AH
110.0
limit frequency.
5-4
Change
Parame- MEMO-
ber Register
tion
Sets the inverter input voltage. This set 155 to
Input voltage 200 V
E1-01 value will be the basis for the protection No Q 300H
setting
functions. 255*1 *1
Sets the motor rated current in Amps.

Motor rated cur- This set value becomes the base value for 0.32 to 1.90 A
E2-01 No Q 30EH
rent motor protection and torque limit. It is an 6.40*2 *3
input data for autotuning.
*1. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. For 400 V class Inverters the value has to be doubled.
*2. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current.
*3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity (the value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given).
Quick Programming Parameters that are Available with Enabled PI Controller

Following list shows the parameters that are available additionally in Quick Programming Mode whenever the
PI controller is enabled. The default settings are also set automatically to settings commonly used with the PI
controller.
Change
Parame- MEMO-
ber Register
tion
Selects the signal level input at multi-
Analog input function analog input A2.
H3-08 A2 signal level 0: 0 to +10V (11 bit input) 0, 2, 3 2 No Q*1 417H
selection 2: 4 to 20mA (9 bit input)
3: 0 to 20mA (9 bit input)
Selects the multi-function analog input
Analog input
function for terminal A2. Refer to the
H3-09 A2 function 0 to 1F B*2 No Q*1 418H
table H3-09 Settings for the explanation
selection
of the settings range.
Selects on which terminal the main fre-
quency reference can be input.
Terminal A1/ 0: Use analog input 1 on terminal A1 for
H3-13 0, 1 0 No Q*1 41CH
A2 switching main frequency reference.
1: Use analog input 2 on terminal A2 for
main frequency reference.
Selects the units for the PI controller val-
ues (b5-19, U1-24, U1-38).
b5-31 PI unit selection 0 to 11 0 No Q*1 1EDH
Refer to table b5-31 Settings for the
explanation of the setting range
Sets the proportional gain of the PI con-
Proportional (P) 0.00 to
b5-02 troller. P control is not performed when 1.00 Yes Q*1 1A6H
gain 25.00
set to 0.00
Sets the integral time of the PI controller. 0.0 to
b5-03 Integral (I) time 1.0 sec. Yes Q*1 1A7H
I control is not performed when set to 0.0. 360.0
*1. Parameter is only moved into Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled, otherwise the parameter is only available in Advanced
Programming Mode.
*2. Setting switched to “B” (PI feedback) only when PI controller is enabled, otherwise default setting is “2” (Auxiliary Reference)
5-5
User Parameter Tables
Setup Settings: A
Initialize Mode: A1
Change
Param- MEMO-
eter Name Description BUS Page
Number Register
tion
Used to select the language dis-
played on the LCD or HOA Digital
Operator only.
0: English
Language selec- 2: German
A1-00 tion for Digital 3: French 0 to 6 0 Yes A 100H –
Operator display 4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This parameter is not changed by
the initialize operation.
Used to set the parameter access
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring
drive mode and setting A1-01
and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user parameter
Parameter access
A1-01 (Only parameters set in A2-01 0 to 2 2 Yes A 101H 6-117
level
to A2-32 can be read and set.)
2: Advanced
(Parameters can be read and set
in both, quick programming
mode (Q) and advanced pro-
gramming (A) mode.)
Used to initialize the parameters
using the specified method.
0: No initializing
1110:Initializes using the user
parameters that have been
stored before using o2-03 para- 0 to
A1-03 Initialize 0 No A 103H –
meter 3330
2220:Initializes using a two-wire
sequence. (Initializes to the fac-
tory setting.)
3330:Initializes using a three-wire
sequence.
Password input when a password
has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
parameters of the initialize mode. 0 to
A1-04 Password 0 No A 104H 6-117
If the password is changed, A1-01 9999
to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32
parameters can only be changed
after inputting the right password.
Used to set a four digit number as
the password.
Usually this parameter is not dis-
0 to
A1-05 Password setting played. When the password (A1- 0 No A 105H 6-117
9999
04) is displayed, hold down the
RESET key and press the Menu
key and A1-05 will be displayed.
5-6
User-set Parameters: A2
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Used to select the function for each
of the user specified parameters.
A2-01 b1-01
User-set parame- User parameters are the only acces- 106H to
to to – No A 6-118
ters sible parameters if Parameter 125H
A2-32 o3-02
Access Level is set to user parame-
ters (A1-01=1)
5-7
Application Parameters: b
Operation Mode Selections: b1

Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (ana-
Reference source 6-5
b1-01 log inputs) 0 to 3 1 No Q 180H
selection 6-52
2: Serial communications (RS
422/485)
3: Option Card (connected on
CN2)
Sets the run command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (digital
RUN command 6-9
b1-02 multifunction inputs) 0 to 3 1 No Q 181H
source selection 6-52
2: Serial communications (RS
422/485)
3: Option Card (connceted on
CN2)
Selects the stopping method when
the Run signal is removed
0: Deceleration to stop
Stopping method 1: Coast to stop
b1-03 0 to 3 0 No Q 182H 6-11
selection 2: DC injection to stop
3: Coast to stop with timer (New
Run commands are disregarded
while coasting.)
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
2: Output Phase Rotation (both
Prohibition of
b1-04 rotational directions are 0 to 3 0 No A 183H 6-37
reverse operation
enabled)
3: Output Phase Rotation with
Reverse disabled.
Selects if the Inverter accepts a
Run command that is already set
when the Inverter is switched to
Remote Mode.
Operation selec-
0: Preset Run signals are disre-
tion after switch-
b1-07 garded. 0 or 1 0 No A 186H –
ing to remote
(Run signal has to be cycled
mode
once to become active)
1: Preset Run signals become
effective immediately after
switching to the Remote mode.
Selects if a Run signal will be
accepted when the Inverter is in
Run command
any Programming Mode.
b1-08 selection in pro- 0 or 1 0 No A 187H –
0: Run signal is disregarded.
gramming modes
1: Run signal is accepted (Dis-
abled for b1-02 = 0).
5-8
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the delay time for the execu-
tion of the Run signal. During the 0 to
b1-11 RUN delay 0 sec. No A 1DFH –
delay the Digital Operator display 600
will show “ddLY”
Sets the source of frequency refer-
HAND fre- ence for HAND operation.
b1-12 quency reference 0: Digital Operator 0 or 1 0 No A 1E0H 6-61
source selection*1 1: Control Circuit Terminal (ana-
log input)
Selects if the Inverter will permit
HAND/AUTO switching between HAND and
b1-13 switching during AUTO Modes while running. 0 or 1 0 No A 61DH 6-61
Run selection*1 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Sets the frequency reference used
Emergency over- 0.00 to 0.00
b1-14 in emergency override mode when No A 61AH 6-108
ride speed 200.0 Hz
b1-15=0.
Selects the emergency override ref-
erence source.
Emergency over-
0: Use b1-14 as frequency refer-
b1-15 ride reference 0 or 1 0 No A 61BH 6-108
ence
selection
1: Use AUTO as frequency refer-
ence
*1. This parameter is effective only, when the HOA operator JVOP-162 is used.
DC Injection Braking: b2
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Used to set the frequency at which
DC injection braking starts in units
DC injection of Hz when b1-03 is set to 0 (decel-
0.0 to
b2-01 braking start fre- eration to stop). 0.5 Hz No A 189H 6-13
10.0
quency If b2-01 < E1-09 (Min. output
freq.) then DC injection begins at
E1-09.
Sets the DC injection braking cur-
DC injection 0 to 6-11
b2-02 rent as a percentage of the Inverter 50% No A 18AH
braking current 100 6-13
rated current.
Sets the time DC injection braking
is performed before the Inverter
DC injection starts to accelerate the motor. 0.00
0.00
b2-03 braking time at Used to stop a coasting motor to No A 18BH 6-13
sec.
start before restarting it. 10.00
A set value of 0 sec. disables DC
injection braking at start.
Sets the time DC injection braking
is performed after finished deceler-
DC injection ation. 0.00
0.50 6-11
b2-04 braking time at Used to prevent coasting at the end to No A 18CH
sec. 6-13
stop of deceleration. 10.00
A set value of 0 sec. disables DC
injection braking at stop
5-9
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the motor preheat current level
Motor preheat in % of the Inverter rated current. 0 to
b2-09 0% No A 1E1H 6-106
current 1 Motor preheat is enabled by an dig- 100
ital input.
Sets the motor preheat current level
Motor preheat 2 in % of the Inverter rated current.
b2-10 0 to 10 5% No A 61CH 6-106
current 2 Motor preheat 2 is enabled by an
digital input.
Speed Search: b3
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Enables/disables the speed search
function and sets the speed search
method.
0:Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
Speed search
When the search is started, the
selection (current
motor speed is calculated and
b3-01 detection or 0 to 3 2 No A 191H 6-39
acceleration/deceleration is per-
speed calcula-
formed from the calculated speed
tion)
to the specified frequency (motor
direction is also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from
the frequency when power was
momentarily lost and the maxi-
mum frequency, and the speed is
detected at the search current level.
Sets the speed search operation
Speed search current as a percentage, taking the
operating current Inverter rated current as 100%. 0 to
b3-02 120% No A 192H 6-39
(current detec- Usually not necessary to set. When 200
tion) restarting is not possible with the
factory settings, reduce the value.
Sets the output frequency decelera-
Speed search tion time during speed search in 1-
deceleration time second units. 0.1 to
b3-03 2.0 sec. No A 193H 6-39
(current detec- Sets the time for deceleration from 10.0
tion) the maximum output frequency to
the minimum output frequency.
When a speed search is performed
after recovering from a momen-
Speed search wait
tary power loss, the search opera-
time (current
tion is delayed for the time set here. 0.0 to
b3-05 detection or 0.2 sec. No A 195H 6-39
If e.g. a contactor is used at the out- 20.0
speed calcula-
put side of the inverter set this
tion)
parameter to the contactor delay
time or more.
5-10
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Disables or enables the bi-direc-
Bi-directional tional capabilities of the speed
b3-14 speed search search function. 0 or 1 1 No A 19EH 6-39
selection 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Timer Function: b4
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the timer function output ON-
delay time (dead time) for the timer
Timer function 0.0 to
b4-01 function input. 0.0 sec. No A 1A3H 6-86
ON-delay time 3000.0
Enabled when the timer function is
set in H1- and H2- .
Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time (dead band) for the
Timer function 0.0 to
b4-02 timer function input. 0.0 sec. No A 1A4H 6-86
OFF-delay time 3000.0
Enabled when a timer function is
set in H1- and H2-
PI Control: b5
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0: Disabled
PI control mode 1: Enabled
b5-01 0, 1, 3 0 No Q 1A5H 6-87
selection 3: PI control enabled (frequency
reference + PI output)
Sets the proportional gain of the PI 0.00
Proportional (P)
b5-02
gain
controller. P control is not per- to 1.00 Yes A*1 1A6H 6-87
formed when set 0.00. 25.00
Sets the integral time of the PI con-
0.0 to
b5-03 Integral (I) time troller. I control is not performed 1.0 sec. Yes A*1 1A7H 6-87
360.0
when set to 0.0 sec.
Sets the I control limit as a percent-
0.0 to
b5-04 Integral (I) limit age of the maximum output fre- 100.0% Yes A 1A8H 6-87
100.0
quency.
Sets the limit after PI control as a
0.0 to
b5-06 PI limit percentage of the maximum output 100.0% Yes A 1AAH 6-87
100.0
frequency.
Sets the offset after PI control as a -100.0
b5-07 PI offset percentage of the maximum output to 0.0% Yes A 1ABH 6-87
frequency. +100.0
Sets the time constant for low pass
PI delay time 0.00 to 0.00
b5-08 filter of the PI control output. Yes A 1ACH 6-87
constant 10.00 sec.
Usually not necessary to set.
Selects forward/reverse direction
PI output charac- for PI output.
b5-09 0 or 1 0 No A 1ADH 6-87
teristics selection 0: PI output is forward.
1: PI output is reversed.
0.0 to
b5-10 PI output gain Sets output gain. 1.0 No A 1AEH 6-87
25.0
5-11
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0: Limit to 0 when PI output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PI output is neg-
PI reverse output
b5-11 ative. 0 or 1 0 No A 1AFH 6-87
selection
Limit to 0 is also active when
reverse operation disabled is
selected by b1-04.
0: No detection of PI feedback
loss.
1: Detection of PI feedback loss.
Operation continues during
Selection of PI
detection, the fault relay is not
b5-12 feedback signal 0 to 2 0 No A 1B0H 6-87
operated.
loss detection
2: Detection of PI feedback loss.
The motor coasts to stop at
detection, and the fault relay
operates.
Sets the PI feedback loss detection
PI feedback loss 0 to
b5-13 level as percentage using the maxi- 0% No A 1B1H 6-87
detection level 100
mum output frequency as 100%.
PI feedback loss Sets the PI feedback loss detection 0.0 to
b5-14 1.0 sec. No A 1B2H 6-87
detection time time. 25.5
Sleep function Sets the sleep function start level as 0.0 to
b5-15 0.0 Hz No A 1B3H 6-87
operation level a frequency. 200.0
Sleep operation Sets the delay time until the sleep 0.0 to
b5-16 0.0 sec. No A 1B4H 6-87
delay time function starts. 25.5
Accel/decel time Sets the accel/decel time for the PI 0.0 to
b5-17 0.0 sec. No A 1B5H 6-87
for PI reference Softstarter (SFS). 25.5
PI Setpoint Selec- 0: Disabled
b5-18 0 to 1 0 No A 1DCH 6-87
tion 1: Enabled
0.00 to
b5-19 PI Setpoint PI target value 100.00 0 Yes A 1DDH 6-87
%
Sets the unit for b5-19, U1-38 and
U1-24
0: 0.01 Hz
1: 0.01% (the maximum output
frequency E1-04 is taken as
100%.
2 – 39: rpm, set value is equal to
PI Setpoint Scal- motor poles 0 to
b5-20 1 No A 1E2H 6-87
ing 40 – 39999: User desired display 39999
Sets the display value

for 100 %.
Sets the number of

decimal digits.
Sets the operation method of the PI

sleep function
Sleep Function
b5-21 0: PI Setpoint 0 to 2 1 No A 1E3H 6-87
Selection
1: SFS Input
2: Snooze
5-12
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the frequency level at which
the snooze operation starts as per- 0 to
b5-22 Snooze Level 0% Yes A 1E4H 6-87
centage of the max. output fre- 100
quency.
Snooze Delay Sets a delay timer for the snooze 0 to
b5-23 0 sec. No A 1E5H 6-87
Time function 3600
Sets the feedback level at which
0 to
b5-24 Wake-Up Level the inverter wakes up from snooze 0% No A 1E6H 6-87
100
operation.
Sets the PI setpoint boost when the
snooze mode is activated. If it is
0 to
b5-25 Setpoint Boost reached once the output will be 0% No A 1E7H 6-87
100
switched off. The value is set as
percentage of the PI setpoint.
Maximum Boost Sets the maximum time the boost 0 to
b5-26 0 sec. No A 1E8H 6-87
Time operation is performed. 3600
PI Snooze function will only be
activated when the feedback value
0 to
b5-27 Snooze feedback is above this parameter setting. 60% No A 1E9H 6-87
100
The value is set as percentage of
the PI setpoint.
Enables or disables the square root
PI Feedback operation for the PI feedback
b5-28 Square Root value. 0 or 1 0 No A 1EAH 6-87
Operation 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
PI Feedback Sets the gain for the feedback when 0 to
b5-29 1.00 No A 1EBH 6-87
Square Root Gain square root operation is enabled. 2.00
Selects whether the PI output mon-
itor is shown as square root value
PI Output Moni-
b5-30 or not. 0 or 1 0 No A 1ECH 6-87
tor Square Root
0: Disable
1: Enable
Selects the units for the PI control-
ler values (b5-19, U1-24, U1-38).
PI unit selec-
b5-31 Refer to table b5-31 Settings for 0 to 11 0 No A*1 1EDH 6-87
tion*2
the explanation of the setting
range.
*1. Parameter is moved into Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled, otherwise the parameter is available only in Advanced Program-
ming Mode.
*2. Parameter function is only valid if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used (LCD or HOA Digital Operator)
b5-31 Settings
Setting
Function Displayed Unit
Value
0 WC: Inch of water column WC
1 PSI: lb/square inch PSI
2 GPM: Gallons per minute GPM
3 F: Degree Fahrenheit F
4 CFM: Cubic feet per minute CFM
5 CMH: Cubic meter per hour CMH
6 LPH: Liters per hour LPH
7 LPS: Liters per second LPS
5-13
Setting
Value
8 Bar: Bar Bar
9 Pa: Pascal Pa
10 C: Degree Celsius C
11 Mtr: Meters Mtr
Energy Saving: b8
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Enables or disables the energy-sav-
Energy-saving ing function.
b8-01 0 or 1 0 No A 1CCH 6-98
mode selection 0: Disable
1: Enable
Sets the energy-saving coefficient.
Energy-saving Adjust the value in 5% steps until 0.0 to *1
b8-04 No A 1CFH 6-98
coefficient the output power becomes mini- 655.00
mal.
Power detection
Sets the time constant for output 0 to
b8-05 filter time con- 20msec No A 1D0H 6-98
power detection. 2000
stant
Sets the limit value of the voltage
control range during search opera-
Search operation tion. 0 to
b8-06 0% No A 1D1H 6-98
voltage limiter Set to 0 to disable the search oper- 100
ation. 100% is the motor rated volt-
age.
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity.
5-14
Tuning Parameters: C
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
Change
Param- MEMO-
eter Name Description BUS Reg- Page
Number ister
tion
Sets the acceleration time to accel-
Acceleration 4-11
C1-01 erate from 0 Hz to the Yes Q 200H
time 1 6-15
maximum output frequency.
Sets the deceleration time to decel-
Deceleration 4-11
C1-02 erate from the maximum output Yes Q 201H
time 1 6-15
frequency to 0 Hz.
Sets the acceleration time when the
Acceleration 0.0 to 10.0
C1-03 multi-function input “accel/decel Yes A 202H 6-15
time 2 6000.0 sec.
time 1” is set to ON.
Sets the deceleration time when the
Deceleration
C1-04 multi-function input “accel/decel Yes A 203H 6-15
time 2
time 1” is set to ON.
Sets the deceleration time when the
Emergency stop
C1-09 multi-function input “Emergency No A 208H 6-15
time
(fast) Stop” is set to ON.
Sets the frequency for automatic
acceleration/deceleration switch-
ing.
Accel/decel time If the output frequency is below the
0.0 to
C1-11 switching fre- set frequency: Accel/decel time 2 0.0 Hz No A 20AH 6-15
200.0
quency If the output frequency is above the
set frequency: Accel/decel time 1
The multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” has priority.
S-Curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
Param- Change
MEMO-
eter Setting Factory during Access
Name Description BUS Page
Num- Range Setting Opera- Level
Register
ber tion
When the S-curve characteristic time is
set, the accel time will increase by only
half of the S-curve characteristic times
S-curve charac-
at start and 0.20
C2-01 teristic time at No A 20BH 6-16
end. sec.
acceleration start
Run command ON OFF
Output frequency
C2-02 0.00
to
C2-01
2.50
Time
S-curve charac-
C2-01 C2-02 0.20
C2-02 teristic time at T accel = --------------- + C1-01 + --------------- No A 20CH 6-16
2 2 sec.
acceleration end
The S-Curve characteristic times at
start and end of deceleration are fixed
to 0.2 sec. and can not be changed.
5-15
Torque Compensation: C4
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the torque compensation gain.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust under the following circum-
stances:
• When the motor cable is long
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter capac-
Torque compen- 0.00 to 4-11
C4-01 ity (Max. applicable motor 1.00 Yes A 215H
sation gain 2.50 6-27
capacity), increase the set val-
ues.
• When the motor speed is oscil-
lating, decrease the set values.
Adjust the torque compensation
gain so that at minimum speed the
output current does not exceed the
Inverter rated output current.
The torque compensation delay
time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust under the following circum-
Torque compen-
stances: 0 to 4-11
C4-02 sation delay time 200 ms No A 216H
• When the motor is oscillating, 10000 6-27
constant
increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the
motor is low, decrease the set
values.
5-16
Carrier Frequency: C6
Param- Change
MEMO-
Register
ber tion
Normal duty 1: Normal Duty 1
C6-01 1 or 2 1 No A 223H 6-2
selection 2: Normal Duty 2
Selects the carrier frequency. 6
Carrier fre- 4-11
C6-02 Select F to enable detailed settings 0 to F *1 No A 224H
quency selection 6-2
using parameters C6-03 to C6-05.
Carrier fre- 2.0 to 15.0

C6-03 quency upper Sets the carrier frequency upper limit 15.0 kHz No A 225H 6-2
limit and lower limit in kHz units. *2 *3 *1
The carrier frequency gain is set as fol-
lows:
Carrier frequency
Carrier fre- 0.4 to 15.0

C6-04 quency lower 15.0 kHz No A 226H 6-2
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K *2 *3 *1
limit Output fre-
quency
(Max. output frequency)
K is a coefficient that depends on the

setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
Carrier fre- 10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2 00 to
C6-05 quency propor- 5.0 kHz > C6-03: K = 1 99 00 No A 227H 6-2
tional gain *3
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity and the protection class.
*2. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity.
*3. This parameter can only be set when C6-02 is set to F.
5-17
Reference Parameters: d
Preset Reference: d1
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Frequency 0.00
d1-01 Sets the frequency reference. Yes A 280H 6-7
reference 1 Hz
Sets the frequency reference when
Frequency 0.00
d1-02 multi-step speed command 1 is ON Yes A 281H 6-7
reference 2 Hz
for a multi-function input.
Frequency 0.00
d1-03 multi-step speed command 2 is ON 0 to Yes A 282H 6-7
reference 3 Hz
for a multi-function input. FMAX
Frequency 0.00
d1-04 multi-step speed commands 1 and Yes A 283H 6-7
reference 4 Hz
2 are ON for multi-function inputs.
Jog frequency the jog frequency reference selec- 6.00 6-7
d1-17 Yes A 292H
reference tion, FJOG command, or RJOG Hz 6-62
command is ON.
Note:The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor, default: 0.01 Hz).
Reference Limits: d2
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the frequency reference upper
Frequency refer- 0.0 to 6-24
d2-01 limit as a percentage of the max. 100.0% No Q 289H
ence upper limit 110.0 6-55
output frequency.
Sets the frequency reference lower
Frequency refer- 0.0 to 6-24
d2-02 limit as a percentage of the maxi- 0.0% No Q 28AH
ence lower limit 110.0 6-55
mum output frequency.
Master speed ref- Sets the master speed reference
0.0 to 6-24
d2-03 erence lower lower limit as a percentage of the 0.0% No A 293H
110.0 6-55
limit max. output frequency.
Note:The PI Sleep Function is also available and can be used without enabled PI controller. It can be used to let the inverter switch off automatically when a
minimum output frequency (set in b5-15) has been output for a time longer than b5-16. Refer also to page page 6-94, PI Sleep Function.
5-18
Jump Frequencies: d3
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the jump (resonance) frequen-
d3-01 Jump frequency 1 cies in Hz. 0.0 Hz No A 294H 6-23
The function is disabled when the
jump frequency is set to 0 Hz.
Always ensure the following set-
ting order: 0.0 to
d3-02 Jump frequency 2 0.0 Hz No A 295H 6-23
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 200.0
Operation in the jump frequency
range is prohibited but during
acceleration and deceleration, the
d3-03 Jump frequency 3 speed changes smoothly without 0.0 Hz No A 296H 6-23
jumping over the set frequencies
Sets the jump frequency bandwidth
Jump frequency in Hz. 0.0 to
d3-04 1.0 Hz No A 297H 6-23
width The jump frequency range will be 20.0
the jump frequency ± d3-04.
Reference Frequency Hold: d4

Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets whether or not frequency ref-
erence value on hold will be
recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is turned
on again the frequency refe-
Frequency refer- rence is set to 0.)
6-54
d4-01 ence hold func- 1: Enabled (when operation is 0 or 1 0 No A 298H
6-55
tion selection stopped or the power is turned
on again the inverter starts at
the previous hold frequency.)
This function is available when the
multi-function inputs “Accel/Decel
Ramp Hold” or “UP/DOWN”
commands are set.
Sets the frequency to be added to
or subtracted from the analog fre-
quency reference as a percentage
Trim Control of the max. output frequency. 0 to
d4-02 10% No A 299H 6-58
Level Enabled when the Trim control 100
increase command or Trim control
decrease command is set for a
multi-function input.
5-19
Motor Parameters: E
V/f Pattern: E1
Param- Change
MEMO-
Register
ber tion
Sets the Inverter input voltage. 155 to
Input voltage set- 200 V 6-100
E1-01 This setting is used as a reference value 255 *1 No Q 300H
ting *1 6-19
for protection functions.
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F: Custom user-set pattern
V/f pattern selec- (Applicable for setting of E1- 0 to F,
E1-03 F No A 302H 6-100
tion 04 to E1-10.) FF
FF: Custom user-set pattern with-
out voltage and frequency lim-
its
Max. output fre-
0.0 to 50.0
E1-04 quency No A 303H 6-100
Output Voltage (V) 200.0 Hz
(FMAX)
0.0 to 200.0
Max. output volt-
E1-05 255.0 V No A 304H 6-100
age (VMAX) *1 *1
Base frequency 0.0 to 50.0

E1-06 No A 305H 6-100
(FA) 200.0 Hz
Mid. output fre- 0.0 to
E1-07 Frequency (Hz) 2.5 Hz No A 306H 6-100
quency (FB) 200.0
Mid. output fre- To set V/f characteristics in a straight
0.0 to 15.0 V
E1-08 quency voltage line, set the same values for E1-07 and *1 No A 307H 6-100
(VB) E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1- 255 *1
08 will be disregarded.
Min. output fre- 0.0 to
E1-09 Always ensure that the four frequen- 1.2 Hz No A 308H 6-100
quency (FMIN) 200.0
cies are set in the following manner:
Min. output fre- E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 0.0 to
9.0 V 4-11
E1-10 quency voltage (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN) 255.0 *1 No A 309H
*1 6-100
(VMIN)
Mid. output fre- 0.0 to 0.0 Hz
E1-11 *2 No A 30AH 6-100
quency 2 Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the out- 200.0
put range. Normally, this setting is not 0.0 to
Mid. output fre- required. 0.0 V
E1-12 255.0 *2 No A 30BH 6-100
quency voltage 2 *1
0.0 to
Base voltage Sets the output voltage of the base fre- 0.0 V
E1-13 255.0 No A 30CH 6-100
(VBASE) quency (E1-06). *1
*2. Parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are disabled when set to 0.0
5-20
Motor Setup: E2
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the motor rated current.
This set value will become the ref- 0.32 to
Motor rated cur- erence value for motor protection 1.90 A 6-33
E2-01 6.40 *2 No Q 30EH
rent and torque limits. *1 6-99
This parameter is an input data for
autotuning.
Sets the motor no-load current. 0.00 to
Motor no-load 1.2 A
E2-03 This parameter is automatically set No A 310H 6-99
current
during autotuning. 1.89*3 *2
Sets the motor phase-to-phase

0.000 9.842
Motor line-to-line resistance in Ω units.
E2-05 to Ω No A 312H 6-99
resistance This parameter is automatically set *2
65.000
during autotuning.
*3. The setting range is 0.00 A to (E2-01 - 0.01 A).
5-21
Option Parameters: F
Communications Option Cards: F6

Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Set the stopping method for com-
munications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using the
Operation selec-
deceleration time in C1-02
F6-01 tion after commu- 0 to 3 1 No A 3A2H –
1: Coast to stop
nications error
2: Emergency stop using the
3: Continue operation
Option card
external fault 0: Always detected
F6-02 0 or 1 0 No A 3A3H –
detection selec- 1: Detected only during operation
tion
Option card
1: Coast to stop
F6-03 external fault 0 to 3 1 No A 3A4H –
stopping method
Current scaling Sets the unit of the current monitor
F6-05 via communica- 0: Ampere 0 or 1 0 No A 3A6H –
tion option card 1: 100% 8192
5-22
Terminal Function Parameters: H
Multi-function Digital Inputs: H1

Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Terminal S3
H1-01 Multi-function digital input 1 0 to 82 24 No A 400H –
function selection
Terminal S4
H1-02 Multi-function digital input 2 0 to 82 14 No A 401H –
function selection
Terminal S5
H1-03
function selection
Multi-function digital input 3 0 to 82 3 (0)*1 No A 402H –
Terminal S6
H1-04
function selection
Terminal S7
H1-05
function selection
*1. The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire-sequence.
Multi-function Digital Input Functions

Setting
Function Page
Value
0 3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command) 6-10
1 Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator, OFF: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting) 6-52
2 Operation Source Option Card/Inverter selection (ON: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting) 6-60
Multi-step speed reference 1
3 6-7
When H3-09 is set to 2, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed switch.
4 Multi-step speed reference 2 6-7
6 Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference) 6-7
7 Acceleration/Deceleration time selection 1 6-15
8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) 6-53
9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) 6-53
A Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency is hold) 6-54
C Multi-function analog input A2 enable (ON: Enable) 6-53
F Terminal not used –
10 UP command (Always set with the DOWN command) 6-55
11 DOWN command (Always set with the UP command) 6-55
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17) 6-62
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17) 6-62
14 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) 7-2
15 Emergency stop (NO: Deceleration to stop with deceleration time set in C1-09 when ON.) 6-14
17 Emergency stop (NC: Deceleration to stop with deceleration time set in C1-09 when OFF) 6-14
Timer function input
18 6-86
(times are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function outputs are set in H2- .)
19 PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled) 6-87
Parameters write enable
1B 6-117
(ON: All parameters can be set. OFF: All parameters are write protected.)
1C Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.) 6-58
1D Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency reference.) 6-58
1E Analog frequency reference sample/hold (ON: reference is sampled and hold) 6-59
5-23
Setting
Function Page
Value
External fault
20 to 2F 6-63
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, detection mode: normal/during operation
PI control integral reset
30 6-87
(ON: integral reset and hold as long as input is ON)
31 PI control integral hold (ON: integral is hold) 6-87
34 PI soft starter disable (ON: disabled) 6-87
35 PI input characteristics switch 6-87
36 Operation Source Option/Inverter selection 2 (ON: option card) 6-60
60 Motor preheat command 1 (ON: Performs motor preheat) 6-106
61 External speed search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) 6-39
62 External speed search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency) 6-39
64 External speed search command 3 6-39
67 Communications test mode 6-85
68 High Slip braking (HSB) 6-109
69 Jog Frequency 2 6-7
6A Drive enable (ON: Drive enabled) 6-54
6B Operation Source Communication/Inverter selection (ON: RS-422/485 port) 6-60
6C Operation Source Communication/Inverter selection 2 (ON: inverter settings) 6-60
6D* AUTO mode selection (ON: AUTO mode active) 6-61
6E* HAND mode selection (ON: HAND mode active) 6-61
70 Bypass Drive Enable (ON: Inverter enabled) 6-54
80 Motor Preheat 2 (ON: motor performs preheat 2) 6-106
81 Emergency Override Forward (ON: Inverter performs emergency override in forward direction) 6-108
82 Emergency Override Reverse (ON: Inverter performs emergency override in reverse direction) 6-108
* This setting is effective only, if the HOA operator JVOP-162 is used.
Multi-function Digital Outputs: H2

Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Terminal M1-M2 Multi-function digital
H2-01 0 to 3D 0 No A 40BH –
function selection output 1
Terminal M3-M4 Multi-function digital
H2-02 0 to 3D 1 No A 40CH –
function selection output 2
Multi-function Digital Output Functions

Setting
Function Page
Value
0 During run 1 (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output) 6-64
1 Zero speed 6-65
2 fref/fout agree 1 (detection width L4-02 is used.) 6-25
fref/fset agree 1
3 6-25
(ON: Output frequency = ±L4-01, with detection width L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
Frequency detection 1
4 6-25
(ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, detection width L4-02 used)
Frequency detection 2
5 6-25
(ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, detection width L4-02 used)
5-24
Setting
Function Page
Value
Inverter operation ready
6 6-65
READY: After start-up or no faults
7 During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection 6-65
8 During baseblock (NO contact, ON: during baseblock) 6-65
9 Frequency reference source selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator) 6-65
A Run command source selection status (ON: Run command from Operator) 6-65
B Load detection NO (NO contact, ON: overload/loss of load detected) 6-30
C Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05) 6-44
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and CPF01 has
E 6-65
occurred.)
F Not used. (Set when the terminal is not used.) -
10 Minor Fault (Alarm) (ON: Alarm displayed) 6-65
11 Fault reset command active 6-66
12 Timer function output 6-86
17 Load Detection NC (NC contact, OFF: overload/loss of load detected) 6-30
1A Reverse direction 6-66
1E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) 6-45
During motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm
1F 6-33
(ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
20 OH pre-alarm (temperature reached L8-02) 6-66
38 Drive enabled 6-66
39 Drive waiting (start delay time b1-11 is active) 6-66
3A During OH and reduced Frequency 6-66
3B RUN command from option card/communications 6-66
3D Cooling fan fault (ON: internal cooling fan error) 6-66
Analog Inputs: H3
Change
Parame- MEMO-
ter Num- Name Description BUS Page
ber Register
tion
value when 10 V is input as a per- 0.0 to
H3-02 Terminal A1 gain 100.0% Yes A 411H 6-21
centage of the maximum output 1000.0
frequency set in E1-04.
-100.0
value when 0 V is input as a per-
H3-03 Terminal A1 bias to 0.0% Yes A 412H 6-21
centage of the maximum output
+100.0
frequency set in E1-04.
Selects the signal level input at
Analog input A2 multi-function analog input A2. A
H3-08 signal level selec- 0: 0 to +10V (11 bit). 0, 2, 3 2 No *1 417H 6-21
tion 2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
3: 0 to 20 mA (9-bit input)
Selects the multi-function analog
Analog input A2 input function for terminal A2.
2
H3-09 function selec- Refer to the table H3-09 Set- 0 to 1F *2 No A*1 418H 6-21
tion. tings for the explanation of the
setting range.
5-25
Change
Parame- MEMO-
ter Num- Name Description BUS Page
ber Register
tion
Sets the value of the function sig-
nal when 10 V (20 mA) is input 0.0 to
H3-10 Terminal A2 gain 100.0% Yes A 419H 6-21
as a percentage of the maximum 1000.0
value.
Sets the value of the function sig-
-100.0
nal when 0 V (0/4 mA) is input as
H3-11 Terminal A2 bias to 0.0% Yes A 41AH 6-21
a percentage of the maximum
+100.0
value.
Sets input filter time constant for
the two analog input terminals
Analog input fil- 0.00 to 0.30
H3-12 (A1 and A2). No A 41BH 6-21
ter time constant 2.00 sec.
Effective for noise suppression
etc.
Selects on which terminal the
main frequency reference can be
input.
0: Use analog input 1 on terminal
Terminal A1/A2
H3-13 A1 for main frequency refer- 0 or 1 0 No A*1 41CH 6-21
switching
ence.
1: Use analog input 2 on terminal
A2 for main frequency refer-
ence.
*1. Parameter is also available in Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled, otherwise parameter is only available in Advanced Program-
ming Mode.
*2. Setting switched to “B” when PI controller is enabled
H3-09 Settings
Setting
Function Contents (100%) Page
Value
0 Frequency bias Maximum output frequency 6-22
Auxiliary frequency reference (is used as
2 Maximum output frequency 6-7
frequency reference 2)
B PI feedback Maximum output frequency 6-87
D Frequency Bias 2 Maximum output frequency 6-22
E Motor temperature input – 6-35
16 PI differential input Maximum output frequency 6-87
1F Analog input not used. – –
5-26
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4

Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the number of the monitor
Terminal FM
H4-01 item to be output (U1- ) at ter- 1 to 53 2 No A 41DH 6-67
monitor selection
minal FM.
Sets the analog output FM gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor
0 to
Terminal FM value that is equal to 10 V output at
H4-02 1000.0 100% Yes A 41EH 6-67
gain terminal FM.
%
Note that the maximum output
voltage is 10 V.
Sets the analog output FM bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor -110.0
item that is equal to 0 V output at to
H4-03 Terminal FM bias 0.0% Yes A 41FH 6-67
terminal FM. +110.0
The maximum output from the ter- %
minal is 10 V.
Sets the number of the monitor
Terminal AM
H4-04 item to be output (U1- ) at ter- 1 to 53 8 No A 420H 6-67
monitor selection
minal FM.
Sets the analog output AM gain.
Sets the percentage of the monitor
0 to
Terminal AM value that is equal to 10V output at
H4-05 1000.0 50.0% Yes A 421H 6-67
gain terminal AM.
%
Note that the maximum output
voltage is 10V.
Sets the analog output AM bias.
Sets the percentage of the monitor -110.0
Terminal AM item that is equal to 0 V output at to
H4-06 0.0% Yes A 422H 6-67
bias terminal AM. +110.0
The maximum output from the ter- %
minal is 10 V.
Sets the signal output level for
multi-function output 1 (terminal
Terminal FM sig- FM)
H4-07 0 or 2 0 No A 423H 6-67
nal level selection 0: 0 to +10 V output
2: 4 – 20 mA*1
Sets the signal output level for
Terminal AM multi-function output 2 (terminal
H4-08 signal level selec- AM) 0 or 2 0 No A 424H 6-67
tion 0: 0 to +10 V output
2: 4 – 20 mA*1
*1. An analog output signal of 4 - 20 mA requires an optional terminal board (ETC618121) for current output
5-27
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0 to 20
H5-01 Station address Sets the Inverter's node address. *1 1F No A 425H 6-69
Sets the baud rate for MEMOBUS

communications.
0: 1200 bps
Communications
H5-02 1: 2400 bps 0 to 4 3 No A 426H 6-69
speed selection
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
Sets the parity for MEMOBUS
communications.
Communications
H5-03 0: No parity 0 to 2 0 No A 427H 6-69
parity selection
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
Sets the stopping method for com-
munications errors.
Stopping method
H5-04 after communica- 0 to 3 3 No A 428H 6-69
1: Coast to stop
tions error
Sets whether or not a communica-
Communications tions time out is to be detected as a
H5-05 error detection communications error. 0 or 1 1 No A 429H 6-69
selection 0: Not detected
1: Detect
Sets the time the Inverter waits
H5-06 Send wait time until a response is sent to the Mas- 5 to 65 5 msec No A 42AH 6-69
ter.
Enables or disables RTS control.
RTS control ON/ 0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
H5-07 0 or 1 1 No A 42BH 6-69
OFF 1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only
when sending)
Selects the Protocol for the Com-
Communication munication
H5-08 0, 1 0 No A 434H 6-69
Selection 0: Memobus
1: N2 (Metasys)
Sets the time before CE error
0.0 to
(Communication error) is detected
H5-09 CE detection time 10.0 2.0 sec No A 435H 6-69
when MEMOBUS communication
sec
is used.
*1. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications
5-28
Protection Function Parameters: L
Motor Overload: L1
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled at
electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protec-
tion (fan cooled motor)
Motor protection
L1-01 2: Inverter motor protection 0 or 3 1 No A 480H 6-33
selection
(externally cooled motor)
3:Vector motor protection
When several motors are con-
nected to one Inverter, set to 0 and
ensure that each motor is installed
with a protection device.
Sets the electric thermal detection
time in units of minutes.
Usually changing this setting is not
necessary.
Motor protection The factory setting is 150% over- 0.1 to
L1-02 1.0 min No A 481H 6-33
time constant load for one minute. 5.0
When the motor's overload capa-
bility is known, also set the over-
load resistance protection time for
when the motor is hot started.
Selects the operation when the
input motor temperature (ther-
mistor) input exceeds the alarm
detection level (1.17 V) (H3-09
Alarm operation
must be set to E).
selection during
L1-03 0: Decelerate to stop 0 to 3 3 No A 482H 6-35
motor overheat-
1: Coast to stop
ing
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (oH3 on the
Operator display flashes).
Selects the operation when the
motor temperature (thermistor)
input exceeds the overheating
Motor overheat- detection level (2.34 V) (H3-09
L1-04 ing operation must be set to E). 0 to 2 1 No A 483H 6-35
selection 0: Decelerate to stop
1: Coast to stop
deceleration time in C1-09.
Motor tempera- Sets the delay time constant for the
0.00 to 0.20
L1-05 ture input filter motor temperature (thermistor) No A 484H 6-35
10.00 sec.
time constant input (H3-09=E) in seconds.
5-29
Power Loss Ride Through: L2
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0: Disabled (DC bus undervoltage
(UV1) detection)
1: Enabled (Restarted when the
power returns within the time
set in L2-02. When L2-02 is
Momentary
exceeded, DC bus undervoltage
L2-01 power loss detec- 0 to 2 0 No A 485H 6-38
is detected.)
tion
2: Enabled while CPU is operat-
ing. (Restarts when power
returns during control opera-
tions. Does not detect DC bus
undervoltage.)
Momentary Ride through time, when Momen- 0.1 sec.
0 to
L2-02 power loss ride tary Power Loss Selection (L2-01) *1 No A 486H 6-38
25.5
through time is set to 1.
Sets the Inverter's minimum base-
block time, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ride-
through.
Min. baseblock Set the time to approximately 0.7 0.1 to 0.1 sec. 6-38
L2-03 *1 No A 487H
time times the motor time constant. 5.0 6-39
If an overcurrent or overvoltage
occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
Sets the time required to return the
Voltage recovery Inverter output voltage from 0V to 0.0 to 0.3 sec. 6-38
L2-04 *1 No A 488H
time normal voltage at the completion 5.0 6-39
of a speed search.
Sets the main circuit undervoltage
(UV) detection level (main circuit 150 to 190
Undervoltage VDC
L2-05 DC voltage). 210 No A 489H 6-38
detection level *2 *2
necessary.
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
*2. These are values for a 200 V class Inverter. Values for a 400 V class Inverter are double
5-30
Stall Prevention: L3
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a heavy load, the motor
may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration stopped
when L3-02 level is exceeded.
Stall prevention Acceleration starts again when
L3-01 selection during the current has fallen below the 0 to 2 1 No A 48FH 6-17
accel stall prevention level).
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a
basis, acceleration is automati-
cally adjusted. Set acceleration
time is disregarded.)
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1 or
2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter
Stall prevention 0 to
L3-02 rated current. 120% No A 490H 6-17
level during accel 200
necessary. Reduce the setting when
the motor stalls.
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If
deceleration time is too short, a
DC bus overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the DC bus volt-
age exceeds the stall prevention
level. Deceleration restarts
Stall prevention when the voltage falls below the
L3-04 selection during stall prevention level again.) 0 to 2 1 No A 492H 6-19
decel 2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is automati-
cally adjusted so that the
Inverter can decelerate in the
shortest possible time. The set
deceleration time is disre-
garded.)
When a braking option (Braking
Unit) is used, always set to 0.
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a
heavy load, the motor may
Stall prevention stall.)
L3-05 selection during 1: Deceleration using deceleration 0 to 2 1 No A 493H 6-29
running time 1 (C1-02.)
2: Deceleration using decelera-
tiontime 2 (C1-04.)
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the Inverter
Stall prevention rated current.
30 to
L3-06 level during run- Usually changing this setting is not 120% No A 494H 6-29
200
ning necessary.
Reduce the setting when the motor
stalls.
5-31
Reference Detection: L4
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the detection level for the ref-
erence detection function.
Effective when a multi-function
Speed agreement 0.0 to
L4-01 output is set to: 0.0 Hz No A 499H 6-25
detection level 200.0
- 3 ("fout = fset agree"),
- 4 ("Frequency detection 1") or
- 5 ("Frequency detection 2").
Sets the hysteresis for the reference
detection function.
Effective when a multi-function
Speed agreement output is set to: 0.0 to
L4-02 - 2 ("fref = fout agree"), 2.0 Hz No A 49AH 6-25
detection width 20.0
- 3 ("fout = fset agree"),
- 4 ("Frequency detection 1") or
- 5 ( "Frequency detection 2").
0: Deceleration to Stop
1: Operation continues at the fre-
Operation when
quency set in parameter L4-06.
L4-05 frequency refer- 0 or 1 1 No A 49DH 6-44
Frequency reference loss means
ence is missing
that the frequency reference value
drops over 90% in 400 ms.
Frequency refer- Sets the frequency reference value
ence value at fre- as a percentage of the previous fre- 0.0 to
L4-06 80% No A 4C2H 6-44
quency reference quency reference, in case the fre- 100.0%
loss quency reference signal is lost.
Fault Restart: L5
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts.
Number of auto
L5-01 Automatically restarts after a fault 0 to 10 0 No A 49EH 6-45
restart attempts
and conducts a speed search from
the run frequency.
Sets whether a fault relay is acti-
vated during fault restart.
Auto restart oper- 0: No output (Fault relay is not
L5-02 0 or 1 0 No A 49FH 6-45
ation selection activated.)
1: Output (Fault relay is acti-
vated.)
Sets the maximum time, the restart 0.5 to 10.0
L5-03 Fault Retry time No A 4A0H 6-45
is tried. 180.0 sec
5-32
Load Detection: L6
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0: Load detection disabled.
1: Overload detection only at
speed agree; operation contin-
ues (alarm).
2: Overload detection continu-
ously during operation; opera-
tion continues (alarm).
3: Overload detection only at
speed agree; coast to stop
(fault).
4: Overload detection continu-
ously during operation; coast to
Load detection
L6-01 stop (fault). 0 to 8 6 No A 4A1H 6-30
selection
5: Loss of load detection only at
speed agree; operation contin-
ues (alarm).
6: Loss of load detection continu-
ously during operation; opera-
tion continues (alarm).
7: Loss of Load detection only at
speed agree; coast to stop
(fault).
8: Loss of Load detection continu-
ously during operation; coast to
stop (fault).
Load detection Inverter rated current is set as 0 to
L6-02 15% No A 4A2H 6-30
level 100%. 300
Load detection Sets the overload/loss of load 0.0 to 10.0
L6-03 No A 4A3H 6-30
time detection time. 10.0 sec.
5-33
Hardware Protection: L8
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the detection temperature for
Overheat pre- 50 to
L8-02
alarm level
the Inverter overheat detection pre-
130 95 °C*1 No A 4AEH 6-47
alarm in °C.
Sets the operation for when the
Inverter overheat pre-alarm occurs.
0: Decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time
Operation selec-
C1-09.
L8-03 tion after over- 0 to 4 4 No A 4AFH 6-47
3: Continue operation (Monitor
heat pre-alarm
display only.)
4: OH-Alarm and output fre-
quency reduction (L8-19)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to
2 and a alarm will be given in set-
ting 3 and 4.
Input Phase Loss Allowed DC bus ripple before 0.0 to
L8-06 5%*1 No A 4B2H 6-48
Detection Level Input Phase Loss is detected. 25.0%
0: Disabled
Ground fault pro- 1: Enabled
L8-09 0 or 1 1 No A 4B5H 6-48
tection selection It is not recommended to use
another setting than factory setting.
Sets the ON/OFF control for the
cooling fan.
Cooling Fan con- 0: ON only when RUN command
L8-10 0 or 1 0 No A 4B6H 6-49
trol selection is on
1: ON whenever inverter is pow-
ered up
Set the time in seconds to delay
Cooling fan con- turning OFF the cooling fan after 0 to 300
L8-11 No A 4B7H 6-49
trol delay time the inverter STOP command is 300 sec.
given.
Ambient temper- 45 to
L8-12 Set the ambient temperature. 45 °C No A 4B8H 6-49
ature 60
0: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds disabled.
OL2 characteris-
1: OL2 characteristics at low
L8-15 tics selection at 0 or 1 1 No A 4BBH 6-50
speeds enabled.
low speeds
It is not recommended to use
0: Disable
Soft CLA selec- 1: Enable
L8-18 0 or 1 1 No A 4BEH 6-51
tion It is not recommended to use
Frequency refer- Sets the frequency reference when
0.0 to
L8-19 ence during OH OH pre-alarm is detected in per- 20.0% No A 4BFH 6-47
100.0
pre-alarm cent of maximum frequency
Selects whether or not a failure of
OH1 detection the internal fan leads to OH1.
L8-32 selection for fan 0: Disabled 0 or 1 1 No A 4E2H 6-49
failure (FAN alarm is displayed)
1: Enabled (OH1 fault occurs)
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity and the protection class. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW in protection class IP00
or IP20 / NEMA 1 is given.
5-34
Special Adjustments: n
Hunting Prevention Function: n1

Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0: Hunting prevention function
Hunting preven-
disabled
n1-01 tion function 0 or 1 1 No A 580H 6-28
1: Hunting prevention function
selection
enabled
Hunting preven- 0.00 to 4-11

n1-02 Sets the hunting prevention gain. 1.00 No A 581H
tion gain 2.50 6-28
High Slip Braking: n3

Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
High Slip brak- Sets the frequency width for decel-
n3-01 ing deceleration eration during High Slip braking in 1 to 20 5% No A 588H 6-109
frequency width percent of FMAX (E1-04).
Sets the current limit for decelera-
tion during High Slip braking in
High Slip brak- 100 to
n3-02 percent of the motor rated current. 150% No A 589H 6-109
ing current limit 200
The resulting limit must be 120%
of the Inverter rated current or less.
High Slip brak- Sets the dwell time for the output
0.0 to
n3-03 ing stop dwell frequency for FMIN (1.5 Hz) after 1.0 sec. No A 58AH 6-109
10.0
time High Slip Braking.
Sets the time until OL7 occurs if
High Slip brak- the output frequency does not 30 to
n3-04 40 sec. No A 58BH 6-109
ing OL7 time change for any reason during High 1200
Slip braking.
5-35
Digital Operator Parameters: o
Monitor Select: o1
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the number of the 4th monitor
Monitor selec- item to be displayed in the Drive
o1-01 6 to 53 6 Yes A 500H 6-110
tion*1 Mode (U1- ).
(Only on LED Digital Operator.)
Sets the monitor item to be dis-
played when the power is turned
Monitor selec- on.
o1-02 tion after power 1: Frequency reference 1 to 4 1 Yes A 501H 6-110
up 2: Output frequency
3: Output current
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Sets the units that will be set and
displayed for the frequency refer-
ence and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum output
frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: rpm units (Set the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999: User desired display
Digital operator Set the desired values for setting 0 to
o1-03 0 No A 502H 6-111
display scaling and display for the max. output fre- 39999
quency.
Sets the value that is

to be displayed at
100% excluding the
decimal point.
Sets the number of

decimal places.
Example: When the max. output

value is 200.0, set 12000
Sets the brightness on the LCD
Digital Operator.
0: light
1:
o1-05 LCD-Focus 0 to 5 3 Yes A 504H –
2:
3: normal
4:
5: dark
0: Below the active monitor
parameter the next 2 sequential
Monitor Mode monitors are displayed.
o1-06 0 or 1 0 No A 517H –
Selection*2 1: Below the active monitor the 2
monitors specified by o1-07 and
o1-08 are locked
Selects the monitor that is dis-
2nd Monitor
o1-07 played and locked in the second 1 to 53 2 No A 518H –
Selection*2
line of the operator display.
5-36
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Selects the monitor that is dis-
3rd Monitor
o1-08 played and locked in the third line 1 to 53 3 No A 519H –
Selection*2
of the operator display.
Sets the unit display for the fre-
Frequency refer-
quency reference related monitors
o1-09 ence display unit 0 to 11 0 No A 619H 6-111
when o1-03 P 40. Refer to o1-09
selection*2
Settings for the setting range.
*1. Parameter function is only valid if the LED Digital Operator is used.
*2. Parameter function is only valid if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used (LCD or HOA Digital Operator).
o1-09 Settings
Setting
Value
8 Bar: Bar Bar
9 Pa: Pascal Pa
11 Mtr: Meters Mtr
5-37
Multi-function Selections: o2
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Enables/disables the LOCAL/
LOCAL/ REMOTE key
0: Disabled
o2-01 REMOTE key 0 or 1 1 No A 505H 6-112
1: Enabled (Switches between the
enable/disable*1 Digital Operator and the param-
eter settings b1-01, b1-02.)
Enables/disables the STOP key
0: Disabled (When the run com-
STOP key during
mand is issued from an external
control circuit
o2-02 terminal, the Stop key is dis- 0 or 1 1 No A 506H 6-112
terminal opera-
*1 abled.)
tion
1: Enabled (Effective even during
run.)
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stored/not set
1: Begins storing
(Records the set parameters as
user initial values.)
User parameter
o2-03 2: Clearing memory (Clears all 0 to 2 0 No A 507H 6-112
initial value
recorded user initial values)
When the set parameters are
recorded as user initial values,
1110 can be set in A1-03 to recall
them.
Do not set unless after replacing
o2-04 kVA selection the control board. (Refer to page 5- 0 to FF 0*2 No A 508H 5-47
47 for the setting values)
When the frequency reference is
set on the Digital Operator fre-
Frequency refer- quency reference monitor, sets
o2-05 ence setting whether the Enter key is necessary 0 or 1 0 No A 509H 6-112
method selection or not.
0: Enter key needed
1: Enter key not needed
Sets the operation when the Digital
Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation continues
Operation selec-
even if the Digital Operator is
tion when digital
o2-06 disconnected.) 0 or 1 0 No A 50AH 6-112
operator is dis-
1: Enabled (OPR is detected at
connected
Digital Operator disconnection.
Inverter output is switched off,
and fault relay is operated.)
Sets the cumulative operation time.
Cumulative oper- 0 to
o2-07 The operation time is accumulated 0 hrs No A 50BH 6-112
ation time setting 65535
form the set value.
Cumulative oper- 0: Accumulated Inverter power on
o2-08 ation time selec- time 0 or 1 1 No A 50CH 6-112
tion 1: Accumulated Inverter run time.
2: Europe Spec.
o2-09 Initialize Mode 5: PV-E Spec. 2, 5, 6 2 No A 50DH -
6: Chinese Spec.
5-38
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
Sets the initial value of the fan
Fan operation operation time. 0 to
o2-10 0 hr. No A 50EH 6-112
time setting The fan operation time is accumu- 65535
lated from the set value.
0: No change
Fault trace initial-
o2-12 1: Initialized. After setting ”1“ o2- 0 or 1 0 No A 511H 6-112
ize
12 will return to ”0“
Resets the monitor parameters
kWh monitor ini- U1-29 and U1-30 back to zero.
o2-14 0 or 1 0 No A 512H 6-112
tialize 0: No change
1: Reset to zero
If set to 0 the HAND key on the
HOA Digital Operator is disabled
HAND Key func- and the Inverter will not enter the
o2-15 HAND mode and start to run when 0 or 1 0 No A 513H 6-113
tion selection*3 the HAND key is pressed.
0: HAND key disabled
1: HAND key enabled
Selects whether the Inverter is in
standard (IP00 or NEMA 1 / IP20)
Standard / IP54 *4 *5
o2-17 or IP54 protection class. 0 or 1 No 51BH 6-113
Selection
0: IP00 or NEMA 1 / IP20
1: IP54
*1. This parameter is effective only when the LED or LCD Digital Operator is used.
*3. This parameter is effective only when the HOA operator JVOP-162 is used.
*4. Factory setting depends on the protection class of the Inverter.
*5. The access level depends on the setting of o2-09: When o2-09 is set to “2” or “5” parameter o2-17 is accessable.
Copy Function: o3
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0: Normal operation
Copy function 1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
o3-01 0 to 3 0 No A 515H 6-113
selection 2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
Read permission 0: READ prohibited
o3-02 0 or 1 0 No A 516H 6-113
selection 1: READ permitted
5-39
Motor Autotuning: T
Change
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
tion
0.40
Motor output Set the output power of the motor 0.00 to
T1-02 kW No A 702H 4-7
power in Kilowatts. 650.00
*1
Motor rated cur- Set the rated current of the motor in 0.32 to 1.90 A
T1-04 No A 704H 4-7
rent Amps. 6.40 *2 *1
5-40
Monitor Parameters: U
Status Monitor Parameters: U1

Param- MEMO-
Output Signal Level During Multi- Min.
eter Name Description BUS
Function Analog Output Unit
Number Register
Frequency refer- Monitors/sets the frequency ref- 0.01
U1-01 10 V: Max. frequency 40H
ence erence value.*1 Hz
0.01
U1-02 Output frequency Monitors the output frequency.*1 10 V: Max. frequency 41H
Hz
10 V: Inverter rated output 0.01

U1-03 Output current Monitors the output current. 42H
current A
Monitors the output voltage 0.1

U1-06 Output voltage 10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC) 45H
reference. V
U1-07 DC bus voltage Monitors the DC bus voltage. 10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC) 1V 46H
10 V: Inverter capacity
0.1
U1-08 Output power Monitors the output power. (max. applicable motor 47H
kW
capacity)
Shows input ON/OFF status.
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON
1: REV command
(S2) is ON
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON
Input terminal 1: Multi input 2
U1-10 (S4) is ON (Cannot be output.) – 49H
status
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON
Shows output ON/OFF status.

1: Multi-function
digital output 1
(M1-M2) is ON
1: Multi-function
Output terminal digital output 2
U1-11 (Cannot be output.) – 4AH
status (M3-M4) is ON
Not used
(Always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/MB-MC) is
ON
Inverter operating status.

1: Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
U1-12 Operation status 1: Speed agree (Cannot be output.) – 4BH
1: Inverter ready
1: Minor fault
1: Major fault
5-41
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
Monitors the total operating time
of the Inverter.
Cumulative oper- 1
U1-13 The initial value and the operat- (Cannot be output.) 4CH
ation time hr.
ing time/power ON time selection
can be set in o2-07 and o2-08.
Software No.
U1-14 (Manufacturer’s ID number) (Cannot be output.) – 4DH
(flash memory)
Monitors the input level of analog
Terminal A1
U1-15 input A1. A value of 100% equals 10 V: 100% 0.1% 4EH
input level
10V input.
Monitors the input level of analog
Terminal A2
U1-16 input A2. A value of 100% equals 10 V/20mA: 100% 0.1% 4FH
input level
10V/20mA input.
Monitors the calculated value of
Motor secondary the motor secondary current.
U1-18 10 V:Motor rated current 0.1% 51H
current (Iq) The motor rated current corre-
sponds to 100%.
Monitors the frequency reference
Output fre-
after the soft starter.
quency after soft- 0.01
U1-20 This frequency value does not 10 V: Max. frequency 53H
starter (SFS out- Hz
include compensations, such as
put)
slip compensation.*1
PI feedback Monitors the feedback value 0.01
U1-24 10 V: 100% feedback value 57H
value*2 when PI control is used.*3 %
Software No.
U1-28 (CPU software No.) (Cannot be output.) – 5BH
(CPU)
Monitors the 4 lower digits, kWh 1
U1-29 kWh display (Cannot be output.) 5CH
display. kWh
0.1
Monitors the 5 higher digits,
U1-30 MWh display (Cannot be output.) MW 5DH
MWh display.
h
For testing LEDs on operator. If
this monitor is selected, all
U1-31 LED Test (Cannot be output.) – 3CH
LED’s light up (only on LED
operator).
OPE fault param- Shows the first parameter number
U1-34 (Cannot be output.) – 61H
eter when an OPE fault is detected.
0.01
U1-36 PI input volume PI input volume 10 V: 100% PI input 63H
%
0.01
U1-37 PI output volume PI control output 10 V: 100% PI output 64H
%
0.01
U1-38 PI setpoint*2 PI setpoint*3 10 V: 100% PI setpoint 65H
%
5-42
Param- MEMO-
Number Register
Shows MEMOBUS errors.
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used
(always 0)
1: Parity error
MEMOBUS
U1-39 communications 1: Overrun error
(Cannot be output.) – 66H
error code
1: Framing error
1: Timeout
Not used
(always 0)
Monitors the total operating time

Cooling fan oper- 1
U1-40 of the cooling fan. The time can (Cannot be output.) 68H
ating time hr.
be set in o2-10.
Frequency refer- Monitors the value of the fre-
0.01
U1-51 ence at AUTO quency reference when AUTO 10 V: Max. frequency 72H
%
operation operation is active.
Frequency refer- Monitors the value of the fre-
0.01
U1-52 ence at HAND quency reference when HAND 10 V: Max. frequency 73H
%
operation operation is active.
Monitors the feedback value of
0.01
U1-53 PI feedback 2 the PI fdbk2 input when Differen- 10V: 100% feedback value 74H
%
tial PI is selected (H3- =6B)
*1. The monitor parameter can be scaled in o1-03, the unit can be set in o1-09.
*2. The monitor parameters will be moved up to 2nd and 3rd position when the PI controller is enabled.
*3. The monitor parameter can be scaled in b5-20, the unit can be set in b5-31.
5-43
Fault Trace: U2
Param- Output Signal Level During MEMO-
Min.
eter Name Description Multi-Function Analog Out- BUS
Unit
Number put Register
U2-01 Current fault The content of the current fault. – 80H
U2-02 Last fault The error content of the last fault. – 81H
Reference frequency at The reference frequency when the 0.01

U2-03 82H
fault last fault occurred. Hz
The output frequency when the last 0.01

U2-04 Output frequency at fault 83H
fault occurred. Hz
The output current when the last fault 0.01

U2-05 Output current at fault 84H
occurred. A
Output voltage reference at The output reference voltage when 0.1

U2-07 86H
fault the last fault occurred. V
The DC bus voltage when the last (Cannot be output.)

U2-08 DC bus voltage at fault 1V 87H
fault occurred.
The output power when the last fault 0.1

U2-09 Output power at fault 88H
occurred. kW
The input terminal status when the
Input terminal status at
U2-11 last fault occurred. – 8AH
fault
The format is the same as for U1-10.
The output terminal status when the
Output terminal status at
U2-12 last fault occurred. The format is the – 8BH
fault
same as for U1-11.
The operating status when the last
U2-13 Operation status at fault fault occurred. The format is the same – 8CH
as for U1-12.
Cumulative operation time The operating time when the last fault 1
U2-14 8DH
at fault occurred. hr.
Note: The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-44
Fault History: U3
Param- MEMO-
Output Signal Level During Min.
Multi-Function Analog Output Unit
Number Register
U3-01 Last fault The error content of 1st last fault. – 90H
The error content of 2nd last
U3-02 Second last fault – 91H
fault.
U3-03 Third last fault The error content of 3rd last fault. – 92H
U3-04 Fourth last fault The error content of 4th last fault. – 93H
Cumulative operation time The total operating time when the 1
U3-05 94H
at fault 1st previous fault occurred. hr.
Accumulated time of sec- The total operating time when the 1
U3-06 95H
ond fault 2nd previous fault occurred. hr.
Accumulated time of third The total operating time when the 1
U3-07 96H
fault 3rd previous fault occurred. hr.
(Cannot be output.)
Accumulated time of The total operating time when the 1
U3-08 97H
fourth/oldest fault 4th previous fault occurred. hr.
804
805H
U3-09
The error content of the 5th to 806H
– Fifth last to tenth last fault –
10th last fault 807H
U3-14
808H
809H
806H
80FH
U3-15
Accumulated time of fifth Total generating time when 5th... 810H
– 1hr
to tenth fault 10th previous fault occurred 811H
U3-20
812H
813H
Note:The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-45
Setting Values that Change with the V/f Pattern Selection (E1-03)
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW

Parameter
Unit Factory Setting
Number
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F FF
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 50.0 50.0
E1-05
*1 V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0
E1-07
*1 Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5
E1-08
*1 V 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 19.0 24.0 19.0 24.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 12.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.2 1.2
E1-10
*1 V 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 8.0 9.0 11.0 13.0 11.0 15.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 6.0
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW

Parameter
Number
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F FF
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 50.0 50.0
E1-05
*1 V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0
E1-07
*1 Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5
E1-08
*1 V 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 18.0 23.0 18.0 23.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 15.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.2 1.2
E1-10
*1 V 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 9.0 13.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 9.0
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW

Parameter
Number
E1-03 - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F FF
E1-04 Hz 50.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 90.0 120.0 180.0 50.0 50.0
E1-05
*1 V 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06 Hz 50.0 60.0 50.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 50.0 50.0
E1-07
*1 Hz 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.5 2.5
E1-08
*1 V 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 35.0 50.0 35.0 50.0 15.0 20.0 15.0 20.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 12.0 14.0
E1-09 Hz 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.2 1.2
E1-10
*1 V 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 9.0 7.0 11.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 7.0
5-46
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
200 V Class Inverters

Param-
eter Name Unit Factory Setting
Number
– Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection – 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient – 288.20 223.70 169.40 156.80 122.90 94.75 72.69 70.44 63.13
Carrier frequency Normal Duty 1 – 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
C6-02
selection*1 Normal Duty 2 – 4 4 4 3 4 6 6 3 4
E2-01 Motor rated current A 1.90 3.30 6.20 8.50 14.00 19.60 26.60 39.7 53.0
E2-03 Motor no-load current A 1.20 1.80 2.80 3.00 4.50 5.10 8.00 11.2 15.2
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance W 9.842 5.156 1.997 1.601 0.771 0.399 0.288 0.230 0.138
Momentary power loss ride through
L2-02 sec. 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0
time
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time sec. 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
L2-04 Voltage recovery time sec. 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
L8-06 Input phase loss detection level % 5.0 7.5 10.0 12.0 12.0 10.0 17.0 21.0 17.0
*1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the
factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
Param-
Number
– Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
o2-04 kVA selection – 9 A B C D E F 10 11
Carrier frequency Normal Duty 1 – 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
C6-02
selection*1 Normal Duty 2 – 4 4 4 3 4 6 6 3 4
Momentary power loss ride through
L2-02 sec. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
time
L8-06 Input phase loss detection level % 15.0 24.0 20.0 18.0 20.0 17.0 16.0 18.0 20.0
*1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the
factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
5-47
400 V Class Inverters in Protection Class IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20
Param-
Number
– Inverter Capacity kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15
o2-04 kVA selection – 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient – 576.40 447.40 338.80 313.60 245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
Normal
– 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Carrier frequency Duty 1
C6-02
selection *1 Normal
– 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 3 4
Duty 2
E2-01 Motor rated current A 1.00 1.60 3.10 4.20 7.00 7.00 9.80 13.30 19.9 26.5
E2-03 Motor no-load current A 0.60 0.80 1.40 1.50 2.30 2.30 2.60 4.00 5.6 7.6
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance W 38.198 22.459 10.100 6.495 3.333 3.333 1.595 1.152 0.922 0.550
Momentary power loss ride
L2-02 sec. 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.8 0.8 1.0 2.0
through time
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time sec. 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
L2-04 Voltage recovery time sec. 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
L8-06 Input phase loss detection % 5.0 7.5 10.0 10.0 12.0 10.0 10.0 20.0 23.0 17.0
*1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than
the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
Parame-
ter Num- Name Unit Factory Setting
ber
– Inverter Capacity kW 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
o2-04 kVA selection – 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient – 115.74 103.58 92.54 76.32 71.56 67.20 46.20 41.22 36.23 33.18
Normal
– 6 6 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 2
Carrier frequency Duty 1
C6-02
selection *1 Normal
– 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2
Duty 2
E2-01 Motor rated current A 32.9 38.6 52.3 65.6 79.7 95.0 130.0 156.0 190.0 223.0
E2-03 Motor no-load current A 7.8 9.2 10.9 19.1 22.0 24.0 36.0 40.0 49.0 58.0
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance W 0.403 0.316 0.269 0.155 0.122 0.088 0.092 0.056 0.046 0.035
L2-02 sec. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
through time
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time sec. 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.7 1.7
L2-04 Voltage recovery time sec. 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 95 95 95 95 95 100 95 110 110 110
L8-06 Input phase loss detection % 17.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
5-48
Parame-
ber
– Inverter Capacity kW 160 185 220 300
o2-04 kVA selection – 34 35 36 37
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient – 30.13 30.57 27.13 21.76
Carrier frequency Normal Duty 1 – 2 2 1 1
C6-02
selection *1 Normal Duty 2 – 2 1 1 1
E2-01 Motor rated current A 270.0 310.0 370.0 500.0
E2-03 Motor no-load current A 70.0 81.0 96.0 130.0
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance W 0.029 0.025 0.020 0.014
L2-02 Momentary power loss ride through time sec. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time sec. 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1
L2-04 Voltage recovery time sec. 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level °C 108 95 100 108
L8-06 Input phase loss detection level % 14.0 15.0 15.0 15.0
*1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15 kHz. If the carrier
frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 30 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will
need to be reduced.
400 V Class Inverters in Protection Class IP54

Parame-
ber
– Inverter Capacity kW 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
o2-04 kVA selection – 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection *1 – 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

L2-02 sec. 0.8 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
through time
L8-06 Input phase loss detection % 20.0 23.0 17.0 17.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
5-49
5-50
6
Parameter Settings by
Function
Carrier Frequency Selection ..............................................6-2
Frequency Reference ........................................................6-5
Run Command...................................................................6-9
Stopping Methods ............................................................6-11
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ................6-15
Adjusting Frequency References.....................................6-21
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function).........6-24
Frequency Detection........................................................6-25
Improved Operating Performance....................................6-27
Machine Protection ..........................................................6-29
Automatic Restart ............................................................6-38
Inverter Protection............................................................6-47
Input Terminal Functions .................................................6-52
Output Terminal Functions...............................................6-64
Monitor Parameters .........................................................6-67
Individual Functions .........................................................6-69
Digital Operator Functions .............................................6-110
Carrier Frequency Selection
Setting the Carrier Frequency

Using the following parameters the carrier frequency setting can be fitted to the applications requirements.
Related Parameters
Changes
Parameter Setting Factory Access
Name During
No. Range Setting Level
Operation?
C6-01 Normal duty selection 1 or 2 1 No A
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection 0 to F 6*1 No A
2.0 to
15.0 kHz
C6-03 Carrier frequency upper limit 15.0 *1 No A
*2 *3
0.4 to
15.0 kHz
C6-04 Carrier frequency lower limit 15.0 *1 No A
*2*3
00 to 99
C6-05 Carrier frequency proportional gain *3 00 No A

*2. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity.
*3. This parameter can only be set when C6-02 is set to F.
Carrier Frequency, Current Derating and Overload Capability in Normal Duty 1 and 2
The Inverter overload capability depends among other things on the carrier frequency setting. If the carrier fre-
quency setting is higher than the factory setting, the overload current capability must be reduced.
Further, Normal Duty 2 enables a higher continuous output current before the Inverter overload calculation is
started.
Inverters in Protection Class IP00 and IP20 / NEMA 1 and Normal Duty 1
In Normal Duty 1 the default carrier frequency depends on the Inverter capacity. With the default setting the
overload capability is 120% of the rated output current for 1 minute. If the carrier frequency is set to a higher
value, the overload capability is reduced as shown in Fig 6.1.
200V Class 37 to 90kW 200V Class 0.4 to 22kW
400V Class 75 to 110kW 400V Class 0.4 to 22kW
120%
96%
90%
400V Class 132kW
Output Current for 1 min.
200V Class 30kW

400V Class 30 to 55kW
400V Class 160kW
Carrier Freq.
0
5kHz 8kHz 10kHz 15kHz
Fig 6.1 Overload Capability depending on Carrier Frequency (IP00 and IP20 / NEMA 1) in Normal Duty 1
6-2
Inverters in Protection Class IP00 and IP20 / NEMA 1 and Normal Duty 2
In the Normal Duty 2 mode the maximum carrier frequency is decreased compared to the Normal Duty 1
mode but the short term overload capability is increased. No further increase of the carrier frequency is possi-
ble. Refer to Fig 6.2 for the overload capability of both modes and to page 5-47, Factory Settings that Change
with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) for the carrier frequency default settings in Normal Duty 2
100
Inverter Overload Detection Time [min]
10
0.1
100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
Overload Level [%]
Normal Duty 1 Normal Duty 2
Fig 6.2 Normal Duty 1 and 2 Inverter Overload Detection Curve
Inverters in Protection Class IP54

The default carrier frequency setting is 5kHz for all Inverters in protection class IP54. If the carrier frequency
is set to a higher value than the factory setting, the overload capability is reduced as shown in Fig 6.3. For
IP54 Inverters the setting Heavy Duty 2 is not available.
120%
400V class 22 to 55kW (IP54)
Overload Current for 1 Minute
96%
400V class 7.5kW to 18.5kW (IP54)
72%
5 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz

Carrier Frequency
Fig 6.3 Overload Capability depending on Carrier Frequency (IP54)
6-3
Setting Precautions

When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions:
• If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.
Wiring Length 50 m or less 100 m or less Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency)
0 to 6 (15 kHz) 0 to 4 (10 kHz) 0 to 2 (5 kHz)
setting
• If speed and torque oscillate at low speeds: Decrease the carrier frequency.
• If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices: Decrease the carrier frequency.
• If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Decrease the carrier frequency.
• If metallic noise from the motor is large: Increase the carrier frequency.
• The carrier frequency can be set to vary depending on the output frequency as shown in the following dia-
gram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and
C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
Carrier Frequency
C6-03
Output frequency x C6-05 x K

C6-04
Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
Fig 6.4 Carrier Frequency Gain
* K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03.

C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz > C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz > C6-03: K=1
• To fix the carrier frequency to any desired value, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
An OPE11 (Data setting error) will occur in the following cases:
• If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04
• If C6-02 is set from 7 to E.
6-4
Frequency Reference
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source

Set parameter b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Number Range Setting Level
Operation
b1-01 Reference selection 0 to 3 1 No Q
Input the Frequency Reference from the Digital Operator

When b1-01 is set to 0, the frequency reference can be input from the Digital Operator.
For details on setting the frequency reference, refer to Chapter 3, Digital Operator and Modes
-DRIVE- Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01= 0 60.00Hz
(0.00 ~ 60.00)
"0.00Hz"
Fig 6.5 Frequency Setting Display with LED and LCD Digital Operator
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog Setting)

When b1-01 is set to 1, the frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminal A1 (voltage
input), or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only

If inputting the master speed frequency reference only, input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal
A1.
Inverter
2 kΩ
+V (Power supply: 15 V, 20 mA)
2 kΩ A1 (Master frequency reference)
A2 (Auxiliary frequency reference)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.6 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input
6-5
2-Step Switching: Master/Auxiliary
If 2-step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies is performed, input the master speed fre-
quency reference to control circuit terminal A1, and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2.
When terminal S3 (multi-step speed command 1) is OFF, terminal A1 input (master speed frequency refer-
ence) will be the Inverter frequency reference, and when terminal S3 is ON, terminal A2 input (auxiliary
speed frequency reference) will be the Inverter frequency reference.
Inverter
S3 Multi-step speed
Master/ command 1
Auxiliary
SN Digital input neutral
2 kΩ
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA)
2 kΩ
A1 (Master frequency
0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V input reference)
input
A2 (Auxiliary frequency
reference)
2 kΩ AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.7 Master/Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input
Setting Precautions
When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2, turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 to switch to voltage input
(factory setting is ON).
Inputting Frequency Reference Using Current

When b1-01 is set to 1, the frequency reference can be input from control circuit terminal A2. Input the current
(4 to 20 mA) in control circuit terminal A2.
When H3-09 (Multi-Function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set to 0 (factory setting) the
input on A2 is added to A1.
Inverter
+V (Power supply: 15 V,
A1(Auxiliary frequency
4 to 20 mA
A2(Master frequency
AC (Analog common)
DIP switch S1
Fig 6.8 Frequency Reference Using Current
Setting Precautions
• When inputting a current signal to terminal A2, turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 (factory setting: ON).
• If using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency
reference, set H3-13 (Terminal A1/A2 Switching) to 1.
6-6
Frequency Reference
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation

With Varispeed E7 series Inverters the speed can be changed in a maximum of 5 steps, using 4 multi-step fre-
quency references and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 5-step operation using multi-step
references 1 and 2 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Parameters
To switch frequency references, set multi-step references 1 and 2 and the jog reference selection in the multi-
function digital inputs.
Multi-function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-04)

Parameter
Terminal Set Value Details
Number
Multi-step speed command 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed
S5 H1-03 3 switching when multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 2 (auxiliary
frequency reference).)
S6 H1-04 4 Multi-step speed command 2
S7 H1-05 6 Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed command)
Combining Multi-Step Speed References and Multi-Function Digital Inputs

The frequency reference can be changed by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 to S6 (multi-function digital
input terminals). The following table shows the possible combinations.
Terminal S5 Terminal S6 Terminal S7
Speed Multi-step Speed Multi-step Speed Jog Frequency Selected Frequency
Command 1 Command 2 Selection
1 OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference 1, d1-01, master speed frequency
2 ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 2, d1-02, auxiliary frequency
3 OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 3, d1-03
4 ON ON OFF Frequency reference 4, d1-04
5 – – *1 Jog frequency d1-17
ON
*1. Terminal S6's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed commands.
Setting Precautions
When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2, observe the following precautions.
• When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1 set b1-01 to 1, when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference
1) to step 1 set b1-01 to 0.
• When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 2 set H3-09 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference). When
setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2 set H3-09 to 1F (do not use analog inputs).
6-7
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step
operation.
Inverter
Forward/stop
Reverse/stop
Fault reset
Multi-step command 1
Multi-step command 2
Jog frequency
External fault
Fig 6.9 Control Circuit Terminal During 5-step Operation
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency Frequency
reference reference 3
Frequency
reference 2
Frequency
reference 1 Jog frequency
Forward/stop OFF
ON
Multi-step speed
command 1 OFF ON
Multi-step speed
command 2 OFF ON
Jog frequency selection OFF ON
Fig 6.10 Multi-step speed command/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
Note:
• The multifunction input setting “Jog Frequency 2” (69) can be used for jog frequency selection when a
3-wire control is used for the control circuit. If it is selected while the inverter is initialized to 2-wire con-
trol an OPE03 alarm will be displayed.
6-8
Run Command
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the run command.
Selecting the Run Command Source

Set parameter b1-02 to select the source for the run command.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
b1-02 Operation method selection 0 to 3 1 No Q
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator

When b1-02 is set to 0, the Inverter can be operated using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP, and FWD/
REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3, Digital Operator and Modes.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals

When b1-02 is set to 1, Inverter operation can be performed using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Control

The factory setting is set to a 2-wire control. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation
will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit
terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter will
stop.
Inverter
Forward/Stop
Reverse/Stop
Fig 6.11 2-Wire Control Wiring Example with Positive Logic
6-9
Performing Operations Using 3-Wire Control
When any parameter from H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7) is set to 0, termi-
nals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire control, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set to 0 works
as a forward/reverse selection command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input termi-
nal for the forward/reverse run command.
Stop switch Operation switch
(NC contact) (NO contact)
Run command (operates when ON)
Stop command (stopped when ON)
Forward/reverse command (multi-function input)

SN
Digital input neutral
Fig 6.12 3-Wire Control Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Run command Can be either ON or OFF
OFF
Stop command (stopped)
OFF (forward) ON (reverse)
Forward/reverse command
Motor speed
Stop Forward Reverse Stop Forward
Fig 6.13 Three-wire Control Time Chart
Use a control circuit that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command. This will make
NOTE the run command self-holding in the Inverter.
6-10
Stopping Methods
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input

There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer
Set parameter b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
b1-03 Stopping method selection 0 to 3 0 No Q
Zero speed level (DC injection braking starting fre- 0.0 to
b2-01 0.5 Hz No A
quency) 10.0
0 to
b2-02 DC injection braking current 50% No A
100
0.00
b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop to 0.50 sec. No A
10.00
6-11
Deceleration to Stop
If the stop command is input (the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to
stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1)).
If the output frequency when decelerating to stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-15, Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.
Run Command ON OFF
Output Decelerates to stop using the

Frequency active deceleration time DC injection brake
DC injection brake
time at stop (b2-04)
Fig 6.14 Deceleration to Stop
Coast to Stop
If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output
voltage is switched off. The motor coasts to stop.
Run command
ON OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output frequency
interrupted
Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop
After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time
NOTE (L2-03) has elapsed.
DC Braking Stop
After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time (L2-03) has elapsed, DC injection will be
applied to the motor. The applied DC injection current is programmed in parameter b2-02. The DC injection
brake time depends on the set value of b2-04 and on the output frequency at the moment the stop command is
input.If the output frequency was higher than 10% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04) the DC injection
time is lengthened like shown in the figure below.
DC injection brake time
Run command
ON OFF b2-04 x 10
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
b2-04
Minimum baseblock DC injection brake time Output frequency at
time (L2-03) stop command input
10% 100% (maximum output frequency
Fig 6.16 DC Injection Braking Stop
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
NOTE
6-12
Stopping Methods
Coast to Stop with Timer

If the stop command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output
is switched off so that the motor coasts to stop. After the stop command is input, run commands are ignored
until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends on the output frequency when the stop command is input and
on the deceleration time.
Operation wait time T
Run command
Deceleration time
Output frequency (e.g., C1-02)
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Minimum baseblock
Operation wait time T Output frequency at
time (L2-03)
stop command input
Minimum output frequency 100% (Maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.17 Coast to Stop with Timer
Using the DC Injection Brake

Set parameter b2-03 to apply DC injection to the motor, before it starts to accelerate. Applying DC injection at
start will stop the motor before starting if it was coasting through inertia or wind mill effect.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set parameter b2-04 to apply a DC injection brake to the motor at stopping. It prevents the motor from coast-
ing when it would not be stopped completely using the normal deceleration. This can occur if the inertia is
very high. The DC injection brake can be disabled by setting b2-04 to 0.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.0 to
b2-01 DC injection braking starting frequency 0.5 Hz No A
10.0
0 to
b2-02 DC injection braking current 50% No A
100
0.00
b2-03 DC injection braking time at start to 0.00 sec. No A
10.00
0.00 to
b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop 0.50 sec. No A
10.0
6-13
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to H1-05) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to stop using
the deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, use setting 15, and if
inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, use setting 17.
After the emergency stop command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command.
Related parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.0 to
C1-09 Emergency stop time 10.0 sec. No A
6000.0
6-14
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times

Acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 0% to 100% of the maximum out-
put frequency (E1-04). Deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from 100% to
0% of (E1-04). The accel./decel. times 1 are used with the factory setting, the accel./decel. times 2 can be
selected using a multifunction input.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 Yes Q
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 0.0 to Yes Q
10.0 sec.
C1-03 Acceleration time 2 6000.0 Yes A
C1-04 Deceleration time 2 Yes A
0.0 to
C1-11 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency 0.0 Hz No A
200.0
0.00 to
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start 0.20 sec. No A
2.50
0.00 to
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end 0.20 sec. No A
2.50
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal

Commands
Two different acceleration times and deceleration times can be set. When one multi-function input terminal
(H1- ) is set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1), the acceleration/deceleration time can even
be switched during operation by changing the ON/OFF status of this terminal.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Acceleration Time Deceleration Time
Selection 1 Terminal
OFF C1-01 C1-02
ON C1-03 C1-04
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically

Use this setting when the acceleration/deceleration time should be switched automatically depending on the
output frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
6-15
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration time
switching frequency
(C1-11)
C1-03 C1-01 C1-02 C1-04

When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency < C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 2 (C1-03, C1-04).
Fig 6.18 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time

By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, shock at start and stop of the machine
can be reduced
Two S-curve characteristic times can be set: At acceleration start and at acceleration end. For deceleration
start and end the S-curve times are fixed to 0.2 sec.
When S-curve is set, calculate acceleration/deceleration time as follows:

C2-01 + C2-02
Accel.Time = ------------------------------------ + C1-01/03
NOTE 2
Decel. Time = 0.2 sec + C1-02/04
6-16
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
Output frequency
Fig 6.19 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration

(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied
to the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If L3-01 is set to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current reaches 85 % of the set value in L3-02, the accel-
eration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, the acceleration will stop.
If L3-01 is set to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor accelerates so that the current is held at a level of 50 % of
the inverter rated current. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L3-01 Stall prevention selection during acceleration 0 to 2 1 No A
L3-02 Stall prevention level during acceleration 0 to 200 120% No A
6-17
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during

L3-02 acceleration
85% of
L3-02
Time
Output frequency
*1 *2 *3
*1 The acceleration rate is lowered
*2 The acceleration rate is stopped to reduce the output current
*3 The acceleration is restarted
Time
Fig 6.20 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or if the inverter is operated using the fac-
tory settings and the motor stalls, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the field weakening range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling. It
will be reduced to a fixed value of 50 % of the inverter rated current.
• Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100%.
Stall Prevention Level
during Acceleration
L3-02
50% of inverter
rated current
E1-06 Output frequency

Base Frequency (FA)
Fig 6.21 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
6-18
Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function

This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the DC-bus voltage to avoid over-
voltage tripping.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
155 to 200
E1-01 Input voltage setting No Q
255*1 VDC*1
Stall prevention selection during deceleration func-
L3-04 0 to 2 1 No A
tion selection
*1. Value for 200 V class Inverters are shown. For a 400 V class inverter the values have to be doubled.
Setting the Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration (L3-04)

There are four different settings selectable for L3-04.
L3-04=0: This setting disables the stall prevention function during deceleration. The motor will be decelerated
using the time set in C1-02 (C1-04). If the load inertia is very high and an OV fault occurs during deceleration
a braking option has to be used or the deceleration time has to be lengthened.
L3-04=1: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The inverter tries to decelerate within
the set deceleration time. It also observes the DC bus voltage. If the DC bus voltage reaches the stall preven-
tion level the deceleration is stopped and the output frequency is held. When the DC bus voltage falls below
the stall prevention level the deceleration will be continued.
L3-04=2: This setting enables the stall prevention during deceleration. The deceleration time set as C1- is
taken as reference. The function automatically tries to optimize the deceleration time by observing the DC bus
voltage and shortening the deceleration time. The function does not lengthen the deceleration time, i.e. if C1-
is set too short OV may occur.
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 is shown below.
Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to

prevent overvoltage
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.22 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
6-19
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and input
voltage. Refer to the following table for details.
Inverter Rated/Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration

200 V class 380 VDC
E1-01 ≥ 400 V 760 VDC
400 V class
E1-01 < 400 V 660 VDC
• When using a braking option, be sure to set parameter L3-04 to 0.
6-20
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Analog Frequency References

The analog reference values can be adjusted using the gain and bias functions for the analog inputs.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.0 to
H3-02 Frequency reference terminal A1 input gain 100.0% Yes A
1000.0
-100.0
H3-03 Frequency reference terminal A1 input bias 0.0% Yes A
to +100.0
H3-08 Multi-function analog A2 signal level selection 0, 2, 3 2*1 No A*2
H3-09 Multi-function analog A2 function selection 0 to 16 0 No A*2
0.0 to
H3-10 Multi-function analog A2 input gain 100.0% Yes A
1000.0
-100.0
H3-11 Multi-function analog A2 input bias 0.0% Yes A
to +100.0
0.00 to
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant 0.30 sec. No A
2.00
H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching 0 or 1 0 No A*2
*1. The setting is automatically switched to “B” when the PI controller is enabled
*2. Parameter is moved to Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled.
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters

The frequency reference can be input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage or current signals
(analog input A2 only).
The input signal levels can be selected using
• H3-01 for the analog input A1
• H3-08 for the analog input A2
Adjustments to the signals can be made using:
• H3-02 (Gain) and H3-03 (Bias) if analog input A1 is selected to be the frequency reference input
• H3-10 (Gain) and H3-11 (Bias) if analog input A2 is selected to be the frequency reference input
Refer to Fig 6.23 for adjusting the signal using the gain and bias functions.
Frequency reference Frequency reference
Terminal A1 Terminal A2 input

input voltage voltage (current)
0V (4 mA/0 mA)
Terminal A1 input Terminal A2 input
Fig 6.23 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
6-21
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
Frequency Bias (Setting: 0)

When parameter H3-09 is set to 0 (Frequency Bias), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input voltage
is added to the analog master frequency input at terminal A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
Multi-function analog input

terminal A2 input level
0V (4 mA/0 mA)
Fig 6.24 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference when 0 V
is input to A1 will be 10% of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
Frequency reference
H3-02
10 %
Bias
0V 10 V Terminal A1 input voltage
Fig 6.25 Example Operation for Frequency Bias via Terminal A2
Frequency Bias 2 (Setting: D)

In contrary to the frequency bias function (H3-09=0) the frequency bias 2 function adds the analog bias value
to any master frequency value, either from the analog input, MEMOBUS communication or option boards.
The bias value is not applied to multi-step speed references using the d1- parameters.
Setting Precautions
• When the PI controller is enabled the function setting for analog input A2 is automatically switched to PI
feedback.
• If the Master Frequency Reference has to be input with a current signal (0/4 to 20 mA) the functionality of
analog input A1 and A2 can be exchanged using parameter H3-13.
• If the analog input A2 is used with a current signal ensure the proper setting of switch S1. Refer to page 2-
32, Switch S1 - Standard Terminal Board.
• In case a voltage reference signal is noisy a analog input filter time can be adjusted. By default a filter time
of 0.3 sec. is set.
6-22
Jump Frequency Function (Operation Avoiding Resonance)

• This function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of certain frequencies within the Inverter’s output fre-
quency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems.
• It can also be used for deadband control.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
d3-01 Jump frequency 1 0.0 Hz No A
0.0 to
200.0
0.0 to
d3-04 Jump frequency width 1.0 Hz No A
20.0
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
Output frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency
width d3-04
Frequency reference ascending
Jump frequency
width d3-04
Jump frequency
width d3-04
Jump frequency reference

Jump Jump Jump
frequency 3 frequency 2 frequency 1
(d3-03) (d3-02) (d3-01)
Fig 6.26 Jump Frequency
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequencies according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03.
• When parameters d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
6-23
Speed Limit
(Frequency Reference Limit Function)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency

If the motor should not rotate above a given frequency, use parameter d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the frequency reference as a percentage, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Fre-
quency) to be 100%.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.0 to
d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit 100.0% No A
110.0
Limiting Minimum Frequency

If the motor should not rotate below a given frequency, use parameters d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multi-
step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.0 to
d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit 0.0% No A
110.0
0.0 to
d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit 0.0% No A
110.0
6-24
Frequency Detection
Frequency Detection
Speed Agreement Function

There are four different types of frequency detection methods available. The digital multifunction outputs M1
to M4 can be programmed for this function and can be used to indicate a frequency detection or agreement to
any external equipment.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.0 to
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level 0.0 Hz No A
200.0
0.0 to
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width 2.0 Hz No A
20.0
• With L4-01 an absolute speed agreement level is set, i.e. a speed agreement is detected in both directions
(FWD and REV).
Multifunction Output Settings: H2-01 to H2-02

(M1 – M4 function selection)
The table below shows the necessary H2-01 and H2-02 parameter setting for each of the speed agreement
functions.
Set Value Function
2 fref = fout Agree
3 fout = fset Agree
4 Frequency detection 1
5 Frequency detection 2
6-25
Time Charts
The following table shows the time charts for each of the speed agreement functions.
L4-01: Speed Agree Level

Related parameter
L4-02: Speed Agree Width
fref = fout Agree
Freq. Ref.
L4-02
Output
Frequency
fref = fout Agree
Freq. Ref.
L4-02
fref = fout Agree OFF ON
(Multi-function output setting = 2)
fout = fset Agree

(ON at the following conditions during frequency agree)
L4-02
L4-01
Output
fout = fset Agree Frequency
L4-01
L4-02
fout = fref Agree 1 ON OFF
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1

(L4-01 > | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-01
Output
Frequency
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 1 ON OFF
Frequency (Multi-function output setting = 4)

Detection Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
(L4-01 < | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-01
Output
Frequency
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 2 OFF ON

6-26
Improved Operating Performance
Improved Operating Performance
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Torque Compensation for Sufficient Torque at Start

and Low-speed Operation
The torque compensation function detects a rising motor load, and increases the output torque.
The inverter calculates the motor primary loss voltage and adjusts the output voltage (V) to compensate insuf-
ficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. The compensation voltage is calculated as follows:
Motor primary voltage loss × parameter C4-01.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.00 to
C4-01 Torque compensation gain 1.00 Yes A
2.50
0 to
C4-02 Torque compensation delay time constant 200 msec No A
10000
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01)

Normally, there is no need to change this setting.
Adjust the torque compensation gain under the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity (max. applicable motor capacity), increase the
set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant (C4-02)

Set the torque compensation function primary delay in milliseconds.
Normally, there is no need to change this setting. Adjust the parameter under the following circumstances:
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
6-27
Hunting Prevention Function
The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load.
If high response has the priority to vibration suppression this function should be disabled (n1-01 = 0).
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
n1-01 Hunting prevention function selection 0 or 1 1 No A
0.00 to
n1-02 Hunting prevention gain 1.00 No A
2.50
Adjusting the Hunting Prevention Gain (n1-02)

Normally it is not necessary to change this setting. Adjust the value under the following circumstances:
• If vibrations occur under light load condition increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls reduce the setting.
6-28
Machine Protection
Machine Protection
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation

Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the
motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or disable the stall prevention using parameter L3-05. Set the
according deceleration times using C1-02 (Deceleration time 1) or C1-04 (Deceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 – 2%, the motor will accelerate again to the set fre-
quency.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
Stall prevention selection during running function

L3-05 0 to 2 1 No A
selection
L3-06 Stall prevention level during running 30 to 200 120% No A
6-29
Load Detection
If an excessive load is applied to the machinery (overload) or the load suddenly drops (loss of load), an alarm
signal can be output via one of the output terminal M1-M2 or M3-M4.
To use the load detection function, set B or 17 (overload/loss of load detection NO/NC) in one of the parame-
ter H2-01 and H2-02 (terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection).
The load detection level is set as a current level taking the inverter rated output current as 100%.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L6-01 Torque detection selection 0 to 8 6 No A
L6-02 Torque detection level 0 to 300 15% No A
0.0 to
L6-03 Torque detection time 10.0 sec. No A
10.0
Multi-function Output (H2-01 and H2-02)

Set Value Function
Load detection NO
B
(NO contact: Overload or loss of load detected when output is ON)
Load detection NC
17
(NC contact: Overload or loss of load detected when output is OFF)
6-30
Machine Protection
L6-01 Set Value and Digital Operator Display

The relationship between alarms displayed on the Digital Operator when overload or loss of load is detected
and the setting in L6-01 is shown in the following table.
Operator
Set Inverter
Function Overload/Under-
Value condition
torque Detection 1
0 Load detection disabled – –
Overload detection only at speed agree, the operation is continued, a warning is out-
1 OL3 flashes Alarm
put.
Overload detection continuously during operation, operation continues, a warning is
2 OL3 flashes Alarm
output.
Overload detection only at speed agree, motor coasts to stop, Inverter is in fault condi-
3 OL3 lights up Fault
tion.
Overload detection continuously during operation, motor coasts to stop, Inverter is in
4 OL3 lights up Fault
fault condition.
Loss of load detection only at speed agree, the operation is continued, a warning is
5 LL3 flashes Alarm
output.
Loss of load detection continuously during operation, operation continues, a warning
6 LL3 flashes Alarm
is output.
Loss of load detection only at speed agree, motor coasts to stop, Inverter is in fault
7 LL3 lights up Fault
condition.
Loss of load detection continuously during operation, motor coasts to stop, Inverter is
8 LL3 lights up Fault
in fault condition.
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overload and loss of load detection.
• Overload Detection
Motor current (output torque)
* Overload detection switch off bandwidth is approxi-
mately 10% of the Inverter rated output current.
L6-02
L6-03 L6-03
Load detection 1 NO
Fig 6.27 Example Operation for Overload Detection
6-31
• Loss of Load Detection
Motor current (output torque) * Loss of Load detection switch off bandwidth is approxi-
mately 10% of the Inverter rated output current.
L6-02
L6-03 L6-03
Load Detection NO
Fig 6.28 Example Operation for Loss of Load Detection
6-32
Machine Protection
Motor Overload Protection

The motor can be protected from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay func-
tion (I²t calculation).
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.32 to
1.90 A
E2-01 Motor rated current 6.40 *2 No Q
*1
L1-01 Motor protection selection 0 to 3 1 No A

0.1 to
L1-02 Motor protection time constant 1.0 min No A
5.0
*1. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4kW is given.
*2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter Capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value Function
1F During motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Setting Motor Rated Current (E2-01)

Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in parameters E2-01. This set value is the base current for
the internal thermal overload calculation.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics (L1-01)

Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the application.
Set L1-01 to:
0: to disable the thermal motor protection function.
1: to enable the thermal motor protection for a fan cooled general purpose motor (self-cooled).
2: to enable the thermal motor protection for Inverter motors (forced or externally cooled)
3: to enable the thermal motor protection for a special vector motor (externally cooled).
Application Precautions
• If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 1F the output will stay switched ON as long as the
motor is overloaded. When the motor has been stopped to cool down the output will be switched OFF as
soon as the Inverter’s I² t calculation falls below 90% of the detection level.
• The multi-function digital output programmed to 1F will also switch OFF when the Inverter itself is in
fault condition. The fault has to be reset manually.
6-33
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time (L1-02)
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
The motor protection operation time is the time for that the motor can handle a 150% overload when it was
running with the rated load before (i.e. operating temperature was reached before applying the 150% over-
load). Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02. The factory setting is 60 sec.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 50 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)

(E2-01 is set to 100%)
Fig 6.29 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one inverter, set parameter L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect each of the
motors, use a control circuit that switches off the inverter output when one of the motors overheats.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the motor can-
not be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 (enabled), because the internally calculated ther-
mal value will be reset after inverter power supply switch off.
• For safe overload tripping, set the value in parameter L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4 (fre-
quency). Consequently, a low output frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even
when the output current is below the rated current. If the motor is operated at the rated current at a low fre-
quency, use a special motor which is externally cooled.
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm

To enable the Motor overload pre-alarm enable the motor overload protection function (i.e., L1-01 must be set
to 1) and set H2-01 or H2-02 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2 and M3-M4 function selection) to 1F
(motor overload OL1 pre-alarm). If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload detec-
tion level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the motor cannot be
protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 to 3, because the thermal value will be reset.
6-34
Machine Protection
Motor Overheat Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs

This function provides a motor overheating protection using a thermistor (PTC characteristic – Positive Tem-
perature Coefficient) that is built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L1-03 Alarm operation selection during motor overheating 0 to 3 3 No A
L1-04 Motor overheating operation selection 0 to 2 1 No A
0.00 to
L1-05 Motor temperature input filter time constant 0.20 sec. No A
10.00
PTC Thermistor Characteristics

The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
The shown resistance value is for one motor phase. Normally the 3 resistors (1 for each phase) are connected
in series
Class F Class H
Resistance (Ohms)
Tr: Temperature threshold value
Temperature
Fig 6.30 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
6-35
Operation during Motor Overheating
The operation when the motor overheats can be selected using the parameters L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor
temperature input filter time parameter in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be
displayed on the Digital Operator.
Fault Codes If the Motor Overheats

Fault Code Details
OH3 Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4 Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04. The fault relay is activated
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature
input) the motor temperature can be detected and OH3 respectively OH4 can be output if the motor overheats.
The terminal connections that are to be used are shown in Fig 6.31.
Inverter
Multi-function Multi-function
digital input digital output
Multi-function
digital output
Branch resistance Fault relay output

18 kΩ *1
PTC thermistor
* 1. The resistance value of 18 kΩ is only valid when a 3-phase PTC with the characteristic
shown on the previous page is used.
Fig 6.31 Terminal Connections for Motor Overheating Protection
Setting Precautions
Because this function uses a voltage signal to terminal A2, pin 2 of the DIP-switch S1 on the control terminal
board has to be turned to OFF for A2 voltage input. The factory setting is ON (A2 current input). Refer to
Chapter 2, Switch S1 - Standard Terminal Board.
For the same reason the parameter H3-08 (analog input terminal A2 signal level) has to be set to 0 (0-10V
input).
6-36
Machine Protection
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction and Output Phase Rotation

If the motor reverse rotation is prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted, even if it is input. Use
this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
It is also possible to change the output phase order by changing b1-04 to 2 or 3. This much easier and faster
than changing the wiring if the motor rotational direction is wrong.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation 0 to 3 0 No A
Settings
• Setting 0: Both operation directions are enabled for the Inverter.
• Setting 1: Reverse operation is not enabled, a reverse RUN command is disregarded.
• Setting 2: Both operation directions are enabled, two output phases are exchanged
• Setting 3: Reverse operation is not enabled, a reverse RUN command is disregarded. Additional two out-
put phases are exchanged.
6-37
Automatic Restart
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation after a momentary
power loss.
Restarting Automatically After Momentary Power Loss

After a momentary power loss, the Inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation.
To restart the Inverter after power is recovered, set L2-01 to 1 or 2.
If L2-01 is set to 1, the inverter will restart, when power is recovered within the time set in L2-02. If the power
loss time exceeds the time set in L2-02, an UV1 fault (DC bus undervoltage) will be detected.
If L2-01 is set to 2, the inverter will restart, when the main power supply is recovered as long as the control
power supply (i.e., power supply to the control circuit) is maintained. Consequently, alarm UV1 (DC bus und-
ervoltage) will not be detected. Nevertheless, UV alarm is displayed.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection 0 to 2 0 No A
0.1 sec.
L2-02 Momentary power loss ridethru time 0 to 25.5 *1 No A
0.1 sec.
L2-03 Min. baseblock (BB) time 0.1 to 5.0 *1 No A
0.0 to 0.3 sec.

L2-04 Voltage recovery time *1 No A
5.0
150 to
190 VDC
L2-05 Undervoltage (UV) detection level 210 *2 No A
*2
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4kW is given.
Setting Precautions
• Fault output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, ensure that the RUN command stays ON
during the power loss
• L2-04 sets an acceleration time for the output voltage (from 0 V to normal voltage). After the power sup-
ply has returned the output voltage will be increased to the set value using the time set in L2-04.
• L2-05 sets the level at which UV is detected.
6-38
Automatic Restart
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of a motor that is coasting and then starts smoothly from that
speed. It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2-01 is set to 1 or 2.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
Speed search selection (current detection or speed
b3-01 0 to 3 2 No A
calculation)
0 to
b3-02 Speed search operating current (current detection) 120% No A
200
0.1 to
b3-03 Speed search deceleration time (current detection) 2.0 sec. No A
10.0
Speed search wait time (current detection or speed 0.0 to
b3-05 0.2 sec. No A
calculation) 20.0
b3-14 Bi-directional speed search selection 0 or 1 1 No A
L2-03 Min. baseblock time 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 sec. No A
0.0 to
L2-04 Voltage recovery time
5.0 0.3 sec.*1 No A
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4kW is given.
Multi-function Digital Inputs

Set Value Function
External speed search command 1
OFF: Speed search disabled (Acceleration starts from FMIN)
61
ON: Speed calculation (Calculates the motor speed and starts search from the calculated speed)
Current detection (Starts speed search from maximum output frequency)
OFF: Speed search disabled (Acceleration starts from FMIN)
ON: Speed calculation (Calculates the motor speed and starts search from the calculated speed)
62
(Same operation as external speed search command 1)
Current detection: Starts speed search from set frequency
(reference frequency when speed search command was input).
64 OFF: Inverter is base blocked
ON: Inverter starts operation using speed search (same operation as speed search 2)
6-39
Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function digital terminals, an OPE03
alarm will occur.
• If performing speed search using external search commands ensure that the RUN command and the exter-
nal search command remain both ON.
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contactor, set the contactor operation delay time in the Speed
Search Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 sec. If no contactor is used the setting can be reduced
to 0 sec.
• Parameter b3-02 (current detection level for search completion) is effective only when current detection
speed search is selected. When the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is supposed to
be completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency.
• Parameter b3-03 sets the time the output frequency is reduced during speed search until the actual motor
speed is detected.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search, lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-
03).
• If speed search is only desired in the last known operation direction set b3-14 to 1.
Application Precautions for Speed Calculation Speed Search

• Always perform non-rotating autotuning for line-to-line resistance before using speed searches based on
calculated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance again.
Speed Search Selection

The speed search method can be selected using b3-01. If b3-01 is set to 0 the search method is speed calcula-
tion. It has to be activated by a multi-function input (H1- set to 61 or 62).
If b3-01 is set to 1, the search method is speed calculation too, but speed search is performed at every RUN
command and has not to be activated by a multifunction input.
The same is valid for setting b3-01 to 2 or 3, only the search method is current detection and not speed calcu-
lation.
Search Name Speed Calculation Current Detection

Starts speed search from the last known fre-
Calculates the motor speed at speed search
quency or the maximum output frequency. The
start and accelerates or decelerates from the
Search Method output frequency is decreased until the output
calculated speed to the set frequency. The
current falls below the speed search operating
direction of motor rotation is also detected.
current.
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output
With external speed search command 1and 2
External Speed Search frequency.
the speed calculation is performed and the
Command External speed search command 2:
speed search started from the calculated speed.
Starts speed search from the frequency refer-
ence set before the search command.
Cannot be used with multi-motor drives or
Application The motor may accelerate suddenly with light
with motors two or more sizes smaller than the
Precautions loads.
Inverter capacity.
6-40
Automatic Restart
Examples for Speed Calculation
Search at Startup
The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi-function input terminals is shown
below.
OFF ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03 Set frequency ref-
Run command
erence
Starts using
calculated speed
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
0.7 to 1.0 s *Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.7*
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the run command turns ON in a short
time, the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.32 Speed Search at Startup (Calculated Speed)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
1. Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply ON OFF Set frequency

Start using
reference
speed detected
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
*1. After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for

the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75 *1
Fig 6.33 Speed Search after Baseblock (Calculated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
6-41
2. Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply ON OFF Start using speed detected

Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time

(L2-03) (b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long,
operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Fig 6.34 Speed Search after Baseblock (Calculated Speed: Loss Time > L2-03)
Examples for Current Detection
Speed Search at Startup

The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
OFF ON Deceleration time set in b3-03

Run command
Maximum output Set frequency
frequency or reference
set frequency
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time* * Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
(L2-03)
Fig 6.35 Speed Search at Startup (Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.)
1. Loss time shorter than minimum baseblock time
AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss

Deceleration time Set frequency
set in b3-03 reference
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current
Output current
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output

frequency immediately before baseblock.
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)*1 *2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for
the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
*2
Fig 6.36 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L2-03)
6-42
Automatic Restart
2. Loss time longer than minimum baseblock time
AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss

Set frequency
Deceleration speed set in b3-03 reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time*

(L2-03)
Fig 6.37 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L2-03)
6-43
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function can be used to continue operation at reduced speed using the
set value in parameter L4-06 as frequency reference value. When using an analog input as frequency reference
source, a frequency reference loss is detected, when the reference value drops more than 90% in 400 msec or
less.
When parameter L4-05 is set to 1 the Inverter will continue operation at the percentage in L4-06 of the last
active frequency reference.
An fault signal during frequency reference loss can be output if H2-01 or H2-02 (Terminal M1-M2/M3-M4
function selection) to C (Loss of frequency reference).
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L4-05 Operation when frequency reference is missing 0 or 1 1 No A
Frequency reference value at frequency reference
L4-06 0 to 100% 80% No A
loss
Multi-function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value Function
C Loss of frequency reference
6-44
Automatic Restart
Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function)

If an Inverter fault occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no fault is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart. This is called the auto restart function.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts 0 to 10 0 No A
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection 0 or 1 0 No A
0.5 to
L5-03 Fault Retry Time 10.0 s No A
180.0

Set Value Function
1E Automatic restart enabled
• The auto restart function can be applied to the following faults.
• OC (Overcurrent) • PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• GF (Ground fault) • OL1 (Motor overload)
• PUF (DC bus fuse blown) • OL2 (Inverter overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage) • OH1 (Motor overheat)
• UV1 (DC Bus Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure)*1 • OL3 (Overload)
*1. When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
If an fault that is not listed above occurs the Inverter will not restart automatically and remain in fault con-
dition.
• If the fault output should be operated during auto restart L5-02 has to be set to 1
• The number of auto restarts is set in parameter L5-01. If a fault occurs the inverter performs the auto restart
corresponding to Fig 6.38. The inverter tries to restart every 5 msec for the maximum time of L5-03. All
retries performed during L5-03 are regarded as one restart attempt.
The internal counting of restart attempts is reset to 0 when the drive has run 10 minutes without fault.
6-45
Fault Occurrance
Controller
Fault Output
delay
RUN Controller
5 msec
Retry Function
L2-03 L5-03 (max)
Controller Base Block
Total Base Block Time
Fig 6.38 Timing Chart for Auto Restart Function
The number of auto restarts counter is reset under the following conditions:
• After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
• After the protection operation has been performed and an fault reset has been input.
• After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
6-46
Inverter Protection
Inverter Protection
Inverter Overheat Protection

The Inverter is protected against overheating using a thermistor that detects the heatsink temperature.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 50 to 130 95°C No A
L8-03 Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm operation selection 0 to 4 4 No A
0.0 to
L8-19 Frequency reference during OH pre-alarm 20.0% No A
20.0%

Set Value Function
20 Inverter overheat pre-alarm (ON when overheat pre-alarm is active)
When the overheat temperature level is reached the inverter output is switched off.
To prevent a sudden and unexpected stop of the inverter due to an overtemperature, an overheating pre-alarm
can be output. Parameter L8-02 selects the pre-alarm temperature level, parameter L8-03 selects the inverter
reaction on the pre-alarm:
• Setting 0: The Inverter decelerates to stop using deceleration time C1-02, OH fault is output.
• Setting 1: The Inverter coasts to stop, OH fault is output.
• Setting 2: The Inverter decelerates to stop using the emergency stop time C1-09, OH fault is output.
• Setting 3: The Inverter will continue operation and only display an OH alarm on the operator display.
• Setting 4: The Inverter will continue operation but reduce the output frequency order to reduce the load.
Parameter L8-19 defines the decrease in output frequency as a percentage of the maximum output fre-
quency E1-04. An OH alarm is output.
6-47
Input Phase Loss Detection Level
For the Input Phase Loss Detection the drive monitors the DC bus ripple. The drive integrates this ΔV value
over 10 scans (appr. 10 seconds). If the integrated ΔV value of any consecutive ten scan range is greater than
the voltage determined by multiplying L8-06 times the drives rated OV Trip point (400 VDC/800 VDC), a PF
fault will occur and the Drive will coast to stop.
Phase Loss Fault

Signal
DC Bus L8-06
Voltage
10 seconds
Fig 6.39 Input Phase Loss Detection
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.0 to
L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level
25.0% 5.0%*1 No A
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Ground Fault Protection

The ground fault protection function detects the earth leakage current by calculating the sum of the three out-
put currents. Normally this sum should be 0. If the sum exceeds 50% of the Inverter rated current a GF fault is
detected and the motor coasts to stop.
The ground fault protection can be disabled by setting L8-09 to 0. It is not recommended to disable the ground
fault protection.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L8-09 Ground fault protection selection 0 or 1 1 No A
6-48
Inverter Protection
Cooling Fan Control

This function controls the fan that is mounted to the inverters heatsink.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L8-10 Cooling fan control selection 0 or 1 0 No A
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time 0 to 300 300 sec. No A
L8-32 OH1 detection selection for fan failure 0 or 1 1 No A
Multi-function Relay Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value Function
3D Cooling fan fault (ON: internal cooling fan fault)
Selecting the Cooling Fan Control

Using parameter L8-10 two modes can be selected:
0:The fan is ON only when the inverter output is ON, i.e. a voltage is output. This is the factory setting.
1:The fan is ON whenever the inverter power supply is switched ON.
If L8-10 is set to 0, the turn OFF delay time for the fan can be set in parameter L8-11. After switching OFF the
RUN command the inverter waits for this time before the cooling fan is switched. The factory setting is 300
sec.
Parameter L8-32 selects whether failure of the internal cooling fan will lead to an OH1 fault or not. The fac-
tory setting is 0. This disables the OH1 fault in case of fan failure and displays a FAN alarm instead. Setting 1
activates the OH1 fault also in case of a internal fan failure.
When L8-32 is set to 0 and the internal fan fails the Inverter’s overload capability is automatically derated by
10%. The overload time at 100% of the Inverter rated current becomes 30 seconds and the overload time at
120% becomes 10 seconds.
If using L8-32 = 0 a multi-function output should be set to 10 (Alarm) or 3D (Cooling Fan Error) to indi-
cate to peripheral equipment that the Inverter’s internal cooling fan has failed. Under this condition the
Inverter should be immediately stopped and serviced for fan replacement. If the Inverter continues to run
IMPORTANT
in this state, its internal temperature will increase, resulting in a potential decrease of lifetime.
Setting the Ambient Temperature

The overload capability of the inverter depends on the ambient temperature. At ambient temperatures higher
than 45°C (40°C for Inverters in protection class IP20 / NEMA1) the output current capacity is reduced, i.e.
the OL2 alarm level will be lowered. Refer to Fig 6.40 for the output current derating.
6-49
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L8-12 Ambient temperature 45 to 60 45 °C No A
The ambient temperature must be set in parameter L8-12.
100
Output Current in % of the
80
Rated Current
60 IP00
IP20
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature (°C)
Fig 6.40 Ambient Temperature Derating Curve
OL2 Characteristics at Low Speed

At output frequencies below 6 Hz the overload capability of the inverter is lower than at higher speeds, i.e. an
OL2 fault (inverter overload) may occur even if the current is below the normal OL2 current level (see Fig
6.41).
The special OL2 characteristics can be disabled by setting parameter L8-15 to 0. Generally is not recom-
mended to disable that function as the Inverter lifetime might be shortened.
OL2 Detection Level
120% for 1 min.
60% for 1 min.
Output
Speed
-6 Hz 0 Hz 6 Hz
Fig 6.41 OL2 Alarm Level at Low Frequencies
6-50
Inverter Protection
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L8-15 OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds 0 or 1 1 No A
Soft CLA Selection

Soft CLA (software current level A) is a current detection level for the output IGBT protection. It is only
active during acceleration and lowers the output voltage quickly to reduce the current in order to protect the
IGBTs.
The Soft CLA function can be disabled by setting parameter L8-18 to 0. Generally it is absolutely not recom-
mended to disable this function.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
L8-18 Soft CLA selection 0 or 1 1 No A
6-51
Input Terminal Functions
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator

and Control Circuit Terminals
The Inverter’s run command and frequency reference inputs can be switched between local (i.e., Digital Oper-
ator) and remote (input method set in b1-01 and b1-02).
If any parameter from H1-01 to H1-05 (terminal S3 to S7 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote
selection), this input can be used to switch over between local and remote operation.
To set the frequency reference source and RUN command source to control circuit terminals, set b1-01 and
b1-02 to 1.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
b1-01 Reference selection 0 to 3 1 No Q
b1-02 RUN command source selection 0 to 3 1 No Q

Set Value Function
1 Local/Remote selection (ON: Operator; OFF: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting)
Local/remote switching can also be performed using the LOCAL/REMOTE key on the Digital Opera-
tor. When the local/remote selection has been set for one external terminal, the LOCAL/REMOTE key
NOTE
function on the Digital Operator will be disabled.
6-52
Blocking the Inverter Output (Baseblock Command)

Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (terminal S3 to S7 function
selection) to perform baseblock commands and thereby to block the inverter output.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operation using the speed search method set in b3-01 (speed
search selection). Otherwise the Inverter may trip as it will start at the same frequency reference again.

Set Value Function
8 External baseblock NO (ON: Inverter is baseblocked)
9 External baseblock NC (OFF: Inverter is baseblocked)
Time Chart
The time chart when using a baseblock command is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Input Cleared
Baseblock command
Frequency reference
Speed search
Output frequency
Coast to a stop
Fig 6.42 Baseblock Commands
When a contactor between inverter and motor is used, always perform a base block command before
opening the contactor.
IMPORTANT
Multifunction Analog Input A2 Disable/Enable

If a digital input is programmed to setting C the analog input A2 can be enabled or disabled by switching the
digital input.

Set Value Function
C Multi-function analog input A2 enable (ON: A2 is enabled)
6-53
Drive Enable/Disable
If a digital input is programmed to setting 6A the Inverter can be enabled or disabled by switching the digital
input
If the input is switched OFF while a RUN command is active the inverter will stop using the stopping method
set in b1-03.
The Drive Enable/Disable signal has to be ON before the RUN command is activated.

Set Value Function
6A Drive enable (ON: Inverter enabled)
Bypass Drive Enable

If a digital input is programmed to setting 70 the Inverter will not execute a RUN command until this input is
closed.
Unlike the setting 6A (Drive Enable/Disable) the RUN command does not need to be cycled after closing the
input. The Inverter will start whenever the digital input is closed a RUN command is active with the activated
acceleration time.
If a RUN command is active and the Bypass Drive Enable input is OFF the digital operator shows the alarm
message “dnE”.

Set Value Function
70 Bypass Drive enable (ON: Inverter is enabled)
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration

Ramp Hold)
• If a digital input is programmed to setting A the Inverter will pause the acceleration or deceleration and
hold the output frequency when the input is closed.
• Acceleration/deceleration is restarted when the input is turned OFF.
• The motor will be stopped if a stop command is input while the acceleration/deceleration ramp hold input
is ON.
• When parameter d4-01 (the frequency reference hold function selection) is set to 1, the held frequency will
be stored in memory. This stored frequency will be retained as frequency reference even after a power loss
and the motor will be restarted at this frequency when a run command is input again.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
d4-01 Frequency reference hold function selection 0 or 1 0 No A

Set Value Function
A Accel./Decel. Ramp Hold
6-54
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply OFF
Forward/Stop OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold Hold
Fig 6.43 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Digital Input Signals

(UP/DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multi-
function digital input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set two of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selec-
tion) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command).
The table below shows the possible combinations of the UP and DOWN command and the corresponding
operation.
Operation Acceleration Deceleration Hold
UP command ON OFF ON OFF
DOWN command OFF ON ON OFF
The change of the output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration times. Be sure to set b1-02
(Run command selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.0 to
d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit 100.0% No A
110.0
0.0 to
d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit 0.0% No A
110.0
0.0 to
d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit 0.0% No A
110.0
d4-01 Frequency reference hold function selection 0 or 1 0 No A
6-55
Set Value Function
10 UP command
11 DOWN command
Setting Precautions
An OPE03 alarm will occur if one of the following settings are programmed:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been programmed to digital inputs
at the same time.
• When the frequency reference is input by UP/DOWN commands the frequency is limited by the parame-
ters d2-01 to d2-03 (Reference Limits, set in% of the maximum output frequency).
• When the frequency reference is input by UP/DOWN commands the analog input A1 becomes the fre-
quency reference lower limit. If a combination of the frequency reference from terminal A1 and the fre-
quency reference lower limit is set in either parameter d2-02 or d2-03, the larger limit value will become
the frequency reference lower limit.
• If a frequency reference lower limit is set and the RUN command is activated the drive accelerates to the
lower limit.
• Multi-step operation is disabled when UP/DOWN commands are used.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the last frequency reference value
is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned ON and the run com-
mand is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz)
the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command before the power is switched on.
6-56
Connection Example and Time Chart

The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function Digital Input
terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Parameter Name Set Value
H1-01 Multi-function input (terminal S3) 10
H1-02 Multi-function input (terminal S4) 11
Inverter
Forward oper-
S1 ation/Stop
Reverse opera-
S2
tion/Stop
S3 UP command
S4 DOWN command
Digital input
SN neutral
A1 Frequency refer-
0 to 10 V analog ence lower limit
signal
AC
Fig 6.44 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit Same
frequency
Lower limit
Forward operation/stop
UP command
Reference
frequency reset
DOWN command
Speed agree*
Power supply
* The speed agree signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/
decelerating while the RUN command is ON.
Fig 6.45 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
6-57
Trim Control Function
The trim control function increments or decrements the frequency reference from analog input by the value set
in parameter d4-02 (Trim control level, set in% of maximum output frequency) using two digital inputs.
To use this function, set two of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input S3 to S7 function selection) to 1C
(Trim Control Increase) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease).
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
d4-02 Trim control level 0 to 100 10% No A

Set Value Function
1C Trim Control Increase
1D Trim Control Decrease
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference

The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown
below.
Set Frequency Set Frequency
Frequency Reference Reference Reference HOLD
+ d4-02 - d4-02
Trim Control Increase ON OFF ON OFF
Trim Control Decrease OFF ON ON OFF
Setting Precautions
An OPE03 alarm will occur if only one of the trim control commands is programmed.
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference
source is one of the analog input (A1 or A2).
• When the (analog frequency reference value - d4-02) < 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
6-58
Analog Frequency Reference Sample/Hold

If one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection) is set to 1E (ana-
log frequency reference sample/hold) the analog frequency reference will be sampled and held whenever the
digital input remains ON for at least 100 miliseconds.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.46 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Related Parameters

Set Value Function
1E Analog frequency reference sample/hold (ON: Frequency reference sample/hold)
Setting Precautions
An OPE03 alarm will occur if the following functions are programmed to digital inputs additional to the ana-
log frequency reference sample/hold function:
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold (setting A)
• UP/DOWN (settings 10/11)
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease (settings 1C/1D)
• When performing analog frequency reference sample/hold of, be sure to close the digital input for 100
msec or more. If the input is ON for less than 100 msec it will be ignored.
• The frequency reference value that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
6-59
Switching Operation Source to Communication Option Card
The source of frequency reference and RUN command can be switched between a Communication option
card and the sources selected in b1-01 and b1-02. Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (digital input S3
to S7 function selection) to 2 or 36 to enable operation source switchover.
If a RUN command is active, the switchover will not be accepted.
Related Parameters

Set Value Function
2 Operation Source Option Card/Inverter selection (ON: Parameter b1-01/b1-02 setting)
36 Operation Source Option/Inverter selection 2 (ON: option card)
Setting Precautions
To use the operation source switching function make the following settings:
• Set b1-01 (frequency reference source) to a value different from 3 (option card).
• Set b1-02 (RUN command source) to a value different from 3 (option card).
• Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 to 2 or 36.
Setting for one of Terminal
Frequency Reference and Run Command Source
H1-01 to H1-05 Status
Communication option card
OFF
(Frequency reference and run command are input from communications option card)
2
Inverter
ON
(Frequency reference and Run command source are set in b1-01 and b1-02)
Inverter
OFF
36
Communication option card
ON
(Frequency reference and run command are input from communications option card)
Switching Operation Source to MEMOBUS communication

The frequency reference and RUN command source can be switched between the MEMOBUS communica-
tion via RS-422/485 and the inverter settings in b1-01 and b1-02. Therefore set one of the parameters H1-01 to
H1-05 (digital inputs terminals S3 to S7 function selection) to 6B or 6C.
If a RUN command is active the switchover will not be accepted.
Related Parameters

Set Value Function
6B Operation source communication/Inverter selection (ON: RS-422/485 port active)
6C Operation source communication/Inverter selection 2 (ON: inverter settings active)
6-60
Setting precautions
To use the operation source switching function make the following settings:
• Set b1-01 (Frequency reference source) to a value different from 2 (Memobus)
• Set b1-02 (RUN command source) to a value different from 2 (Memobus)
• Set one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 to 6B or 6C
Setting for one of Terminal

Frequency Reference and Run Command Source
H1-01 to H1-05 Status
Inverter
OFF
6B
MEMOBUS communication
ON
(Frequency reference and run command are input via Memobus, RS-422/485 port)
MEMOBUS communication
OFF
(Frequency reference and run command are input via Memobus, RS-422/485 port)
6C
Inverter
ON
AUTO/HAND Mode Switching by Digital Input

If the HOA Digital Operator (optional available) is connected the Inverter can be switched to AUTO or
HAND mode with digital inputs.
If b1-13 (HAND/AUTO switching during run selection) is set to 1 this is also possible during run, otherwise
the Inverter has to be stopped to enable the switchover. Depending on the setting of b1-13 the functionality of
b1-12 (HAND frequency reference source selection) changes.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
b1-12 HAND frequency reference source selection 0 or 1 0 No A
b1-13 HAND/AUTO switching during run selection 0 or 1 0 No A

Set Value Function
6D AUTO mode selection (ON: AUTO mode active)
6E HAND mode selection (ON: HAND mode active)
Following table shows the behavior of the Inverter depending on the setting of b1-12 and b1-13.
Setting of Setting of
HAND/AUTO Switching Behaviour
b1-12 b1-13
0 Inverter has to be stopped for HAND/AUTO switchover.
(Disabled) If started in HAND mode d1-01 becomes the active frequency reference.
0
(Operator) Inverter can be switched over during run.
1
When switched to HAND mode the last AUTO frequency reference is used in
(Enabled)
HAND mode and copied into d1-01.
0 Inverter has to be stopped for HAND/AUTO switchover.
1 (Disabled) If started in HAND mode the AUTO frequency reference is used.
(Terminals) 1 Inverter can be switched over during run.
(Enabled) When switched to HAND mode d1-01 becomes the active frequency reference.
6-61
Setting Precautions
• The status of the digital inputs programmed to AUTO mode selection or HAND mode selection will over-
ride any digital operator selections.
• If a Digital Operator different from the HOA Digital Operator is connected to the Inverter the digital inputs
AUTO mode selection and HAND mode selection will be ignored.
• An OPE3 alarm will occur when AUTO mode selection and HAND mode selection are assigned to 2 digi-
tal inputs simultaneously.
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands

(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG function operates the inverter at the jog frequency. This function includes a RUN command,
it does not need to be set additionally.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0 to
d1-17 Jog frequency reference 6.00 Hz Yes A
200.00
Multi-Function Digital Inputs (H1-01 to H1-05)

Set Value Function
12 FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
13 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands will override any other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
6-62
Stopping the Inverter on External Faults (External Fault Function)

The external fault function can activate the fault relay output and can stop the Inverter operation by a digital
input. The Digital Operator will display EFx where x is the number of the digital input the fault signal is con-
nected to.
To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (dig-
ital input terminal S3 to S7 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal logic from peripheral devices
• External fault detection method
• Operation during external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1-01
to H1-05.
Signal Logic Fault Detection Method Operation During Fault Detection
Set Detection Deceler- Coast to Continue
Value NO NC Continuous Fast Stop
During ate to Stop Stop Operation
Contact Contact Detection (Fault)
Operation (Fault) (Fault) (Warning)
20 Yes Yes Yes
21 Yes Yes Yes
22 Yes Yes Yes
23 Yes Yes Yes
24 Yes Yes Yes
25 Yes Yes Yes
26 Yes Yes Yes
27 Yes Yes Yes
28 Yes Yes Yes
29 Yes Yes Yes
2A Yes Yes Yes
2B Yes Yes Yes
2C Yes Yes Yes
2D Yes Yes Yes
2E Yes Yes Yes
2F Yes Yes Yes
6-63
Output Terminal Functions
The digital multifunction outputs can be set for several functions using the H2-01 and H2-02 parameters (ter-
minal M1 to M4 function selection). These functions are described in the following section.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection 0 to 3D 0 No A
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 function selection 0 to 3D 1 No A
During Run (Setting: 0) and During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
During Run (Setting: 0)

OFF The RUN command is OFF, the Inverter output is OFF
ON The RUN command is ON, the Inverter output is giving out a voltage.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)

OFF The Inverter does not give out a frequency. (During baseblock, DC injection or stopped)
ON The Inverter gives out a frequency.
These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter’s operating status.
Run command OFF ON
Baseblock command OFF ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output OFF ON
During run 2 output OFF ON
Fig 6.47 Timing Chart for During Run and During Run 2 Output
6-64
Output Terminal Functions
Zero Speed (Setting: 1)

The output frequency is higher than the zero speed level (DC injection braking start level,
OFF
b2-01).
The output frequency is lower than the zero speed level (DC injection braking start level,
ON
b2-01).
Output frequency Zero speed level (b2-01)
Zero-speed output OFF ON
Fig 6.48 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
Inverter Operation Ready (Setting: 6)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 6 the output will be switched ON when the initialisation of
the Inverter at startup has finished without any faults.
During DC Bus Undervoltage (Setting: 7)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 7 the output is switched ON as long as a DC bus undervolt-
age is detected.
During Baseblock (Setting: 8)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 8 the output is switched ON as long as the Inverter output
is base blocked.
Frequency Reference Source Selection (Setting: 9)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 9 the output is ON when the Digital Operator is selected as
frequency reference source. If any other frequency reference is selected the output is switched OFF.
Run Command Source Selection Status (Setting: A)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to A the output is switched ON when the digital operator is
selected as RUN command source. If any other RUN command source is selected output is switched OFF.
Fault (Setting: E)
If a multi-function digital output is programmed to E the output is switched ON when any fault different from
CPF00 and CPF01 occurs. The output is also not switched in alarm condition. (Refer to Chapter 7, Trouble-
shooting for fault and alarm lists.)
Minor Fault (Alarm) (Setting: 10)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 10 the output is switched ON when the Inverter is in alarm
condition (refer to page 7-8, Alarm Detection pp.).
6-65
Fault Reset Command Active (Setting: 11)
If a multi-function digital output is set to 11 the output is switched ON as long as a fault reset command is
input at one of the digital inputs.
Reverse Direction (Setting: 1A)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed for this function the output is switched ON whenever the
motor is rotating in reverse direction.
OH Pre-Alarm (Setting: 20)

The overheat fault function (OH) is designed to protect the Inverter from excessive temperature damage. Ther-
mistors attached to the heatsink of the Inverter monitor the temperature and will make the Inverter trip if the
temperature reaches 105 °C.
An OH pre-alarm digital output will be switched ON whenever the heatsink temperature reaches the level
specified by parameter L8-02 (Overheat pre-alarm level). Parameter L8-03 (Operation selection after overheat
pre-alarm) will determine the Inverter’s response to reaching the OH pre-alarm level (besides switching the
configured digital output).
Drive Enabled (Setting: 38)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 38 the output is switched ON when the Inverter is enabled.
The Inverter can be enabled or disabled using a digital multifunction input (see also page 6-54).
Drive Waiting (Setting: 39)

The digital output will close during the time-out period between the input of a RUN command and the expir-
ing of the delay time specified by b1-11.
During oH and Reduced Frequency (Setting: 3A)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 3A the output is switched ON when an Inverter overheat
alarm has occurred and the motor is running at reduced speed according to parameter L8-19 (Frequency refer-
ence during OH pre-alarm). See also page 6-47.
RUN Command from Option Card/Communication Option (Setting: 3B)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 3B the output will be switched ON when the RUN com-
mand is input from the built-in communication (Memobus, N2) OR from a communication option card (SI-S1,
SI-N1, etc.). If both RUN commands are off the output will be switched OFF.
Cooling Fan Fault (Setting: 3D)

If a multi-function digital output is programmed to 3D the output will be swathed ON when the internal cool-
ing fan is faulty. Whenever this output is switched ON the Inverter should be immediately stopped and ser-
viced for internal fan replacement. If the Inverter continues to run in this state, its internal temperature will
increase, resulting in a potential decrease of lifetime.
6-66
Monitor Parameters
Monitor Parameters
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor parameters.
Using the Analog Monitor Parameters
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
H4-01 Terminal FM monitor selection 1 to 38 2 No A

0~
H4-02 Terminal FM gain 100% Yes A
1000.0%
-110.0 ~
H4-03 Terminal FM bias 0.0% Yes A
+110.0%
H4-04 Terminal AM monitor selection 1 to 53 8 No A
0~
H4-05 Terminal AM gain 50% Yes A
1000.0%
-110.0 ~
H4-06 Terminal AM bias 0.0% Yes A
+110.0%
H4-07 Terminal FM signal level selection 0 or 2*1 0 No A
H4-08 Terminal AM signal level selection 0 or 2*1 0 No A
*1. An analog output signal of 4-20 mA (setting 2) requires an optional terminal board (ETC618121) for current output.
Selecting Analog Monitor Items

Some of the Digital Operator monitor items (U1- [status monitors]) can be output at the multi-function
analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to page 5-41, Monitor Parameters: U, and set the param-
eter number of U1 group ( part of U1- ) for the parameters H4-01 respectively H4-04.
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items

Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and
bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06.
The gain sets the analog output voltage value which is equal to 100% of the monitor item.
The bias sets the analog output voltage value which is equal to 0% of the monitor item.
Note that the maximum output voltage is 10V. A voltage higher than this value can not be output.
Selecting the Signal Level

Select the signal level for the analog outputs using parameters H4-07 and H4-08. The default setting is 0 to
10V. If a current output signal of 4 to 20mA should be used an optional terminal board (ETC618121) with
additional analog current outputs is required.
6-67
Adjusting the Meter
The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog outputs is shown on three examples in Fig 6.49.
Output Voltage
Gain: 170%
Bias: 30%
10V
Gain: 100%
Bias: 0%
3V
Gain: 0%
Bias: 100%
0V
0% 100% Monitor Item
(e.g. Output Frequency)
Fig 6.49 Monitor Output Adjustment
6-68
Individual Functions
Using MEMOBUS Communications

The Varispeed E7 is equipped with a RS422/485 serial communication port using the MEMOBUS protocol
MEMOBUS Communication Configuration

MEMOBUS enables a master device (e.g. PLC) to communicate with up to 31 slave devices (e.g. Inverters).
Basically the slaves respond on messages sent from the master.
The master performs serial communications with only one slave at a time. Consequently, to every slave a
address must be assigned.
PLC
Inverter Inverter Inverter
Fig 6.50 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item Specifications
Interface RS422, RS485
Communications Cycle Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Baud rate: Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600 and 19,200 bps.
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Communications Parameters
Parity: Select from even, odd or none.
Stop bits: 1 bit selected
Communications Protocol MEMOBUS
Number of Connectable Units 31 units max.
6-69
Communications Connection Terminal
The MEMOBUS communication uses the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Enable the terminating
resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter (seen from the PLC) only.
RS-422A or S1 Terminating
O resistance
RS-485 1
F
F 2
S1
Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.51 Communications Connection Terminal
• Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
• Use shielded cables for the communications cables and use proper shielding clamps
• When using RS485 communication is used, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.
IMPORTANT
See Fig 6.52 below.
Fig 6.52 Connections when RS485 Communication is used
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC

Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications parameters (H5-01 to H5-08) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
It is absolutely necessary to cycle the input power once when any of the serial communication parame-
ters (H5-01 to H5-09) has been changed.
IMPORTANT
6-70
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
b1-01 Reference source selection 0 to 3 1 No Q
b1-02 RUN command Source Selection 0 to 3 1 No Q
H5-01 Station address *1 1F No A
0 to 20
H5-02 Baud rate selection 0 to 4 3 No A
H5-03 Communications parity selection 0 to 2 0 No A
H5-04 Communications error detection selection 0 to 3 3 No A
H5-05 Communications error detection selection 0 or 1 1 No A
5 to 65
H5-06 Send wait time 5 msec No A
msec
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF 0 or 1 1 No A
H5-08 Communication Selection 0 or 1 0 No A
0.0 to
H5-09 CE detection time 2.0 sec. No A
10.0 sec.
*1. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communication
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and
b1-02.
• Monitoring operation status of the inverter
• Setting and reading parameters
• Resetting faults
• Inputting digital input commands. (an OR operation is performed between the commands from MEMO-
BUS communication and the signals input from multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7.)
Setting RUN Command and Frequency Reference by MEMOBUS

If the RUN command or the frequency reference should be input directly by MEMOBUS communication
parameter b1-01 respectively b1-02 have to be set to 3 (Serial communication)
MEMOBUS Communication settings

• Parameter H5-02 selects the communication speed. Following speeds are possible: 1200 bps (setting 0),
2400 bps (setting 1), 4800 bps (setting 2), 9600 bps (setting 3, default) and 19200 bps (setting 4).
• Parameter H5-03 selects the used parity between no parity (setting 0, default), even parity (setting 1) and
odd parity (setting 2).
• Parameter H5-04 selects the Inverter’s behaviour when a communication error (CE) has occurred and
H5-05 is set 1. Following settings are possible:
0: Deceleration to stop using deceleration time c1-02, CE fault.
1: Coast to stop, CE fault.
2: Emergency stop using the emergency stop time c1-09, CE fault.
3: Continue operation, CE alarm is displayed.
Parameter H5-05 selects whether communication error (CE) is detected or not. The default setting is 1, a
time out from the master is detected after not receiving any message for the time set in H5-09.
• Parameter H5-06 specifies the delay time the Inverter waits until it sends the response on the received mes-
sage from the master.
• Parameter H5-07 configures whether the Inverter will implement RTS (Request To Send) messaging all
the time (H5-07=0) or only when sending (H5-07=1). It is recommended to set H5-07 to 0 when using
RS485 and to 1 when using RS422.
6-71
• Beside MEMOBUS the drive is also capable of using Metasys N2 communications via the RS485/422
port. Setting parameter H5-08 to 0 activates MEMOBUS communication, setting 1 enables Metasys N2.
Note: A additional manual for the Metasys N2 protocol is available on request.
• The setting of parameter H5-09 determines the length of time that serial communications must be lost
before a CE fault occurs.
Setting Precautions
• If the Inverter trips with CE faults with a communication speed setting of 19200 bps, lower the communi-
cation speed.
• If the Inverter trips with CE faults with lower communication speed selections lengthen the send wait time
in parameter H5-06
• If the Inverter’s station address is set to 0 it will ignore all messages from the master.
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communication the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds. The message
format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below and the length of data packets depends on
the command (function) content.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must meet the following conditions:
PLC to Inverter Inverter to PLC PLC to Inverter
Command message Response message Command message

Time
H5-06
24 bits long 24 bits long 5 ms min.
setting
Fig 6.53 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the address from 0 to 32. If set to 0, commands from the master will be received by all slaves. (Refer to
“Broadcast Data” on the following pages.)
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. The three function codes shown in the table below are available.
Command Message Response Message
Function Code
Function
(Hexadecimal) Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes) Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes)
03H Read memory register contents 8 8 7 37

08H Loopback test 8 8 8 8
10H Write multiple memory registers 11 41 8 8
6-72
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the memory register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Error Check
Errors during communications are detected using CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method).
The result of the checksum calculation is stored in a data-word (16 bit), which starting value is FFFH. The
value of this word is manipulated using Exclusive OR- and SHIFT operations together with the data package
that should be sent (slave address, function code, data) and the fixed value A001H. At the end of the calcula-
tion the data-word contains the checksum value.
The checksum is calculated in the following way:
1. The starting value of the 16 Bit data-word, that is used for the calculation, has to be set to FFFFH.
2. An Exclusive OR operation has to be performed with the starting value and the slave address.
3. The result has to be shifted to the right until the overflow bit becomes 1.
4. When this bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR operation with the result of step 3 and the fix value A001H has
to be performed.
5. After 8 shift operations (every time when the overflow bit becomes 1, an Exclusive OR like in step 4 has to
be done), perform an Exclusive OR operation with the result of the former operations and the next data
package (8 bit function code). Again the result of this operation has to be shifted 8 times and if needed it
has to be interconnected with the fix value A001H using an Exclusive OR operation.
6. The same steps have to be performed with the data, first with the higher byte and then with the lower byte
until all data are proceeded.
7. The result of these operations is the checksum. It consists of a high and a low byte.
The following example clarifies the calculation method. It shows the calculation of a CRC-16 code with the
slave address 02H (0000 0010) and the function code 03H (0000 0011). The resulting CRC-16 code is 40H for
the lower and D1H for the higher byte. The example calculation in this example is not done completely (nor-
mally data would follow the function code).
6-73
Calculations Overflow Description
1111 1111 1111 1111 Initial value
0000 0010 Address
1111 1111 1111 1101 ExOr Result
0111 1111 1111 1110 1 Shift 1
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 1111 1111 1111 ExOr Result
0110 1111 1111 1111 1 Shift 2
1010 0000 0000 0001
1100 1111 1111 1110 ExOr Result
0110 0111 1111 1111 0 Shift 3
0011 0011 1111 1111 1 Shift 4
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0011 1111 1110 ExOr Result
0100 1001 1111 1111 0 Shift 5
0010 0100 1111 1111 1 Shift 6
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0100 1111 1110 ExOr Result
0100 0010 0111 1111 0 Shift 7
0010 0001 0011 1111 1 Shift 8
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0001 0011 1110 ExOr Result
0000 0011 Function Code
1000 0001 0011 1101 ExOr Result
0100 0000 1001 1110 1 Shift 1
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0000 1001 1111 ExOr Result
0111 0000 0100 1111 1 Shift 2
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0000 0100 1110 ExOr Result
0110 1000 0010 0111 0 Shift 3
0011 0100 0001 0011 1 Shift 4
1010 0000 0000 0001
1001 0100 0001 0010 ExOr Result
0100 1010 0000 1001 0 Shift 5
0010 0101 0000 0100 1 Shift 6
1010 0000 0000 0001
1000 0101 0000 0101 ExOr Result
0100 0010 1000 0010 1 Shift 7
1010 0000 0000 0001
1110 0010 1000 0011 ExOr Result
0111 0001 0100 0001 1 Shift 8
1010 0000 0000 0001
1101 0001 0100 0000 ExOr Result
D1H 40H CRC-16 Result
Higher Lower
Byte Byte
6-74
MEMOBUS Message Example

An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Inverter Memory Register Contents

The content of maximum 16 inverter memory registers can be readout at a time.
Among other things the command message must contain the start address of the first register that is to be read
out and the quantity of registers that should be read out. The response message will contain the content of the
first and the consecutive number of registers that has been set for the quantity.
The contents of the memory register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following tables show message examples when reading status signals, fault details, data link status, and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Response Message Response Message
Command Message
(During Normal Operation) (During Error)
Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H
Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H
Start Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H
Address Lower 20H 1st storage Higher 00H Higher F1H
CRC-16
Higher 00H register Lower 65H Lower 31H
Quantity
Lower 04H Next stor- Higher 00H
Higher 45H age register Lower 00H
CRC-16
Lower F0H Next stor- Higher 00H
age register Lower 00H
Next stor- Higher 01H
age register Lower F4H
Higher AFH
CRC-16
Lower 82H
6-75
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. A user-defined test code and data values can be set.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave no. 1.
Command Message
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H
Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H
Test Code Test Code
Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H
CRC-16
Higher A5H Higher A5H Lower 50H
Data Data
Lower 37H Lower 37H
Higher DAH Higher DAH
CRC-16 CRC-16
Lower 8DH Lower 8DH
Writing to Multiple Inverter Memory Registers

The writing of inverter memory registers works similar to the reading process, i.e. the address of the first reg-
ister that is to be written and the quantity of to be written registers must be set in the command message.
The to be written data must be consecutive, starting from the specified address in the command message. The
data order must be higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits. The data must be in memory register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message where a forward operation has been set with a frequency
reference of 60.0 Hz for the inverter with the slave address 01H.
Command Message
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H
Start Higher 00H Start Higher 00H Error code 02H
Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H Higher CDH
CRC-16
Higher 00H Higher 00H Lower C1H
Quantity Quantity
Lower 02H Lower 02H
No. of data 04H Higher 10H
CRC-16
Higher 00H Lower 08H
Lead data
Lower 01H
Higher 02H
Next data
Lower 58H * No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
Higher 63H
CRC-16
Lower 39H
For the number of data value in the command message the double value of the data quantity must be
used.
IMPORTANT
6-76
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. These data can be read and written. They cannot be used for monitor-
ing functions.
Register No. Contents
0000H Reserved
Run operation and input commands
Bit 0 Run/stop command
Bit 1 Forward/reverse operation
Bit 2 External fault
Bit 3 Fault reset
Bit 4 ComNet
0001H Bit 5 ComCtrl
Bit 6 Multi-function input command 3
Bit A Multi-function input command 7
Bits B to F Not used
0002H Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H PI target value
0007H Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
0008H Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-726 to 11 V/726) → 10V = 660
Multi-function digital output setting
Bit 0 Digital output 1 (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Digital output 2 (Terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Not used
0009H
Bits 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6 Set fault relay (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Fault relay (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Input PI target value 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 2 to B Not used
000FH
C Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F Not used
Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
6-77
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Inverter status signal
Bit 0 During run
Bit 1 Zero speed
Bit 2 During reverse operation
Bit 3 Reset signal active
0010H
Bit 4 During speed agree
Bit 5 Inverter ready
Bit 6 Minor fault
Bit 7 Major fault
Operator status
Bit 0 During OPE alarm
Bit 1 During fault
0011H
Bit 2 Operator in programming mode
Bit 3, 4 00: JVOP-160 attached, 01: JVOP-161 attached, 11: PC connected
Bit 5 to F Not used
0012H OPE Fault Number
0013H Not used
Fault Content 1
Bit 0 PUF, DC bus fuse blown
Bit 1 UV1
Bit 2 UV2
Bit 3 UV3
Bit 4 Not used
Bit 5 GF, Ground fault
Bit 6 OC, Over current
0014H Bit 7 OV, DC bus over voltage
Bit 8 OH, Inverter heatsink overheat pre-alarm
Bit 9 OH1, Inverter heatsink overheat
Bit A OL1, Motor overload
Bit B OL2, Inverter overload
Bit C OL3, Overload detection
Bit D Not used
Bit E Not used
Bit F Not used
6-78

Fault Content 2
Bit 0 EF3, External fault set on terminal S3
Bit 5 Not used
Bit 6 Not used
0015H Bit 7 Not used
Bit 8 Not used
Bit 9 Not used
Bit A PF, Input phase loss
Bit B LF, Output open phase
Bit C OH3, Motor overheat pre-alarm (PTC analog input)
Bit D OPR, Digital operator disconnected
Bit E ERR, EEPROM fault
Bit F OH4, Motor overheat (PTC analog input)
Fault Content 3
Bit 0 CE, Memobus communications error
Bit 1 BUS, Bus option communications error
Bit 2/3 Not used
Bit 4 Not used
Bit 5 Not used
0016H
Bit 6 EF0, External fault from optional input card
Bit 7 FBL, PI feedback loss
Bit 8 LL3, Loss of Load detection
Bit 9 Not used
Bit A OL7, High Slip Braking overload
Bit B to F Not used
CPF Fault Content 1
Bit 0/1 Not used
Bit 2 CPF02
Bit 3 CPF03
0017H
Bit 4 Not used
Bit 5 CPF05
Bit 6 CPF06
Bit 7 to F Not used
CPF Fault Content 2
Bit 0 CPF20
Bit 1 CPF21
0018H
Bit 2 CPF22
Bit 3 CPF23
Bit 4 to F Not used
6-79
Alarm Content 1
Bit 0 UV, DC bus undervoltage
Bit 1 OV, DC bus overvoltage
Bit 2 OH, Inverter heatsink overheat pre-alarm
Bit 3 OH2, Inverter overheat alarm input by a digital input
Bit 4 OL3, Overload detection 1
Bit 5 Not used
Bit 6 EF, Forward/Reverse input set at the same time
0019H
Bit 7 BB, Baseblock active
Bit 8 EF3, External alarm set on terminal S3
Bit 9 EF4, External alarm set on terminal S4
Bit A EF5, External alarm set on terminal S5
Bit B EF6, External alarm set on terminal S6
Bit C EF7, External alarm set on terminal S7
Bit D/E Not used
Bit F Not used
Alarm Content 2
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Not used
Bit 2 OPR, Digital operator disconnected
Bit 3 CE, Memobus communications error
Bit 4 BUS, Bus option communications error
Bit 5 CALL, Communications on standby
001AH Bit 6 OL1, Motor overload
Bit 7 OL2, Inverter overload
Bit 8 to A Not used
Bit B FBL, PI feedback loss
Bit C CALL, Communications on standby
Bit D UL3, Loss of Load detection
Bit E Not used
Bit F Not used
Alarm Content 3
Bit 0 Not used
001BH
Bit 1 OH3, Motor overheat pre-alarm
Bit 2 to F Not used
Inverter status
Bit 0 Forward operation
Bit 1 Reverse operation
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3 Fault 1: Fault
0020H
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Not used
6-80

Fault details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC), Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4 Not used
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PI feedback lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External fault (EF, EFO)
0021H
Bit 8 Control board fault (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1) or Overload (OL3) detected
Bit A Not used
Bit B Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply fault (UV2), inrush prevention circuit
Bit C
fault (UV3), power loss
Bit D Output phase loss (LF)
Bit E MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Bit F Operator disconnected (OPR)
Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bit 1 Not used
0022H Bit 2 Not used
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
Frequency
0023H Monitors U1-01
reference
0024H Output frequency Monitors U1-02
0025H Output voltage Monitors U1-06
0026H Output current Monitors U1-03
0027H Output power Monitors U1-08
0028H Not used
0029H Not used
002AH Not used
Control terminals input status
Bit 0 Input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
002BH Bit 3 Multi-function input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
6-81
Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: During Operation
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency agree 1: Agreement
Bit 3 User-defined speed agree 1: Agreement
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
002CH Bit 7 Undervoltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: By communication option
Bit A Run command mode 1: By communication option
Bit B Overload detection 1: Detected
Bit C Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit D Restart enabled 1: Restarting
Bit E Fault (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Fault occurred
Bit F MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function digital output status
Bit 0 Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
002DH Bit 1 Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Not used
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H DC bus voltage
0032H – 0037H Not used
0038H ^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; without sign)
PI feedback (max. output frequency =
0039H ^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)
PI input (max. output frequency =
003AH ^ 100%; resolution 0.1%; with sign)
PI output (max. output frequency =
003BH CPU software number
003CH Flash software number
Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used
003DH Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
003EH kVA setting
Note: Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input (can also be reset during operation).
6-82
Broadcast Data
Using broadcast data a command can be given to all slaves at the same time. The message must be addressed
to 00H. All slaves will receive the message, but will not respond.
The following table shows the broadcast data. Theses data can also be written.
Register
Contents
Address
Operation signal
Bit 0 Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4 External fault 1: Fault
0001H Bit 5 Fault reset 1: Reset command
Bits 6 to B Not used
Bit C Multi-function digital input terminal S5 input
Bit D Multi-function digital input terminal S6 input
Bit E Multi-function digital input terminal S7 input
Bit F Not used.
0002H Frequency reference
Note: Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
Inverter Fault Codes

The content of a current fault and faults that have occurred earlier can be read out by Memobus using the Fault
Trace (U2- ) and the Fault History (U3- ) parameters. The fault codes are shown in the table below.
Fault Fault Fault
Fault Description Fault Description Fault Description
Code Code Code
01H PUF 13H EF5 28H FBL
02H UV1 14H EF6 29H UL3
03H UV2 15H EF7 2AH -
04H UV3 18H - 2BH OL7
06H GF 19H - 83H CPF02
07H OC 1AH - 84H CPF03
08H OV 1BH PF 85H CPF04
09H OH 1CH LF 86H CPF05
0AH OH1 1DH OH3 87H CPF06
0BH OL1 1EH OPR 88H CPF07
0CH OL2 1FH ERR 89H CPF08
0DH OL3 20H OH4 8AH CPF09
0EH - 21H CE 8BH CPF10
0FH - 22H BUS 91H CPF20
10H - 25H CF 92H CPF21
11H EF3 26H - 93H CPF22
12H EF4 27H EF0 94H CPF23
Refer to Chapter 7, Troubleshooting for detailed fault descriptions and for corrective actions.
6-83
ENTER Command
When writing parameters to the Inverter from the master using MEMOBUS communications the parameters
are temporarily stored in the parameter data area in the Inverter. To enable these parameters the ENTER com-
mand must be used.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM and
ENTER commands that write data into the EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time
as enabling the data in RAM.
The following table shows the registers used for ENTER commands. The ENTER command is enabled by
writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H.
0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM, RAM is refreshed
0910H Parameter data are not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
The maximum number of times it can be written to EEPROM is 100,000. Do not frequently execute
ENTER commands (0900H) that write into EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if these registers are read out, the
IMPORTANT
register address will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Communications Error Codes

The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code Contents
Function code error
01H
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the master.
Invalid register number error
02H • The register address can not be accessed.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
Invalid quantity error
03H • The quantity of registers being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data in the message is not quantity of registers x 2.
Data setting error
21H • A upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters.
• When writing parameters, the parameter setting out of the setting range
Write mode error
• Attempting to write parameters to the Inverter during operation.
• Attempting to send an ENTER command during operation.
22H
• Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or o2-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
Writing during DC bus undervoltage (UV) error
23H • Writing parameters to the inverter during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
• Sending ENTER commands during UV (DC bus undervoltage) alarm.
Writing error during parameters processing.
24H
Attempting to write parameters while other parameters in the Inverter are processed.
6-84
Slave Not Responding

In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not match.
• When the gap between two blocks (8 bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function,
but do not return response messages to the master.
IMPORTANT
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing of the serial communication interface circuits. This
function uses the interconnected send/receive terminals and emulates messages.
To perform the self-diagnosis function use the following procedure.
1. Switch ON the Inverter power supply, and set 67 (communications test mode) in parameter H1-05 (Termi-
nal S7 Function Selection).
2. Switch OFF the Inverter power supply.
3. Perform the wiring according to Fig 6.54.
4. Switch ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Switch ON the inverter power supply.
Fig 6.54 Communication Terminals Wiring for Self-Diagnosis
If the serial port is working correctly the Digital Operator displays “PASS” on the display.
If an error occurs, a “CE” (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Opera-
tor, the fault digital output will be turned ON and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
6-85
Using the Timer Function
The digital input and output terminals can be used with a timer function: A digital output is switched ON with
a set delay time after a digital input has been switched ON.
Related Parameters
Change
Param-
eter Name Description
Number
tion
Set the timer function output ON delay time (dead
Timer function ON-delay time) for the timer function input in 1-second units. 0.0 to
b4-01 Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- 0.0 sec. No A
time 300.0
and H2- .
Set the timer function output OFF delay time (dead
Timer function OFF-delay time) for the timer function input in 1-second units. 0.0 to
b4-02 Enabled when the timer function is set in H1- 0.0 sec. No A
time 300.0
and H2- .

Set Value Function
18 Timer function input
Multi-Function Digital Outputs (H2-01 to H2-02)

Set Value Function
12 Timer function output
Setting Example
When the timer function input remains switched ON for a time longer than the setting in b4-01, the timer out-
put function is turned ON. When the timer function input remains switched OFF for a time longer than the set-
ting in b4-02, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the
following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.55 Timer Function Operation Example
6-86
Using PI Control
PI control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value.
The characteristics of the PI control operations are given below.
The output of a P-element is proportional to the input (deviation). With using a P-element alone it is
P element
not possible to eliminate the deviation completely.
The output of an I-element is the time-integral of the input (deviation). With using a P-element and an
I element
I-element together the deviation can be eliminated completely.
PID Control Operation

To understand the differences between the PI control operations P and I the output share of each operation is
shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback
value) is jumps to a certain value (step response).
Deviation Time
PI control
Output of P- and I control

I-element
P control
Time
Fig 6.56 PI Control Operation
PI Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PI control applications using the Inverter.
Example of Sensor
Application Control Details
Used
Pressure Con-
Pressure information is fed back and constant pressure control is performed. Pressure sensor
trol
Flow Rate Flow rate information is fed back and the flow rate is controlled with high accu-
Flow rate sensor
Control racy.
Temperature Temperature information is fed back and a temperature adjustment control • Thermocouple
Control using a fan can be performed. • Thermistor
6-87
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
b5-01 PI control mode selection 0, 1, 3 0 No A
0.00
b5-02 Proportional (P) gain to 1.00 Yes A*1
25.00
0.0 to
b5-03 Integral (I) time 1.0 sec. Yes A*1
360.0
0.0 to
b5-04 Integral (I) limit 100.0% Yes A
100.0
0.0 to
b5-06 PI limit 100.0% Yes A
100.0
-100.0
b5-07 PI offset to 0.0% Yes A
+100.0
0.00 to
b5-08 PI delay time constant 0.00 sec. Yes A
10.00
b5-09 PI output characteristics selection 0 or 1 0 No A
0.0 to
b5-10 PI output gain 1.0 No A
25.0
b5-11 PI reverse output selection 0 or 1 0 No A
b5-12 Selection of PI feedback signal loss detection 0 to 2 0 No A
b5-13 PI feedback loss detection level 0 to 100 0% No A
0.0 to
b5-14 PI feedback loss detection time 1.0 sec. No A
25.5
0.0 to
b5-15 Sleep function operation level 0.0 Hz No A
200.0
0.0 to
b5-16 Sleep operation delay time 0.0 sec. No A
25.5
0.0 to
b5-17 Accel/decel time for PI reference 0.0 sec. No A
25.5
b5-18 PI Setpoint Selection 0 to 1 0 No A
0.00 to
b5-19 PI Setpoint 0% Yes A
100.00
0 to
b5-20 PI Setpoint Scaling 1 No A
39999
b5-21 Sleep Function Selection 1 to 2 1 No A
b5-22 Snooze Level 0 to 100 0% Yes A
b5-23 Snooze Delay Time 0 to 3600 0 sec. No A
b5-24 Wake-Up Level 0 to 100 0% No A
b5-25 Setpoint Boost 0 to 100 0% No A
b5-26 Maximum Boost Time 0 to 3600 0 sec. No A
b5-27 Snooze feedback 0 to 100 60% No A
b5-28 PI Feedback Square Root Operation 0 or 1 0 No A
b5-29 PI Feedback Square Root Gain 0 to 2.00 1.00 No A
b5-30 PI Output Monitor Square Root 0 or 1 0 No A
b5-31 PI unit selection 0 to 11 0 No A
*1. Parameter is moved into Quick Programming Mode when PI controller is enabled, otherwise the parameter is available only in Advanced
Programming Mode
6-88
Monitor Items (U1- )

Parameter Output Signal Level
Name Unit
Number at Analog Output
U1-24 PI feedback value 10 V: 100% feedback 0.01%
U1-36 PI input volume 10 V: 100% PI input 0.01%

U1-37 PI output volume 10 V: 100% PI output 0.01%
U1-38 PI setpoint 10 V: 100% PI target 0.01%
U1-53 PI feedback 2 10 V: 100% PI feedback 0.01%
Set Value Function
19 PI control disable (ON: PI control disabled)

30 PI control integral reset (ON: integral reset and hold as long as input is ON)
31 PI control integral hold (ON: integral is hold)
34 PI soft starter disable (ON: disabled)
35 PI input characteristics switch
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-09)
Set Value Function
B PI feedback
C PI target value
16 PI differential feedback
6-89
PI Control Methods
There are two PI control methods. Select the method by setting parameter b5-01.
Set Value Control Method
0 PI control disabled
1 PI output becomes directly the Inverter output frequency.
3 PI output is added to the frequency reference as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency.
When the PI control is enabled (b5-01=1 or 3) further changes to other parameter settings occur automatically.
Following parameters change their Access Level to Quick Access Level:
Parameter Number Name Access Level
H3-08 Analog input A2 signal level selection Q
H3-09 Analog input A2 function selection Q
H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching Q
b5-31 PI unit selection Q
b5-02 Proportional (P) gain Q
b5-03 Integral (I) time Q
Following parameters change their Default Setting:

Parameter Number Name Default Setting
H3-09 Analog input A2 function selection B
PI Input Methods
PI Target Value Input Methods

Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PI target value, the PI target value can also be set as
shown in the following table.
PI Target Input Method Setting Conditions
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PI target value

MEMOBUS register 0006H
from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PI target value.
Parameter setting If b5-18 is set to 1 the value in b5-19 becomes the PI target value.
If the PI function is used the frequency reference value becomes the target value, which is set and shown
in Hz on the operator. Nevertheless, internally the PI target value is used in percent. I.e. the following for-
NOTE
mula is used:
frequency reference [Hz]
PI target value [%] = • 100%
max. output frequency [Hz]
6-90
PI Feedback Input Methods

Select one of the following PI control feedback input methods
Input Method Setting Conditions
Set H3-09 (Analog Input A2 Function Selection) to B (PI feedback).

Analog input A2
(Default when PI control is enabled)
Analog input A1 Set H3-09 to 16. Analog input A1 becomes the feedback 1 input and the analog input
(Differential Mode) A2 becomes the feedback 2 input.
If H3-09 is set to 16, the PI differential mode is activated. Both analog inputs (A1 and A2) become feedback
inputs and the difference between both (A1 - A2) becomes the feedback value for the PI controller. The moni-
tor U1-24 becomes the feedback 1 monitor, U1-53 becomes the feedback 2 monitor.
In PI differential mode the PI target value can be set using parameter b5-07 (PI offset or PI differential set-
point).
PI Adjustment Examples
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce Proportional gain (P), and increase integral time (I).
Response Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition

To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration

If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, lengthen the integral time (I) to sup-
press the vibration.
After adjustment
Time
6-91
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If short cycle vibration occurs reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PI delay time constant.
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
• Parameter b5-04 is used to prevent the calculated integral value from exceeding a specified amount and so
from saturated control. Otherwise, when the load varies rapidly the Inverter response is delayed and the
machine might be damaged or the motor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value to speed up Inverter
response.
• Parameter b5-06 is used to prevent the output value of the PI control calculation from exceeding a speci-
fied amount.
• Parameter b5-07 is used to adjust the PI control offset. It is added to the PI output value. When differential
PI feedback is selected (H3-09=16) parameter b5-07 becomes the PI Setpoint it is added to the difference
between both feedback values.
• Set the filter time constant for the PI control output in b5-08 to prevent machinery resonance when
machinery friction is great or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the constant to a higher value than the reso-
nance frequency oscillation period. Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness.
• Parameter b5-09, the PI output polarity can be inverted. If now the PI target value increases the output fre-
quency will be lowered. This function is usable e.g. for vacuum pumps.
• Parameter b5-10 a gain can be applied to the PI control output. Enable this parameter to adjust the amount
of compensation if the PI control output is added to the set frequency reference (b5-01 = 3).
• Parameter b5-11 can be used to determine what happens to the inverter output when the PI control output
is negative: Setting 0 will limit the PI control output to 0 while setting 1 will allow negative output values.
When b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 or 3 (revers is disabled), however, the PI output
is limited to 0.
• Parameter b5-17 sets an accel./decel. ramp that raises/lowers the PI setpoint gradually (PI soft starter).
The normally used accel./decel. function (C1- parameters) is allocated after PI control so that, depend-
ing on the settings, resonance with the PI control and hunting in the machinery may occur. Using b5-17
this behaviour can be prevented.
The PI soft starter function can also be disabled or enabled using a digital input (H1- = 34).
6-92
Frequency Reference / PI Target
D1-04 Frequency Reference
using multi-step
Sleep function
command
D1-02 2 selection b5-21
1 + RUN
b1-01 b5-16
0 - on/off
4 Delay
D1-01 Frequency reference b5-01=0 Timer
(U1-01) b5-15
3 Enable / Disable reverse operation Sleep
Option Card when PI output is negative Level
PI Control Block
Serial Com Scaling Sleep Function

2 PI SFS cancel b5-01=3
o1-03 Upper limit
H1-xx=34
Fmax x109%
1 0 1 1 +
b5-01=1 OFF 0
PI Differential Output
Fdbk. H3-09=16 0 + frequency
PI SFS b5-11 SFS
b5-17 PI control is OFF under the following ON 1 Lower limit 0
Terminal A1 conditions: Sleep function
1 0 - b5-01=0 selection b5-21
PI Differential Upper limit
- During JOG command is input 2 0 or 1
Fdbk. H3-09=16 Fmax x109%
- H1-xx=19 and the terminal status is
+ PI
ON b5-23
PI Target - Snooze
Delay
1 0 Scaling & Units b5-22 Timer
MEMOBUS Reg. 06H b5-20 Lower limit
PI Set Point PI Snooze Level
PI target value Reg. 0Fh, bit 1 b5-31 Fmax x109%
(U1-38)
PI Snooze Function
b5-20 1 0 PI Input
Constant b5-19 (U1-36)
b5-31
b5-18
Scaling &
Units
PI SFS cancel PI Input

The following diagram shows the PI control block in the Inverter.
H1-xx=34 Caracteristic I - limit

I-time PI delay time PI Output
H1-xx=35 b5-04
Fig 6.57 PI Control Block Diagram

1 b5-03
+ 0 b5-08 Gain
0 + 0 + + 0 +
P 1/t 1/t b5-10
PI Feedback 0 - Z-1 + Z-1 +
PI SFS Proportional 1 1
1 1
0 b5-17 gain Z-1
PI Limit
PI Output
b5-02 Integral Hold Integral Reset b5-06
Terminal A1 Characteristic
H1-xx=31 H1-xx=30
1 PI Feedback b5-09
PI Differential (U1-24) 1 0
Fdbk. H3-09=16 Scaling & PI Differential
b5-20 1 0
Units Fdbk. H3-09=16
b5-31 Sleep function
b5-28 1 0 H3-09=16 selection b5-21 b5-07 b5-30
0 PI Snooze Function
+ 1 0 + 2
Terminal A2 + PI PI offset
1 - +
1 b5-29 0 or 1 - Wake Up
H3-09=B, 16 0 0 1 PI Differential b5-24 PI output monitor
P
Fdbk. H3-09=16 PI Wake Up Level (U1-37)
PI Feedback 2 PI Differential
(U1-53) Fdbk. H3-09=16 PI offset
(b5-07)
6-93
PI Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PI control be sure to use the PI feedback loss detection function. Otherwise, when the PI
feedback gets lost, the Inverter output frequency may accelerate the motor to the maximum output frequency.
When b5-12 is set to 1 and the PI feedback value falls below the PI feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for a
time longer than the PI feedback loss detection time (b5-14) a Fbl alarm (Feedback loss) will be displayed on
the Digital Operator display and inverter operation is continued.
When the same happens and b5-12 is set to 2 a Fbl fault will be displayed on the display of the Digital Opera-
tor and the inverter operation will be stopped. The motor coasts to stop and the fault relay is operated.
The PI feedback loss function can be disabled by setting b5-12 to 0.
The time chart for PI feedback loss detection is shown below.
PI feedback value
Loss detection
level
(b5-13)
Time
No Fbl
detection
Fbl detection
Loss detection time Loss detection time’

(b5-14) (b5-14)
Fig 6.58 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PI Sleep Function
The PI sleep function can be used in two different modes which depends on the setting of b5-21.
If b5-21 is set to 0, the frequency reference/PI target value is the input value for the sleep function. If b5-21 is
set to 1, the output frequency before the softstarter (SFS input) is becomes the sleep function input value.
If this value falls below the sleep level b5-15 for a longer time than the sleep operation delay time b5-16, the
inverter output will be stopped. If the value comes back to a value higher than b5-15 for a time longer than b5-
16, the inverter will resume operation. See also following timing chart.
PI output/SFS input
Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation Sleep operation

delay time delay time
Internal run command

Operation Stopped
External run command Run command has been input
Operation status output
Operating
Fig 6.59 PI Sleep Timing Chart
The functionality of the sleep function is also available with deactivated PI controller.
6-94
PI Snooze Function
By setting b5-21 to 2 the PI snooze function can be enabled. This software observes the PI feedback value and
the output frequency (Softstarter output) to switch the Inverter ON and OFF automatically as the system
requires.
• Snooze Activation
The inverter stops operation when the output frequency (Softstarter output) falls below the snooze level
b5-22 for a time longer than the snooze delay time b5-23 and when the feedback value is above the snooze
feedback value in b5-27. Before stopping the inverter finally, the PI setpoint can be boosted up to tempo-
rarily over-satisfy the load and thereby to avoid a short cycle ON and OFF switching of the inverter. The
boost level is set in parameter b5-25 and it is set as percentage of the PI setpoint value, but the maximum
time for boost operation is set in b5-26.
• Wake up
The inverter resumes the normal PI operation when the PI feedback falls below the wake up level b5-24.
The normal acceleration ramp is used.
PI Setpoint
Setpoint Boost (b5-25)
time
PI Feedback PI Setpoint + b5-25
Snooze Feedback Level (b5-27)

Wake-Up Level (b5-24) time
SFS Output Freq.
Snooze Delay normal

t < b5-23 (b5-23) decel.
ramp normal
Snooze Level
accel.
(b5-22)
ramp
time
Normal PI operation Boost Snooze Normal PI

operation
Fig 6.60 PI Snooze Time Chart
Using the parameter b5-21 either sleep operation or snooze operation can be enabled. It is impossible to
NOTE enable both functions at the same time.
6-95
Square Root Feedback Operation
If parameter b5-28 is set to 1 the feedback value is converted into a value that equals the square root of the
actual feedback. This can be used for example to control the flow rate when a pressure sensor is used to gener-
ate a feedback value. With parameter b5-29 the square root can be multiplied with a factor. Following formula
applies:
flow rate = gain (b5-29) × pressure (head)
So linear connection between the PI target value and the feedback can be realized.
With parameter b5-30 also the feedback monitor can be switched to show a square root value of the actual
feedback.
Scaling of PI Parameters and Monitors with Units

The PI parameter b5-19 and the monitor parameters U1-24 and U1-38 can be scaled using parameter b5-20.
Following setting can be applied:
0: 0.01 Hz units (default setting
1: 0.01% (Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: rotation per minute (rpm) (Sets the motor poles)
40 to 39999: User desired display. Sets the maximum setting displayed using the setting rule in Fig 6.61
Set the display at maximum fre-

quency excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits displayed

the decimal point.
Fig 6.61 PI Scaling Setting Rule
Example: When the max. PI value should be 200.0, set 12000: 2000 for the maximum display and 1 for the
one digit behind the decimal point
Additional to the scaling also units can be displayed if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used.
The units are defined by parameter b5-31 and following units are available:
Setting
Value
8 Bar: Bar Bar
9 Pa: Pascal Pa
11 Mtr: Meters Mtr
6-96
Multifunction Digital Input Settings: H1-01 to H1-05 (Terminal S3 to S7)
PI Control Disable: 19
• When a multi-function digital input is set for this function it can be used to disable the PI function by
switching the input to ON.
• The PI target value becomes the frequency reference value.
PI Control Integral Reset: 30

• Using this function the integral value of the PI control can be reset by setting a multi-function digital input
to ON.
• It will remain at 0 as long as the input is ON.
PI Control Integral Hold: 31

• Using this function the integral share value of the PI control can be hold by setting a multi-function digital
input to ON. The value will be hold as long as the input is ON.
PI Soft Starter Disable: 34

• To disable the PI soft starter temporarily switch ON the multi-function digital input.
PI Input Characteristic Switch: 35

• Using this function the PI input characteristic can be inverted by switching the multi-function digital input
ON.
6-97
Energy-saving
When the Energy Saving Function is activated the output voltage is automatically lowered to run the motor at
maximum efficiency.
Related Parameters
Change
Name During
Operation
b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection 0 or 1 0 No A

0.0 to *1
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient No A
655.00
b8-05 Power detection filter time constant 0 to 2000 20 msec No A
b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter 0 to 100 0% No A
*1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity
Adjusting Energy-saving Control

• To enable the energy saving function, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. The default setting
is 0 (disabled).
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is preset assuming that motor and inverter capacity are the same. Adjust
b8-04 in steps of 5 % until the output power reaches its minimum. The higher the energy-saving coeffi-
cient, the higher is the output voltage.
• To improve the responsiveness when the load fluctuates reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-
05. If b8-05 is set too small the motor rotations may become unstable under light load conditions.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently the motor efficiency has to be controlled. To have optimized efficiency, the search operation varies
the output voltage. Parameter b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) limits the range for the voltage
search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, a range of 100% is equal to 200 V and for 400 V Class Invert-
ers a range of 100% is equal to 400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation voltage limiter.
6-98
Setting Motor Parameters
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0.32 to 1.90 A
E2-01 Motor rated current No Q
6.40 *1 *2
0.00 to
E2-03 Motor no-load current 1.2 A *2 No A
1.89 *3
0.000
9.842 Ω
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance to *2 No A
65.000
*3. The setting range is 0.00 A to (E1-01 - 0.01 A).
Manual Setting of the Motor Parameter
Motor Rated Current Setting

Set E2-01 to the rated current value on the motor nameplate.
Motor No-Load Current Setting

Parameter E2-03 is measured automatically during motor line-to-line resistance auto-tuning. When auto-tun-
ing can not be performed consult the motor manufacturer for the motor no-load current value.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting

Parameter E2-05 is measured automatically during motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When auto-tuning
can not be performed, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resis-
tance from the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula and then make
the setting accordingly.
• E-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test report] × 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 75°C of test repor]t × 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type insulation: [Line-to line resistance (Ω) at 115°C of test report] × 0.87 (Ω)
6-99
Setting the V/f Pattern
Using the E1- parameters the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern can be set as needed. It is not rec-
ommended to change the settings when the motor is used in open loop vector control mode.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
155 to
E1-01 Input voltage setting 200 V*1 No Q
255*1
E1-03 V/f pattern selection 0 to F, FF F No A
0.0 to
E1-04 Max. output frequency (FMAX) 50.0 Hz No A
200.0
0.0 to
E1-05 Max. output voltage (VMAX) 200.0 V*1 No A
255.0*1
0.0 to
E1-06 Base frequency (FA) 50.0 Hz No A
200.0
0.0 to
E1-07 Mid. output frequency (FB) 2.5 Hz No A
200.0
0.0 to
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage (VB) 15.0 V*1 No A
255*1
0.0 to
E1-09 Min. output frequency (FMIN) 1.2 Hz No A
200.0
0.0 to
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN) 9.0 V*1 No A
255.0*1
0.0 to
E1-11 Mid. output frequency 2
200.0 0.0 Hz*2 No A
0.0 to
E1-12 Mid. output frequency voltage 2 0.0 V*2 No A
255.0*1
0.0 to
E1-13 Base voltage (VBASE) 0.0 V No A
255.0*1
*2. Parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are disabled when set to 0.0
Setting Inverter Input Voltage

Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 so that it matches the power supply voltage. The set value
becomes a reference value for the stall prevention during deceleration and the overvoltage level according to
the table below.
Inverter Input Voltage Stall Prevention
OV Level
Voltage Class Setting E1-01 during Decel Level
200 V 200 V 410 VDC 377 VDC
O 400 V 720 VDC 662 VDC
400 V
P 400 V 820 VDC 754 VDC
Setting V/f Pattern

The V/f pattern can be selected using parameter E1-03. There are two methods of setting the V/f pattern:
Select one of the 15 preset pattern types (set value: 0 to E), or set a user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
6-100
Set
Characteristic Application Specifications
Value
0 (F) 50 Hz specifications
These patterns are used in general applica- 1 60 Hz specifications
Constant Torque tions where the load torque is fixed, regard- 60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
Characteristic less of rotation speed, e.g. for linear 2
50 Hz
transport systems.
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
3
60 Hz
50 Hz specifications, cubical torque charac-
4
teristic
50 Hz specifications, quadratic torque char-
These patterns are used for loads with 5
Variable torque acteristic
torque proportional to the square or cube of
characteristic 60 Hz specifications, cubical torque charac-
the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps. 6
teristic
60 Hz specifications, quadratic torque char-
7
acteristic
50 Hz specifications, medium startup
8
Select a high startup torque V/f pattern only torque
in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and 9 50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
High Startup
motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)
Torque*1 • A large torque is required at startup 60 Hz specifications, medium startup
A
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter torque
input or output.
B 60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at

This pattern is used for frequencies of C
60 Hz
60 Hz or higher. From the voltage satura-
Field Weakening 120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
tion point on (in the field weakening area) D
Operation 60 Hz
the output voltage is fixed to the maximum
output voltage. 180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
E
60 Hz
With this pattern the voltage and frequency
50 Hz specifications, without parameter
Without Limits values can be set to any desired value, with- FF
limits.
out limitations.
*1. Usually sufficient starting torque is provided by the torque compensation function (automatic torque boost at low speed)
When one of these patterns is selected the values of parameters E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically.
There are three different sets of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
6-101
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class Inverter. For a 400 V class Inverter, multiply all voltages
with 2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0 50 Hz Set Value 1 60 Hz Set Value 2 60 Hz Set Value 3 72 Hz
1.3 2.5 1.5 1.5 3 1.5 3
• Variable Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)

1.3 1.3 1.5 1.5
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to B)

Set Value 8 50 Hz Set Value 9 50 Hz Set Value A 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz
1.3 2.5 1.3 2.5 1.5 1.5
• Field Weakening Operation (Set Value: C to E)

Set Value C 90 Hz Set Value D 120 Hz Set Value E 180 Hz
1.5 1.5 1.5
6-102
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern

with 2.

• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)


6-103
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
with 2.

• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)


6-104
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern) parameters E1-04 to E1-10 can be set. If E1-03 is set
to anything other than F, parameters E1-04 to E1-13 can only be read. If the V/f characteristics are lin-
NOTE
ear, set E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 6.62 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points:
• Parameters E1-11 and E1-12 are set to 0.0 by default in all V/f patterns. If E1-03 is set to F they can be set
to obtain another point defining the V/f pattern.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-11 (FMID2) > E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
6-105
Motor Preheat Function
The motor preheat function can be used to prevent e.g. moisture inside the motor due to condensation. Two
different current levels are available. The preheat currents can be set in parameters b2-09 and b2-10 as a per-
centage of the Inverter rated current. Both functions are enabled by digital inputs. If the Drive Enable (H1-
=6A) or Bypass Drive Enable (H1- =70) function is used the motor preheat function 2 has to be used,
the preheat function 2 can then also be activated without enabling the drive.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
b2-09 Motor preheat current 1 0 to 100 0% No A
b2-10 Motor preheat current 2 0 to 10 5% No A

Set value Function
60 Motor preheat 1
80 Motor preheat 2
The time chart for motor preheat is shown below.

Motor preheat
RUN
Output
E1-09 b2-01
frequency
b2-03 b2-04
Output b2-02
current b2-09
Motor Motor
preheat preheat
Fig 6.63 Motor Preheat Function 1 Time Chart
6-106
(Bypass)
Drive Enable
Motor preheat
RUN
Output
E1-09 b2-01
frequency
b2-03 b2-04
Output b2-02
current b2-09
Motor Motor
preheat preheat
Fig 6.64 Motor Preheat Function 2 Time Chart
Setting Precautions
• If the Motor Preheat command 1 and the Motor Preheat Command 2 are set simultaneously an OPE3 alarm
will occur.
• If Motor Preheat command 1 and Drive Enable or Bypass Drive Enable are set simultaneously an OPE3
alarm will occur. Motor Preheat 2 has to be used instead.
• During motor preheat operation the Digital Operator display will show PRHT alarm.
6-107
Emergency Override Function
The emergency override function is used as a “smoke purge function. It will run the motor at the preset emer-
gency override speed or at AUTO frequency reference in forward or reverse direction. See Fig for a timing
chart.
Drive Enable*
Emergency Override
Run command
Emergency Override
Reference**
Output frequency
* Applies for Drive Enable (H1-xx=6A) or Bypass Drive Enable (H1-xx=70)

** Either b1-14 or AUTO reference, depending on b1-15 setting
Fig 6.65 Timing Chart for Emergency Override Function
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
0 to
b1-14 Emergency override speed 0.00 Hz No A
200.00
b1-15 Emergency override reference selection 0 or 1 0 No A

Set Value Function
81 Emergency override forward (ON: Emergency override in forward direction)
82 Emergency override reverse (ON Emergency in override in reverse direction)
Setting and Application Precautions

• An OPE3 alarm will occur when emergency override forward and emergency override reverse are pro-
grammed to digital inputs simultaneously.
• During emergency override the Digital Operator display will show OVRD alarm.
• When the HOA Digital Operator is used, the OFF key is disabled during Emergency Override if any of the
multi-function inputs are programmed to Drive Enable (H1-xx=6A) or Bypass Drive Enable (H1-xx=70),
in both HAND and AUTO Mode.
• If a RUN or jog input is closed but the Drive Enable / Bypass Drive Enabled input is open, the Inverter will
display a “DNE Drive not Enable” alarm and the STOP LED will blink. When the Emergency Override
input is closed, the alarm display will change to “OVRD Emergcy Override”, the RUN LED will turn ON
and the STOP LED will turn OFF again.
6-108
High Slip Braking

The High Slip Braking function can shorten the deceleration times without using a braking option for emer-
gency stops for example.
The function must be activated by a multifunction digital input.
Note the following:
• The HSB function is not comparable with the normal deceleration function. It does not use a ramp func-
tion.
• HSB should not be used at normal operation instead of a deceleration ramp.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
n3-01 High Slip braking deceleration frequency width 1 to 20 5% No A
100 to
n3-02 High Slip braking current limit 150% No A
200
0.0 to
n3-03 High Slip braking stop dwell time 1.0 sec. No A
10.0
30 to
n3-04 High Slip braking OL7 time 40 sec. No A
1200
Adjusting the HSB Deceleration Frequency Width (N3-01)

This parameter sets the step value (in percent of maximum output frequency) that is used for lowering the out-
put frequency to achieve a large negative slip and thereby to brake the motor.
Normally no adjustments should be necessary. Increase the value if DC bus overvoltage faults occur.
Adjusting the HSB Current Limit (N3-02)

The setting of parameter N3-02 limits the output current while high slip braking is active. The current limit
affects the achievable deceleration time. The parameter is set in percent of the motor rated current setting.
The lower the current limit the longer is the deceleration time.
Setting the HSB Dwell Time at Stop (N3-03)

At the end of a high slip braking the output frequency is held at the minimum output frequency for the time set
in N3-03. Increase the time if the motor coasts after HSB.
Setting the HSB Overload Time (N3-04)

N3-04 sets the HSB overload time. If the output frequency does not change for any reason although an HSB
command is given, an OL7 fault will be displayed and the fault relay will operate.
Activating High Slip Braking

If one of the multifunction inputs is set to “68” it can be used to activate the HSB function. The Inverter will
brake the motor immediately after the HSB command was given. As the HSB function is activated by the pos-
itive edge of digital input signal HSB cannot be stopped, i.e. normal inverter operation cannot be resumed.
6-109
Digital Operator Functions
Setting Digital Operator Functions
Related Parameters
Change
Parameter Setting Factory during Access
Name
Number Range Setting Opera- Level
tion
o1-01 Monitor selection*1 6 to 53 6 Yes A
o1-02 Monitor selection after power up 1 to 4 1 Yes A
0 to
o1-03 Digital operator display scaling 0 No A
39999
o1-09 Frequency reference display unit selection*2 0 to 11 0 No A
o2-01 LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable*3 0 or 1 1 No A
o2-02 STOP key during control circuit terminal operation*3 0 or 1 1 No A
o2-03 User parameter initial value 0 to 2 0 No A
o2-05 Frequency reference setting method selection 0 or 1 0 No A
Operation selection when digital operator is discon-
o2-06 0 or 1 0 No A
nected
0 to
o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting 0 hrs No A
65535
o2-08 Cumulative operation time selection 0 or 1 0 No A
o2-09 Initialize Mode 1 to 5 2 No A
0 to
o2-10 Fan operation time setting 0 hr. No A
65535
o2-12 Fault trace initialize 0 or 1 0 No A
o2-14 kWh monitor initialize 0 or 1 0 No A
o2-15 *4 0 or 1 0 No A
HAND Key function selection
*1. This parameter is effective only when the LED Digital Operator is used.
*2. Parameter function is only valid if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used (LCD or HOA Digital Operator).
*3. This parameter is effective only when the LED or LCD Digital Operator is used.
*4. This parameter is effective only when the HOA operator JVOP-162 is used
Monitor Selection (o1-01)

Using parameter o1-01 the third monitor item that is directly displayed in Drive Mode can be selected. This
parameter is only effective when the LED Digital Operator is used.
Monitor Display when the Power Supply is Turned ON (o1-02)

Using parameter o1-02 the monitor item (U1- ) that is displayed on the Digital Operator when the power
supply is turned ON can be selected.
6-110
Changing Frequency Reference Scaling (o1-03)

The frequency monitors can be scaled using parameter o1-03. The scaling will be applied to following monitor
items and parameters:
• U1-01 (Frequency reference)
• U1-02 (Output frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor speed)
• U1-20 (Output frequency after soft starter)
• d1-01 to d1-04 and d1-17 (Frequency references)
The following scaling settings can be applied:
0: 0.01 Hz units (default setting
1: 0.01% (Maximum output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39: rotation per minute (rpm) (Sets the motor poles)
40 to 39999: User desired display. Sets the maximum setting displayed using the setting rule in Fig 6.66
Set the display at maximum fre-

quency excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits displayed

the decimal point.
Fig 6.66 Frequency Scaling Setting Rule
Example: When the max. output frequency value should be 200.0, set 12000: 2000 for the maximum display
and 1 for the one digit behind the decimal point
Changing Frequency Reference Display Units (o1-09)

Additional to the scaling also units can be displayed if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used.
The units are defined by parameter o1-09 and following units are available:
Setting
Value
8 Bar: Bar Bar
9 Pa: Pascal Pa
11 Mtr: Meters Mtr
6-111
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key (o2-01)
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the LED or LCD Digital Operator.
If the key is disabled, it cannot be used anymore to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN
command source between Digital Operator and the settings in b1-01 and b1-02.
Disabling the STOP Key (o2-02)

This parameter is used to set whether the STOP key on the LED or LCD Digital Operator is active during
remote control (b1-02 ≠ 0) or not.
If o2-02 is set to 1 a STOP command from the operators STOP key will be accepted, the Inverter will stop
according to the method set in parameter b1-03 (Stopping method). If o2-02 is set to 0 it will be disregarded.
Initializing Changed Parameter Values (o2-03)

The current Inverter parameter setting values can be saved as user-set parameter values. Therefore parameter
o2-03 has to be set to 1.
To initialize the Inverter parameters using the user-set initial values in memory parameter A1-03 has to be set
to 1110. To clear the user-set initial values in memory set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key (o2-05)
This function is active when the frequency reference is input from any Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to
1 and the frequency reference is input via any Digital Operator the reference can be incremented or decre-
mented using the UP and DOWN keys directly, pressing the ENTER button is not necessary.
Operation Selection when the Digital Operator is Disconnected (o2-06)

Parameter o2-06 selects whether a fault is detected when the Digital Operator is disconnected from the
Inverter.
If o2-06 is set to 0 the operation is continued.
If o2-06 is set to 1 the output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop, the fault relay is operated and the
Digital Operator Display shows an OPR fault when reconnected.
Cumulative Operation Time (o2-07 and o2-08)

The Inverter counts its operation time cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-07 the cumulative operation time can be changed, e.g. after a replacement of the control
board. If parameter o2-08 is set to 0 the inverter counts the time whenever the power supply is switched ON. If
o2-08 is set to 1 the time when a RUN command is active is counted only. The factory setting is 1.
Cooling Fan Operation Time (o2-10)

This function counts the operating time of the inverter mounted fan cumulatively.
Using parameter o2-10 the counter can be reset, e.g. when the fan was replaced.
Fault Trace Initialize (o2-12)

This function can be used to initialize the fault trace by setting parameter o2-12 to 1. All previously stored
faults are deleted.
Energy Monitor Initialize (o2-14)

This function can be used to initialize the energy monitor by setting parameter o2-14 to 1.
6-112
HAND Key Function Selection (o2-15)

With this parameter the HAND key can be enabled by setting parameter o2-15 to 1. The factory setting is 0,
HAND key disabled. The parameter is effective only, if the optional HOA Digital Operator is used.
Standard / IP54 Selection (o2-17)

This parameter selects whether the Inverter is of protection class IP00 / NEMA 1 / IP20 (setting 0) or IP54
(setting 1). Whenever an Inverter in protection IP54 class is used o2-17 has to be set to 1. This switches the
carrier frequency and temperature limit parameters to appropriate values.
Copying Parameters
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using a built-in EEPROM
• Store 1 Inverter parameter set in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write 1 Inverter parameter set from the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare 1 Inverter parameter set stored in the Digital Operator with the Inverter parameters settings
(VERIFY)
Related Parameters
Change
Param-
eter Name Description
Number
tion
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
o3-01 Copy function selection 0 to 3 0 No A
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0: READ prohibited
o3-02 Read permitted selection 0 or 1 0 No A
1: READ permitted
Refer to the following pages for the procedures for using the copy function.
6-113
Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator use the following method.
Step Digital Operator Display
Explanation
No. LED Digital Operator LCD/HOA Digital Operator
-ADV-
** Main Menu ** Press the MENU key until the Advanced Pro-
1
Programming gramming Mode is reached.
-ADV-
Initialization
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Func-
2 A1 - 00=1 tion Selection Display in Advanced Program-
Select Language ming Mode.
-ADV-
COPY Function
Scroll to parameter o3-01 (Copy Function
3 o3 - 01=0 Selection) using the Increment key and Decre-
Copy Funtion Sel ment key.
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the
4 o3-01= 0 *0* Parameter Setting Display.
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel Change the set value to 1 using the Increment
5 o3-01= 1 *0* key.
INV OP READ
-ADV-
READ Press the DATA/ENTER key. The READ func-
6
INV OP READING tion will start.
-ADV-
READ
READ COMPLETE When the READ function is completed “End”
respectively “Read Complete” is displayed on
7 the Digital Operator for appr. 1 second. Then
-ADV- the display returns to the Monitor Display and
Copy Function Sel parameter o1-03 is automatically reset to 0.
o3 - 01=0 *0*
COPY SELECT
If a fault is displayed press any key to clear the fault display and return to the o3-01 display. Fault displays and
their meanings are shown below.
Select READ Prohibited

This function prevents overwriting of the data that are stored in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator. When
o3-02 is set to 0 and o3-01 is set to 1 to perform a write operation PrE will be displayed on the Digital Opera-
tor and the write operation will be stopped.
If it is safe to overwrite the parameter set stored in the Digital Operator set o3-02 to 1 and start the READ
function again by setting o3-01 to 1.
6-114
Writing Parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, use the following method.
Explanation
-ADV-
1
-ADV-
Initialization
Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Func-
2 A1 - 00 = 1 tion Selection Display in Advanced Program-
-ADV-
COPY Function Scroll to parameter o3-01 (Copy Function
3 o3 - 01 = 0 Selection) using the Increment key and Decre-
-ADV-
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel Change the set value to 2 using the Increment
5 o3-01= 2 *0* key.
OP INV WRITE
-ADV-
COPY Press the DATA/ENTER key. The COPY func-
6
OP INV COPYING tion will start.
-ADV-
COPY
COPY COMPLETE If the COPY function is completed “End”
respectively “Copy Complete” is displayed on
7 the Digital Operator. Then the display returns to
-ADV- the Monitor Display and parameter o1-03 is
Copy Function Sel automatically reset to 0.
o3 - 01 =0 *0*
COPY SELECT
If a fault is displayed press any key to clear the fault display and return to the o3-01 display. Fault displays and
their meanings are shown on the following page.
6-115
Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values, use the following method.
Explanation
-ADV-
1
-ADV-
Initialization Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the Func-
2 A1 - 00 = 1 tion Selection Display in Advanced Program-
-ADV-
COPY Function Scroll to Parameter o3-01 (Copy Function
3 o3 - 01=0 Selection) using the Increment key and Decre-
-ADV-
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel Change the set value to 3 using the Increment
5 o3-01= 3 *0* key.
OP INV VERIFY
-ADV-
VERIFY Press the DATA/ENTER key. The VERIFY
6
DATA VERIFYING function will start.
-ADV-
VERIFY
When the VERIFY function is completed
VERIFY COMPLETE “End” respectively “Verify Complete is dis-
played on the Digital Operator for appr. 1 sec-
7
ond. Then the display returns to the Monitor
-ADV-
Copy Function Sel
Display and parameter o1-03 is automatically
reset to 0.
o3 - 01 = 0 *0*
COPY SELECT
If an fault is displayed, press any key to cancel the fault display and return to the o3-01 display. Fault displays
and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7, Digital Operator Copy Function Faults.)
When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage
6-116
Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator

If A1-01 is set to 0 only the parameters A1-01 and A1-04 are displayed and can be set, U1- , U2- and
U3- are displayed.
If A1-01 is set to 1 only the parameters A1-01, A1-04 and A2- are displayed and can be set, U1- , U2-
and U3- are displayed.
If A1-01 is set to 2 all parameters are displayed and can be set.
When the parameter write enable function is programmed to one of the multi-function digital inputs (H1-
=1B) all parameters are write protected as long as this digital input is switched OFF. The moment it is
switched ON the parameters can be changed.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
A1-01 Parameter access level 0 to 2 2 Yes A

Set Value Function
1B Parameters write enable
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, and if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, the settings of
parameters A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32 can not be modified.
The setting of all parameters except A1-00 can be prohibited by using the password function in combination
with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only): As long as A1-04 does not match A1-05 parameter A1-01 can not be
changed.
To set a password parameter A1-05 has to be accessed in following way:
Scroll to A1-04, hold the Shift/RESET key pressed and press the MENU key additional. A1-05 will be dis-
played and the Setting Display can be entered.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
A1-01 Parameter access level 0 to 2 2 Yes A
0 to
A1-04 Password 0 No A
9999
0 to
A1-05 Password setting 0 No A
9999
6-117
Displaying User-set Parameters Only
The A2 parameters (user-set parameters) and A1-01 (parameter access level) can be used to establish a param-
eter set that contains only the most important parameters.
Set the of the parameters to which A2-01 to A2-32 should refer to and then set A1-01 to 1. In Advanced Pro-
gramming Mode now only the parameters assigned to A2-01 to A2-32 are displayed and can be changed.
Related Parameters
Change
Name during
Operation
A2-01 b1-01
to User-set parameters to – No A
A2-32 o3-02
6-118
7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for Inverter and motor problems.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions..................................7-2

Troubleshooting ...............................................................7-15
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection, alarm
detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault relay operates, and the Inverter output is switched OFF causing the
motor to coast to stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults.) A fault code is displayed on the
Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify the fault and to correct the causes.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function digital input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and switch the input ON.
• Press the Shift/RESET key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
• To reset a fault it is necessary to witch OFF the RUN command.
Table 7.1 Fault Detection
Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Shorted Inverter output phase-to- • Remove the motor and run
phase, shorted motor, locked the Inverter without motor
rotor, load too heavy, accel/decel • Check the motor for a phase
Overcurrent
time too short, contactor on the to phase short.
The Inverter’s output current
Inverter output has opened or • Check the Inverter for a
exceeded the overcurrent detec-
closed, a special motor or a motor phase to phase short at the
OC tion level.
with a rated current larger than output.
Over Current the Inverter’s output current is • Verify the accel/decel time
used. settings
• Remove the motor and run
Ground Fault
the Inverter without motor.
The ground fault current at the
One Inverter output was shorted • Check the motor for a phase
Inverter output exceeded approxi-
to ground and/or a DCCT is to ground short.
mately 50% of the Inverter rated
GF defective. • Check the output current
output current and L8-09=1
Ground Fault with a clampmeter to verify
(Ground fault detection enabled)
the DCCT reading.
DC Bus Fuse Blown
The fuse in the main circuit is • Check the motor and motor
open. cables for short circuits or
Warning: Shorted Inverter output and/or insulation failures (phase to
Never run the Inverter after damaged IGBTs phase
PUF replacing the DC bus fuse with- • Replace the Inverter after
DC Bus Fuse Open out checking for shorted compo- correcting the cause.
nents
• Increase the deceleration
• The deceleration time is too
DC Bus Overvoltage time settings (C1-02/04/09)
short and the regenerative
The DC bus voltage has exceeded or connect a braking option.
energy from the motor is too
the overvoltage detection level. • Check the power supply
large.
OV Refer to page 6-100 for the OV voltage and decrease the
• The power supply voltage is
DC Bus Overvolt detection level. voltage to meet the
too high.
Inverter’s specification.
7-2

DC Bus Undervoltage
The DC bus voltage is below the • The voltage fluctuations of the
Undervoltage Detection Level power supply are too high.
(L2-05). The default settings are: • A momentary power loss has • Check the input voltage.
200 V class: 190 VDC occurred. • Check the wiring of the
400V class: 380VDC • The terminal screws of the input terminals.
input power supply are loose. • Increase the accel time set-
Main Circuit MC Operation • An open-phase error occurred tings C1-01/03.
Failure at the input terminals. • In case of Main Circuit MC
The MC stopped responding dur- • The acceleration time is set too Operation Failure replace
UV1 ing Inverter operation. (Applica- short. the Inverter.
DC Bus Undervolt ble Inverter Capacities • A fault occurred in the inrush
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW current prevention circuit.
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
Control Power Supply An external load at the control • Remove all connections to
Undervoltage terminals was pulling down the the control terminals and
Undervoltage of the control cir- Inverter’s power supplies or there cycle the power to the
UV2 cuit while the Inverter was run- was an internal short in the Inverter.
CTL PS Undervolt ning. power/gate drive board. • Replace the Inverter.
Inrush Current Prevention Circuit
Fault
An overheating of the charging
resistor for the DC bus capacitors
occurred.
The contactor of the inrush cur- • Cycle the power to the
rent prevention circuit is defec- Inverter.
The MC of the charging circuit
tive. • Replace the Inverter
did not respond 10 sec. after the
UV3 MC ON signal has been output.
MC Answerback (Applicable Inverter Capacities:
200 V class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V class: 75 to 300 kW)
• An open-phase occurred in the
input power supply.
• A momentary power loss
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
occurred.
An unusual big ripple on the DC
• The wiring terminals for the • Tighten the input terminal
bus voltage has been detected.
input power supply are loose. screws
Only detected when L8-05=1, the
• The voltage fluctuations in the • Replace the Inverter
detection level is set by L8-06
PF input power supply are too
(refer to page 6-48)
Input Phase Loss high.
• The voltage balance between
the phases is bad.
Heatsink Overheat
The temperature of the Inverter's • The ambient temperature is too
cooling fin exceeded the setting high. • Check for dirt build-up on
in L8-02 while L8-03 = 0 to 2. • There is a heat source nearby. the fans or heatsink.
• The Inverter's cooling fan(s) • Install a cooling unit.
stopped. • Remove the heat source.
OH • The Inverter's internal cooling • Replace the cooling fan(s)
Inverter's Cooling Fan Stopped
Heatsink Overtemp fan has stopped and L8-32=1
Heatsink Overheat • The ambient temperature is too

The temperature of the Inverter’s high. • Check for dirt build-up on
heatsink exceeded 105 °C • There is a heat source nearby. the fans or heatsink.
• The Inverter's cooling fan(s) • Install a cooling unit.
stopped. • Remove the heat source.
OH1
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Stopped • The Inverter's internal cooling • Replace the cooling fan(s)
Heatsnk MAX Temp
fan has stopped.and L8-32=1
7-3
Motor Overheat • Check the cycle time and
Detected when the level at A2, the size of the load.
Overheating of the motor has
programmed for motor tempera- • Check the accel/decel times
been measured by the motor ther-
ture (thermistor input, H3-09=E), (C1- ).
OH3 mistor.
exceeds 1.17 V for the time L1- • Check the V/f pattern
Motor Overheat 1
05 and L1-03 = 0 to 2. (E1- )
Motor Overheat • Check the cycle time and

Detected when the level at A2, the size of the load.
Overheating of the motor has
programmed for motor tempera- • Check the accel/decel times
ture (thermistor input, H3-09=e), (C1- ).
mistor.
OH4 exceeds 2.34 V for the time L1- • Check the V/f pattern
Motor Overheat 4 05. (E1- )
• The load is too large. The

• Check the cycle time, the
Motor Overload acceleration time, deceleration
size of the load and the
Detected when L1-01 = 1 to 3 and time and cycle time are too
accel/decel time settings
the Inverter’s output current short.
(C1- ).
exceeded the motor overload • The voltage settings of the V/f
• Check the setting of the V/f
curve. pattern is incorrect for the
OL1 pattern (E1- ).
Refer to page 6-33 for parameter application
Motor Overload • Check the setting of Motor
settings. • The setting of the Motor Rated
Rated Current (E2-01)
Current (E2-01) is incorrect.
• Check the cycle time, the
• The load is too large. The size of the load and the
acceleration time, deceleration accel/decel time settings
Inverter Overload time and cycle time are too (C1- ).
The internally calculated I²t value short. • Check the setting of the V/f
(based on the Inverter rated cur- • The voltage settings of the V/f pattern (E1- ).
rent) has exceeded its detection pattern is incorrect for the • Check the setting of Motor
level. application Rated Current (E2-01)
OL2
• The capacity of the Inverter is • Check if the Inverter rated
Inv Overload
too small current matches the motor
rated current.
Overload Detection • Ensure the values in L6-02
Inverter’s output current and L6-03 are appropriate
exceeded L6-02 for longer then Motor was overloaded • Check the application/
OL3 the time set in L6-03 and L6- machine status to eliminate
Overtorque Det 1 01=3 or 4. fault.
High Slip Braking OL

• Make sure the load is an
The output frequency stayed con-
The inertia of the load is too inertial load.
stant for longer than the time set
large. • If possible, reduce the load
OL7 in n3-04 during High Slip Brak-
inertia
HSB OL ing.
• Make sure that the settings

Loss of Load Detection
in L6-02 and L6-03 are
Inverter’s output current was
appropriate.
below L6-02 for longer then the Motor lost its load
• Check the mechanical sys-
LL3 time set in L6-03 and
tem (mechanical connection
Loss of Load Det L6-01= 7 or 8.
of the load, e.g. belt).
PI Feedback Lost
This fault occurs when PI feed-
• Check the PI feedback sig-
back loss detection is pro- PI feedback source (e.g. trans-
nal source for correct opera-
grammed to fault (b5-12 = 2) and ducer, sensor, building automa-
tion.
the PI feedback fell below the PI tion signal) is not installed
• Check the wiring of the PI
FBL Feedback Loss Detection Level correctly or is not working
feedback signal.
Feedback Loss (b5-13) for the PI Feedback Loss
Detection Time (b5-14)
7-4

• Check for an external fault
External fault input from Com- An external fault condition was condition
munications Option Card present, input from a communica- • Verify the parameters
EF0 (F6-03=1 to 2) tion option card. • Verify communication sig-
External Fault nals
External fault at terminal S3

EF3
Ext Fault S3

EF4
Ext Fault S4
An "external fault" was input

Remove the cause of the
External fault at terminal S5 from a multi-function input ter-
EF5 external fault.
minal (S3 to S7).
Ext Fault S5

EF6
Ext Fault S6

EF7
Ext Fault S7
Digital Operator Connection

Fault The Digital Operator has been • Check the connection to the
OPR Detected when the Digital Opera- disconnected from the Inverter. Digital Operator.
Oper Disconnect tor is removed and if o2-06 = 1.
MEMOBUS Communication
Fault
Detected when control data was Connection is broken and/or the • Check the connections and
not received correctly for 2 sec- master has stopped the communi- all user-side software con-
CE onds and H5-04=0 to 3 and H5- cation. figurations.
Memobus Com Err 05=1.
Option Communication Fault

Connection is broken and/or the • Check the connections and
After initial communication was
master as stopped the communi- al user-side software con-
BUS established, the connection was
cation. figurations.
Option Com Err lost.
Digital Operator Communication
• Disconnect the Digital
Fault 1
Operator and then connect it
Communication with the Digital • The Digital Operator's cable
again.
Operator could not be established was not securely connected.
• Replace the Inverter.
within 5 seconds after the power • Digital Operator is defective.
CPF00 • Cycle the Inverter power
was supplied to the Inverter. • Control board is defective
COM- supply.
ERR(OP&INV) • Replace the Inverter.
CPU External RAM Fault
• Disconnect the Digital
Digital Operator Communication
Operator and then connect it
Fault 2 • The Digital Operator's cable
again.
After communication with the was not securely connected.
Digital Operator was established • Digital Operator is defective.
CPF01 • Cycle the Inverter power
the communication stopped for 2 • Control board is defective
COM- supply.
seconds or more.
ERR(OP&INV) • Replace the Inverter.
7-5
Baseblock Circuit Fault

Gate array hardware failure at
A baseblock circuit error
CPF02 power-up.
occurred at power-up.
BB Circuit Err
Noise or spikes was on the con-

EEPROM Fault
trol circuit input terminals or the
CPF03 Checksum is not valid.
control board is damaged.
EEPROM Error

CPU Internal A/D Converter
Fault
CPF04 control board is damaged.
Internal A/D Err

CPU External A/D Converter
Fault
CPF05 control board is damaged.
External A/D Err
• The Option Card is not con- • Try to initialize the Inverter.

nected properly. • Cycle the Inverter
Option Card Connection Error power.supply.
• The Inverter or Option Card is
CPF06 • Replace the Inverter.
faulty.
Option Error
ASIC Internal RAM Fault The control circuit is damaged.

CPF07
RAM-Err
Watchdog Timer Fault The control circuit is damaged.

CPF08
WAT-Err
CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis

The control circuit is damaged.
Fault
CPF09
CPU-Err
ASIC Version Fault The control circuit is damaged.

CPF10
ASIC-Err
• Turn off the power and re-
install the option board.
• Remove all inputs from the
• The Option Card is not con-
option board.
Communications Option Card nected properly.
• Try to initialize the Inverter.
A/D Converter Fault • The Option Card's A/D con-
• Cycle the power to the
verter is faulty.
CPF20 Inverter.
Option A/D Error • Replace the Option Board.
7-6


Self-Diagnosis Fault of Option
CPF21 Board
control board is damaged. • Turn off the power and re-
Option CPU Down install the option board.
• Remove all inputs from the
Option Board Code Number Unrecognizable option board is option board.
CPF22 Fault connected to the control board. • Try to initialize the Inverter.
Option Type Err • Cycle the power to the
Inverter.
An option board was not cor-
• Replace the Option Board.
rectly connected to the control
Option Board Interconnection • Replace the Inverter.
board or an option board that was
CPF23 Fault
not made for the Inverter is
Option DPRAM Err
attached to the control board.
7-7
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault relay output. The sys-
tem will automatically return to its original status when the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display and the Alarm LED flashes and the alarm can be output at the multi-function out-
puts (H2-01 or H2-02). As long as the Inverter remains in Alarm status it can not be started and will not accept
parameter changes.
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.2 Alarm Content
Forward/Reverse Run Com-
mands Input Together
(flashing) Both the forward and the reverse The external forward and reverse Check external sequence
run commands are input simulta- command were input simulta- logic, so only one input is
EF
neously for 500 msec or more. neously. received at a time.
External Fault
This alarm will decelerate the
(flashing)
motor stop
• The voltage fluctuations of the
power supply are too high.
• A momentary power loss has
occurred. • Check the input voltage.
DC Bus Undervoltage
• The terminal screws of the • Check the wiring of the
(flashing) The DC bus voltage is below the
input power supply are loose. input terminals.
Undervoltage Detection Level
• An open-phase error occurred • In case of Main Circuit MC
(L2-05). The default settings are:
at the input terminals. Operation Failure replace
200 V class: 190 VDC
• The acceleration time is set too the Inverter.
400 V class: 380 VDC
short. • Remove all connections to
The MC of the inrush current pre-
• A fault occurred in the inrush the control terminals and
vention circuit opened.
UV current prevention circuit. cycle the power to the
The control power supply voltage
DC Bus Undervolt • An external load at the control Inverter.
was below the CUV level.
(flashing) terminals was pulling down the • Replace the Inverter.
Inverter’s power supplies or
there was an internal short in
the power/gate drive board.
DC Bus Overvoltage
The DC bus voltage exceeded the
(flashing) overvoltage detection level. Check the power supply and
The power supply voltage is too
Refer to page 6-100 for the OV decrease the voltage to meet
OV high.
detection level. the Inverter’s specifications
DC Bus Overvolt OV Alarm is only detected when
(flashing) the drive is in a stopped condition
• The ambient temperature is too

Heatsink Overheat Alarm • Check for dirt build-up on
(flashing) high.
The temperature of the Inverter's the fans or heatsink.
• There is a heat source nearby.
cooling fin exceeded the setting • Install a cooling unit.
• The Inverter cooling fan(s) has
in L8-02 while L8-03 = 3 • Remove the heat source.
OH stopped.
Heatsnk Overtmp
(flashing)
Motor Overheat Alarm

Detected when the level at A2, • Check for dirt build-up on
(flashing) Overheating of the motor has
programmed for motor tempera- the fans or heatsink.
ture (thermistor input, H3-09=E), • Install a cooling unit.
OH3 mistor.
exceeds 1.17 V for the time L1- • Remove the heat source.
Motor Overheat 1 05 and L1-03 = 3
(flashing)
7-8

• Ensure that the values in
Overload Detection
L6-02 and L6-03 are appro-
(flashing) The Inverter’s output current
priate
exceeded L6-02 for longer than Motor was overloaded
OL3 • Check the application/
the time set in L6-03 and
Overtorque Det.1 machine status to eliminate
L6-01 = 1 or 2.
(flashing) the fault.
• Make sure that the settings
Loss of Load Detection
in L6-02 and L6-03 appro-
(flashing) Inverter’s output current was
priate
below L6-02 for longer then the Motor lost its load
• Check the application/
LL3 time set in L6-03 and L6-01=5 or
machine status to eliminate
Loss of Load Det 6.
the alarm.
• Check for an external fault
External Fault Input from Com- An external fault condition was condition.
(flashing) munication Option Card (Alarm present, input from a communica- • Verify the parameter set-
EF0 only) tion option card while F6-03 is tings.
Opt External Flt (F6-03=3) set to Alarm only. • Verify communication sig-
(flashing) nals.
(flashing) External fault at terminal S3

EF3 (Alarm only)
Ext Fault S3
(flashing)

EF4 (Alarm only)
Ext Fault S4
(flashing)
An external fault was input from
a multi-function digital input
(flashing) External fault at terminal S5 (H1-01 to H1-05) that is pro- Remove the cause of the
EF5 (Alarm only) grammed for external fault func- external fault.
Ext Fault S5 tion that gives an alarm only and
(flashing) continues to run the motor.

EF6 (Alarm only)
Ext Fault S6
(flashing)

EF7 (Alarm only)
Ext Fault S7
(flashing)
PI Feedback Lost
This alarm occurs when PI feed-
• Check the PI feedback sig-
(flashing) back loss detection is pro- PI feedback source (e.g. trans-
nal source for correct opera-
grammed to alarm (b5-12=1) and ducer, sensor, building automa-
tion.
the PI feedback fell below the PI tion signal) is not installed
• Check the wiring of the PI
FBL Feedback Loss Detection Level correctly or is not working.
feedback signal.
Feedback Loss (b5-13) for the PI Feedback Loss
Detection (b5-14).
7-9
MEMOBUS Communications
(flashing) Alarm Connection is broken and/or the Check the connections and all
CE Detected when control data was master has stopped the communi- user-side software configura-
MEMOBUS Com not received correctly for 2 sec- cation. tions.
Err onds and H5-04=4 and H5-05=1.
(flashing)
Option Card Communications

(flashing) Alarm Connection is broken and/or the Check the connections and all
After initial communication was master has stopped the communi- user-side software configura-
BUS
established, the connection was cation. tions.
Option Com Err
lost.
(flashing)
Connection was not made prop-

Communication on Standby Check the connections and all
(flashing) erly or user software was not con-
Communication has not yet been user-side software configura-
figured to the proper baud rate or
CALL established. tions.
configuration (e.g. Parity)
ComCall
Drive not Enabled
Detected when a multi-function • Check the wiring and
• Enable command was lost
(flashing) digital input (H1-01 to H1-05) is sequence of the external
while the Inverter was running.
programmed for 6A or 70. signals.
• The RUN command was
The Inverter does not have the • Apply and maintain the
DNE applied prior to the enable sig-
enable command when the RUN enable command before
Drive not Enable nal.
command is applied. applying the RUN signal
(flashing) This alarm decelerates the motor.
The RUN command has not been
Detected when a RESET com- removed and a RESET command
(flashing) Remove the RUN signal first
mand is input while the RUN is input by digital input or by the
and reset the fault.
Ext Run active command is still active. RESET button on the Digital
Cannot Reset Operator.
• Check the wiring and

(flashing) One of the digital inputs (H1-01 sequence of the external
Motor is preheating. to H1-05) is programmed to 60 or signals.
PRHT
80 and the input is switched ON. • Check the parameter set-
Motor Preheating
tings.
(flashing)
• Check the wiring and

(flashing) On of the digital inputs (H1-01 to sequence of the external
Emergency Override is active H1-05) is programmed to 81 or signals.
OVRD
82 and the input is switched ON • Check the parameter set-
Emergcy Override
tings.
(flashing)
• Check the internal cooling
Internal Cooling Fan Alarm and clean it in case it is
(flashing) The Inverter’ internal cooling fan
The Inverter’s internal cooling dirty.
failed or is blocked.
FAN fan failed while L8-32=0 • Replace the cooling fan or
Cooling FAN Err the Inverter.
7-10
Operator Programming Errors

An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual param-
eter setting is inappropriate. The Inverter will not operate until the parameter is set correctly; however, no
alarm or fault outputs will occur. If an OPE occurs, change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause
shown in Table 7.3. When OPE error is displayed, press the ENTER key to display U1-34 (OPE Detected).
This monitor will display the parameter that is causing the OPE error.
Table 7.3 Operator Programming Errors
Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Action
Enter the correct kVA
setting (o2-04) by refer-
The control board was replaced and
ring to the table “Factory
Inverter kVA Setting Error the kVA parameter (o2-04) is set
settings that change with
OPE01 incorrectly
the Inverter kVA set-
kVA Selection ting“on page 5-60.
Parameter setting was outside of the Verify the parameter set-

Parameter Setting Out of Range
OPE02 allowed range. tings.
Limit
One of the following errors has been
made in the multi-function input (H1-
01 to H1-05) settings:
• Duplicate functions were selected.
• UP/DOWN command (setting 10
and 11) were not set simulta-
neously.
• The UP/DOWN commands (10
and 11) and Accel/decel ramp hold
(A) were set at the same time.
• More than one of the Speed Search
inputs (61, 62, 64) were set simoul-
taneosly.
Multi-function Input • External Baseblock NO (8) and Verify the parameter set-
Selection Error External Baseblock NC (9) were tings in H1-
set at the same time.
• The UP/DOWN commands (10
and 11) were selected while PI
Control (b5-01) was enabled.
• The Emergency Stop Command
OPE03 NO and NC were set at the same
Terminal time.
• Motor Preheat (60) and Motor Pre-
heat 2 (80) were set simulta-
neously.
• Emergency Override FWD (81)
and Emergency Override REV (82)
are set simultaneously.
RUN/Reference Command • Verify that the board is
Selection Error installed. Switch off
The Reference Source Selection the power supply and
Option board is not installed or is
b1-01 and/or the RUN Source re-install the option
installed incorrectly
OPE05 Selection parameter b1-02 are set board.
Sequence Select to 3 (option board) but no option • Recheck the setting of
board is installed. b1-01 and b1-02.
7-11
Table 7.3 Operator Programming Errors
Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Action
The following settings have been
made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PI Control Mode Selection)
has been set to a value different
Check the settings of
from 0.
PI Control Setup Error parameters b5-01, b5-15
• b5-15 (PI Sleep Function Opera-
and b1-03
tion Level) has been set to a value
OPE09 different from 0.
PI Selection • b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection)
has been set to 2 or 3.
• Check the parameter
Parameters E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, E1-
settings of E1-
09 and E1-11 do not satisfy the fol-
• A frequency/voltage
lowing conditions:
V/f Parameter Setting Error value might be set
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-11 (FMID2)
higher than the maxi-
OPE10 > E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-
V/f Ptrn Setting mum frequency/volt-
09 (FMIN)
age.
One of the following parameter set-
ting errors exists:
• Carrier frequency Gain C6-05 > 6
Carrier Frequency Parameter Set- and C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Check the parameter set-
ting Error Upper Limit) < C6-04 (Carrier Fre- tings of C6-02 to C6-05.
OPE11 quency Lower Limit)
CarrFrq/On-Delay • Upper/lower limit error in C6-03
and C6-04.
• Cycle the Inverter
EEPROM write error
A verification error occurred when power supply.
The NV-RAM data do not match
ERR writing EEPROM. • Try to initialize the
the EEPROM data
EEPROM R/W Err Inverter.
7-12
Autotuning Faults
Auto-tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digi-
tal operator and the motor coasts to stop. No fault or alarm outputs will be operated.
Table 7.4 Autotuning Faults
Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions
• There is an error in the data input • Check the input data.
for autotuning. • Check the Inverter and
Motor data fault • There is an error in the relationship motor capacity.
Er - 01 between the motor power and the • Check the motor rated cur-
Fault motor rated current. rent setting.
• Check the input data.

An alarm is detected during autotun- • Check wiring and the
Alarm
Er - 02 ing. machine.
Minor Fault • Check the load.
The STOP key was pressed to cancel

STOP key input -
Er - 03 autotuning.
STOP key
• Autotuning was not completed in

the specified time. • Check the input data.
Line-to-Line Resistance Fault
Er - 04 • The autotuning result is outside the • Check motor wiring.
Resistance parameter setting range.
Rated current setting alarm.

Check the motor rated current
Displayed after autotuning is The rated current is set too high.
End - 3 value.
completed.
Rated FLA Alm
Digital Operator Copy Function Faults

These faults can occur during the digital operator COPY function. When a fault occurs, the fault content is dis-
played on the operator. A fault does not activate the fault relay output or alarm output.
Table 7.5 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
Func-
Display Probable causes Corrective Actions
tion
o3-01 was set to 1 to read parameters

Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing parame-
when the Digital Operator was write-pro-
PRE ters into the Digital Operator’s memory.
tected (o3-02 = 0).
READ IMPOSSIBLE
The data file read from the Inverter was • Retry the read command.
Read of the wrong size indicating corrupted • Check the Digital Operator’s cable
IFE data. • Replace the Digital Operator
READ DATA ERROR
• A low Inverter voltage has been
An attempted wring of the Inverter data
detected.
to the Digital Operator’s EEPROM
RDE • Retry the read command
failed.
DATA ERROR • Replace the Digital Operator.
7-13
Table 7.5 Digital Operator Copy Function Faults
Func-
Display Probable causes Corrective Actions
tion
The Inverter type or software number was

Use stored data of the same product (E7)
different from the stored data in the digi-
CPE and software number (U1-14) only.
tal operator
ID UNMATCHED
The capacity of the Inverter and the

Use stored data for the same Inverter
capacity of the stored data in the Digital
VAE capacity only (o2-04).
Operator are different.
INV. KVA UNMATCH
Copy
A parameter setting written to the
Inverter was different from the setting Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
CYE stored in the Digital Operator.
COPY ERROR
Upon completion of the COPY function,
the Inverter’s data checksum was differ-
Retry the COPY function (o3-01 = 2)
CSE ent than the digital operator’s data check-
SUM CHECK ERROR sum.
The set value of the digital operator and

Verify Retry the VERIFY function (o3-01 = 3)
VYE the Inverter do not match
VERIFY ERROR
7-14
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected
when the system is started up. If that occurs, use this section as a reference and perform the appropriate
counter measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Parameters Cannot Be Set
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (Drive Mode).

There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn off the RUN command and then make the
settings.
Parameter write enable is input.

This occurs when "Parameters write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function digital input (H1-01 to
H1-05). If the parameter write enable input is OFF, the parameters cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set
the parameters.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)

If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the parameters for
the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/RESET key
and the MENU key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset pass-
word in parameter A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.

The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to page 7-11, Operator Programming Errors in this chapter
and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.

This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-connect it.
7-15
If the Motor Does Not Operate
The motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The operation method setting is wrong.

If parameter b1-02 (RUN command source selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not
operate when the RUN key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE key to switch to Digital Operator
operation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE key can be enabled or disabled by setting o2-01. It is enabled when the Drive
NOTE Mode is entered and o2-01 is set to 1.
The frequency reference is too low.

If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The Inverter is not in Drive Mode.

If the Inverter is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU key make
the DRIVE LED flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER key. The DRIVE LED will
light up when Drive Mode is entered.
The RUN command source selection is wrong.

If parameter b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an
external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
The motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator
operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE key again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE key can be enabled or disabled by setting o2-01. It is enabled when the
NOTE drive mode is entered and o2-01 is set to 1.
3-wire control is enabled.

The input method for a 3-wire control is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2-
wire control). If a 3 wire control is selected, the motor will not operate when a wiring that is suitable for 2-wire
control is used. When using a 3-wire control, refer to the wiring example and timing chart on page 6-10, Per-
forming Operations Using 3-Wire Control and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire control, set the multi-function digital input (H1-01 through H1-05, terminals S3 to S7) to
a value other than 0.
7-16
Troubleshooting
The frequency reference is too low.

If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.

The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost func-
tion (Torque Compensation), but the motor has a limited responsiveness which might be overloaded if acceler-
ation is too rapid or if the load is too heavy. Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider
increasing the motor and/or Inverter capacity.
The motor rotates in one direction only.

Reverse run is disabled. If b1-04 (Prohibition of reverse operation) is set to 1 or 3(reverse run prohibited), the
Inverter will not accept reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set b1-04 to 0 or 2.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed

If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring may be incorrect. When the Inverter oper-
ates in the forward direction, the forward direction of the motor will depend on the manufacturer and the
motor type, so be sure to check the motor specification
The direction of the motor rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W. If using an
encoder, the polarity will also have to be switched. Also parameter b1-04 can be used to change the rotational
direction.
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.

If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
very long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during run is too low.

If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Run) is too low, the speed may drop already at low
output torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If the Motor Operates at Higher Speed than the Frequency Reference
The analog frequency reference bias or gain setting is wrong.

The frequency reference bias or gain set in parameter H3-03 or H3-02 influence the frequency reference.
Check to be sure that these set values are suitable.
PI control is enabled.
If the PI control is enabled (b5-01 = 1 or 2), the Inverter output frequency will change to regulate the process
variable to the desired set point. The PID can command a speed up to Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04)
even though the reference is much lower.
7-17
A signal is being input to the multifunction analog input terminal A2.
When “0” (frequency bias) is set for parameter H3-09 (Analog Input A2 Function Selection) a frequency cor-
responding to the terminal A2 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure
that the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
The deceleration time is long even when a braking option is connected.

Stall prevention during deceleration enabled is set.

When a braking option is connected, set parameter L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled). When this parameter is set to 1 (enabled), the braking option will not work properly.
The deceleration time setting is too long.

Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C1-02 and C1-04).
Motor torque is insufficient.

If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, maybe then the motor's power limit is reached.
Consider increasing the motor capacity.
If the Motor Overheats
The load is too heavy.

If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used continuously with a torque that exceeds the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Reduce the load amount by lowering the load. Also consider increasing the
motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.

The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to be within its acceptable range.
7-18
Troubleshooting
If peripheral devices like PLCs or other are influenced

by the starting or running inverter
If electrical noise is generated by Inverter perform the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
reduce the amount of transistor switching noise.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power input terminals.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's motor terminals.
• Use shielded cables or a conduit. Metal shields electrical noise.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control circuit wiring.
If the Earth Leakage Breaker Operates when a RUN Command is Input

The Inverter’s output is pulse modulated, i.e. the output voltage consists of high frequency pulses (PWM).
This high frequency signal causes a certain amount of leakage current which may cause the earth leakage
breaker to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage
detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or higher, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one
that incorporates high frequencies countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help
to some extent to lower the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02). In addition, remember that the
leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's natural frequency and the carrier
frequency.
This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation, but the machinery vibrates with a high-
pitched whine. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6-02 to
C6-05.
There may be resonance between a mechanical system’s natural frequency and the output fre-
quency of the Inverter.
To prevent this resonance frequency use the Jump Frequency Function in parameters d3- , or have the
driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration.
Oscillation and hunting occur.

The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine. Adjust parameters C4-01
(Torque Compensation Gain) and C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time). Decrease C4-01 carefully in
steps of 0.05 and/or increase C4-02.
Furthermore the Hunting Prevention Gain (n1-02) can be increased if the problems occur in light load condi-
tions and the Slip Compensation Delay Time (C3-02) can be decreased.
Oscillation and hunting occur with PI control.

If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I
parameters (refer to page 6-87, Using PI Control).
7-19
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor coasts at low speed after a deceleration to stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection
braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
• Increase the parameter b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the parameter b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
If OV (Overvoltage) or OC (Overcurrent) is Detected When a Fan is

Started, or a Fan Stalls
If a fan is windmilling (already rotating in an airstream) and the Inverter tries to start the motor from zero
speed on OV (DC bus overvoltage) or OC (Overcurrent) might occur. This can be prevented by stopping the
fan rotation using DC injection braking before starting the fan. Alternatively the speed search function can be
used to catch the rotating motor.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.

When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (d3-04) settings
are suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.

The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Freq Ref Upper Limit = Max. Output Frequency (E1-04) × Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
7-20
8
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection ..............................................8-2

Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Inspection
Periodic Inspection for Inverters of Protection Class IP00 and NEMA 1/ IP20
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
• The motor should not vibrate or make unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Inverter or motor.
• The ambient temperature should be within the Inverter’s specifications.
• The output current value shown in U1-03 should not be higher than the motor or the Inverter rated current
for extended period of time.
• The cooling fan in the Inverter should be operating normally.
Before attempting any maintenance checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected. With power
removed from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the
Inverter will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10VDC. To ensure that the DC bus is completely dis-
charged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale. Be sure
not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock.
Table 8.1 General Inspection Items for Inverters of all Protection Classes
Item Inspection Corrective Procedure
External terminals Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Mounting bolts
Connectors Are connectors tight? Reconnect the loose connectors.
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty? dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
All PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
the PCBs? (4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Input Diodes Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
Output Transistors
the modules or components? dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
Power Modules (4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Are there any irregularities, such as dis-
DC bus capacitors Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
coloration or odor?
Apply power to the Inverter and conduct the following inspection:

Is there any abnormal noise or vibration,
or has the total operating time exceeded
Cooling Fan(s) 20,000 hours. Replace Cooling Fan
Check U1-40 for the elapsed cooling oper-
ation time.
Additional Information for Inverters in Protection Class IP54

After switching off the power supply wait at least for five minutes before beginning the inspection. Before
opening the door ensure that the space around the Inverter is dry and clean. Water must not splash into the
Inverter box as it may destroy the Inverter and can result in electric shock.
Keep any water or dust outside of the Inverter box during the Inspection
Refer to the following table for additional inspection items for IP54 Inverters.
8-2
Table 8.2 Inspection Items for IP54 Inverters

External terminals Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Mounting bolts
Connectors Are connectors tight? Reconnect the loose connectors.
Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty? dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
(4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
7.5 to 18.5 kW:
External cooling fan is attached on the lower
side in the wind tunnel.
Check the fan from the bottom and clean off
any dirt in the same way as cleaning the
cooling fin.
Cooling Fan Are the cooling fans dirty or dusty
22 to 55 kW:
External cooling fan is attached on the upper
side in the wind tunnel.
Check the fan from the top and clean off any
dirt in the same way as cleaning the cooling
fin.
All PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
the PCBs? (4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Input Diodes Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
Output Transistors
the modules or components? dry air at a pressure of 4 x 105 to 6 x 105 Pa
Power Modules (4 to 6 bar, 55 to 85 psi).
Are there any irregularities, such as dis-
DC bus capacitors Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
coloration or odor?
Cable Glands Are the cable glands tightened properly? Tighten the cable glands and locknuts.
Apply power to the Inverter and conduct the following inspection:

Is there any abnormal noise or vibration,
or has the total operating time exceeded
Cooling Fan(s) 20,000 hours. Replace Cooling Fan
Check U1-40 for the elapsed cooling oper-
ation time.
8-3
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, and to prevent down time due to an
unexpected failure, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service
life.
The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only. Periodic inspection stan-
dards vary depending on the Inverter’s installation environment conditions and usage. The Inverter’s sug-
gested maintenance periods are noted below.
Part Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method
Cooling fan(s) 2 to 3 years (20,000 hours) Replace with new part.
Replace with new part.
DC bus capacitor 5 years
(Determine need by inspection.)
Soft charge contactor – Determine need by inspection.
DC bus fuse
10 years Replace with new part.
Control power fuse
Replace with new board.
PCB capacitors 5 years
(Determine need by inspection.)
Note:The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30°C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
8-4
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and when pull the fan out in
the direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the cable.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
Air flow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less)
Mounting the Cooling Fan

1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction is correct (see figure above).
2. Connect the cables securely and place the connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter heatsink.
8-5
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan

1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the Inverter.
2. Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the con-
troler.
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate driver positioned at the
back of the controller.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover.
Mounting the Cooling Fan

After attaching a new cooling fan, use the above described procedure in reverse order to attach all of the com-
ponents.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow direction faces the top of the
Inverter.
Air flow direction
Controller bracket Fan cover
Controller Connector
Gate driver
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (Inverters of 22 kW or More)
8-6
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card

1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal card out downwards (in direction 2).
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card

Use the removal procedure in reverse order to mount the terminal card.
Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller card properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing
into its plan.
The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place!
Removing and Mounting the

Control Circuit Terminal Card
1
Fig 8.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card
Always confirm that the charge indicator does not light anymore before removing or mounting the con-
NOTE trol circuit terminal card.
8-7
8-8
9
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter
and specifications for options and peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications ........................................9-2

Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200V Class
Model Number
20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110
CIMR-E7Z
Max. applicable motor out-
0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110
put (kW)*1
Rated output capacity
1.2 1.6 2.7 3.7 5.7 8.8 12 17 22 27 32 44 55 69 82 110 130 160
(kVA)
Output Ratings
Rated output current

3.2 4.1 7.0 9.6 15 23 31 45 58 71 85 115 145 180 215 283 346 415
(A)
3-phase; 200, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
Max. output voltage (V)
(Proportional to input voltage.)
Max. output frequency
200.0
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Power Supply Characteristics
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated input current (A) 3.8 4.9 8.4 11.5 18 24 37 52 68 84 94 120 160 198 237 317 381 457
Allowable voltage fluc-
+ 10%, - 15%
tuation
Allowable frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Control Characteristics
DC reactor Optional Built in

Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-pulse
rectifica- Not possible Possible*2
tion
*1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the In-
verter's rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
*2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
9-2
400 V Class Inverters in Protection Class IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20

Model Number
40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 44P0 45P5 47P5 4011 4015 4018
CIMR-E7Z
Max. applicable motor output
0.55 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
(kW)*1
1.4 1.6 2.8 4.0 5.8 6.6 9.5 13 18 24 30
(kVA)
Output Ratings
Rated output current (A) 1.8 2.1 3.7 5.3 7.6 8.7 12.5 17 24 31 39
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
200.0
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated input current (A) 2.2 2.5 4.4 6.4 9.0 10.4 15 20 29 37 47
Allowable voltage fluctua-

+ 10%, - 15%
tion
Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
DC reactor Optional
Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec-
Not possible
tification
Model Number
4022 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4132 4160 4185 4220 4300
CIMR-E7Z
Max. applicable motor out-
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 185 220 300
put (kW)*1
34 46 57 69 85 110 140 160 200 230 280 390 510
(kVA)
Output Ratings
Rated output current (A) 45 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 260 304 370 506 675
Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
200.0
(Hz)
Max. voltage (V)

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated input current (A) 50 66 83 100 120 165 198 238 286 334 407 537 743
Allowable voltage fluc-

+ 10%, - 15%
tuation
Allowable frequency
±5%
fluctuation
Mea- DC reactor Built in

sures for
power
supply
harmon- 12-phase
ics rectification Possible*2
*1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that
the Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
*2. A transformer with dual star-delta secondary is required on the power supply for 12-pulse-rectification.
9-3
400 V Class Inverters in Protection Class IP54
Model Number
47P5 4011 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055
CIMR-E7Z
Max. applicable motor output
7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
(kW)*1
13 18 24 30 34 46 57 69 85
(kVA)
Output Ratings
Rated output current (A) 17 24 31 39 45 60 75 91 112

Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
200.0
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)

3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated input current (A) 20 29 37 47 50 66 83 100 120
Allowable voltage fluctua-

+ 10%, - 15%
tion
Allowable frequency fluc-

±5%
tuation
DC reactor Optional Built in

Measures
for power
supply
harmonics 12-phase rec-
tification Not possible
*1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa standard motor. When selecting the actual motor
and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's rated current is higher than the motor's rated current.
9-4
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Model Number
Specification
CIMR-E7Z
Sine wave PWM
Control method
V/f control
Speed control range 1:40
Speed control accuracy ±3 (25°C ± 10°C)
Frequency control range 0.0to 200.0 Hz
Frequency accuracy (tem- Digital references: ± 0.01% (-10°C to +40°C)

perature characteristics) Analog references: ±0.1% (25°C ±10°C)
Frequency setting resolu- Digital references: 0.01 Hz

tion Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (11 bits plus sign)
Output frequency resolu-
0.01 Hz
tion
Frequency setting signal 0 to +10V, 4 to 20 mA
Acceleration/Decelera-
0.01 to 6000.0 s (2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
tion time
Braking torque Approximately 20%
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overload detection, 5-speed control (maximum), acceleration/decelera-
tion time changes, S-curve acceleration, 3-wire control, autotuning, cooling fan ON/OFF control, torque compensation, jump
Main control functions frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, motor preheat function,
High Slip braking, PI control (with sleep/snooze function, scaling with units), energy-saving control, MEMOBUS communi-
cations (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), emergency override, fault reset, and copy function.
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
protection
Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown.
*1 120% of rated output current for 1 minute
Overload protection
Protective functions
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V.

Overvoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V.
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V.
Undervoltage protection
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V.
Momentary power loss
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
ride through
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits.
Charge indicator Lights up when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): 18.5 kW or less (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Protective structure
Open chassis type (IP00): 22 kW or more (same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters)
Ambient operating tem- -10°C to 40°C (NEMA 1 / IP20 and IP54)
perature –10°C to 45°C (IP00)
Ambient operating humid-
95% max. (with no condensation)
Environment
ity
Storage temperature - 20°C to + 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Application site Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude 1000 m max.
Vibration 10 to 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2 max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2 max
*1. Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected.
9-5
9-6
10
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and
peripheral devices and also provides lists of parameters.
Inverter Application Precautions ......................................10-2

Motor Application Precautions .........................................10-4
User Parameters..............................................................10-6
Inverter Application Precautions
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a compensating capacitor. Excessive peak current
can destroy the rectifier section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the power
supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into Inverters of 22 and more.
If a thyristor converter, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
DC or AC reactor
Power supply
Required
capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is minimum 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristic generally is different from those when starting a
motor on the power supply directly. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter one size bigger or
increase the capacity of both, the motor and the Inverter.
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Install the Inverter in a clean location where it is not subjected to oil mist, dust, and other contaminants, or
install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that
the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not exceed the allowable temperature. Do not install the Inverter
on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface.
10-2
Inverter Application Precautions
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The maximum output frequency can be set up to 120Hz. Setting the output frequency too high can damage the
machine. So pay attention to the mechanical system and observe required limits for the output frequency.
DC Injection Braking and Motor Preheat

If the DC injection braking current, the braking time or the motor preheat current or are set too high the motor
can overheat what can damage the motor.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
torque, and the load's inertial moment (GD2/4). If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera-
tion or deceleration, it might be necessary to increase the acceleration or deceleration time.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and control sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation

If a magnetic contactor is installed in the power supply line, do not exceed one start every 30 minutes. Switch-
ing more often can damage the inrush current prevention circuit.
Maintenance and Inspections

After turning OFF the main circuit power supply it can take several minutes before the DC bus is discharged
completely. The CHARGE LED, indicating if the DC bus is charged, glows above a voltage of 10VDC.
10-3
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor

Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor.
Low Speed Ranges

If a standard cooled motor is used at low speed the cooling effects are diminished. If the motor is used in con-
stant torque applications in low speed area the motor may overheat. If full torque is required at low speed con-
tinuously an externally cooled motor must be used.
Installation Withstand Voltage

If the Inverter is used with an input voltage of 440 V or higher and long motor cables, voltage spikes at the
motor terminals may occur which can damage the motor windings. Ensure that the motor insulation class is
sufficient.
Acoustic Noise
The acoustic noise generated in the motor depends on the carrier frequency. The higher the setting, the less is
the generated acoustic noise.
10-4
Motor Application Precautions
Using the Inverter for Special Motors

Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select an appropriate
Inverter according to the maximum current of the motor.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a motor cable with high cross section to prevent voltage drop and thereby motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is used, it must be subjected to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with the
Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in damaging.
If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz, consult the manufacturer.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. These motors are often equipped with phase-shift capacitors.
Any capacitor directly connected to the inverter output may damage the Inverter.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts and Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will be
morey noisy and might experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at low
speeds continuously.
10-5
User Parameters
A complete parameter table with the factory default settings can be found in the following table. The factory
settings are given for 200V class Inverter with 0.4 kW.
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
Language selection for digital operator display
A1-00 0
(LED/HOA Digital Operator)
A1-01 Parameter access level 2
A1-03 Initialize 0
A1-04 Password 0
A1-05 Password setting 0
A2-01 to
User-set parameters –
A2-32
b1-01 Reference source selection 1
b1-02 RUN command source selection 1
b1-03 Stopping method selection 0
b1-04 Prohibition of reverse operation 0
b1-07 Operation selection after switching to remote mode 0
b1-08 Run command selection in programming modes 0
b1-11 RUN delay 0 sec.
b1-12 HAND frequency reference source selection 0
b1-13 HAND/AUTO switching during run selection 0
b1-14 Emergency override speed 0.00 Hz
b1-15 Emergency override reference selection 0
b2-01 DC injection braking starting frequency (Zero speed level) 0.5 Hz
b2-02 DC injection braking current 50%
b2-03 DC injection braking time at start 0.00 sec.
b2-04 DC injection braking time at stop 0.50 sec.
b2-09 Motor preheat current 0%
b2-10 Motor preheat current 2 5%
b3-01 Speed search selection 2
b3-02 Speed search operating current 120%
b3-03 Speed search deceleration time 2.0 sec.
b3-05 Speed search wait time 0.2 sec.
b3-14 Bi-directional speed search selection 1
b4-01 Timer function ON-delay time 0.0 sec.
b4-02 Timer function OFF-delay time 0.0 sec.
b5-01 PI control mode selection 0
b5-02 Proportional (P) gain 1.00
b5-03 Integral (I) time 1.0 sec.
b5-04 Integral (I) limit 100.0%
b5-06 PI limit 100.0%
b5-07 PI offset 0.0%
b5-08 PI delay time constant 0.00 sec.
b5-09 PI output characteristics selection 0
10-6
User Parameters
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
b5-10 PI output gain 1.0
b5-11 PI reverse output selection 0
b5-12 Selection of PI feedback loss detection 0
b5-13 PI feedback loss detection level 0%
b5-14 PI feedback loss detection time 1.0 sec.
b5-15 Sleep function operation level 0.0 Hz
b5-16 Sleep operation delay time 0.0 sec.
b5-17 Acceleration/deceleration time for PI reference 0.0 sec.
b5-18 PI setpoint selection 0
b5-19 PI setpoint 0.0%
b5-20 PI setpoint scaling 1
b5-21 Sleep function selection 1
b5-22 Snooze level 0%
b5-23 Snooze delay time 0 sec
b5-24 Wake-up level 0%
b5-25 Setpoint boost 0%
b5-26 Maximum boost time 0 sec
b5-27 Snooze feedback 60%
b5-28 PI feedback square root operation 0
b5-29 PI feedback square root gain 1.00
b5-30 PI output monitor square root 0
b5-31 PI unit selecction 0 *1
b8-01 Energy-saving mode selection 0
b8-04 Energy-saving coefficient 288.20 *2
b8-05 Power detection filter time constant 20 msec.
b8-06 Search operation voltage limiter 0%
C1-01 Acceleration time 1 10.0 sec.
C1-02 Deceleration time 1 10.0 sec.
C1-03 Acceleration time 2 10.0 sec.
C1-04 Deceleration time 2 10.0 sec.
C1-09 Emergency stop time 10.0 sec.
C1-11 Accel/decel time switching frequency 0.0 Hz
C2-01 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration start 0.20 sec.
C2-02 S-curve characteristic time at acceleration end 0.20 sec.
C4-01 Torque compensation gain 1.00
C4-02 Torque compensation time constant 200 msec.
C6-01 Normal duty selection 1
C6-02 Carrier frequency selection 6*3
C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit 15 kHz*2
C6-04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit 15 kHz*2
C6-05 Carrier Freq. Proportional Gain 00
10-7
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
d1-01 Frequency reference 1 0.00 Hz
d1-17 Jog frequency reference 6.00 Hz
d2-01 Frequency reference upper limit 100.0%
d2-02 Frequency reference lower limit 0.0%
d2-03 Master speed reference lower limit 0.0%
d3-01 Jump frequency 1 0.0 Hz
d3-04 Jump frequency width 1.0 Hz
d4-01 Frequency reference hold function selection 0
d4-02 Trim control level 10%
E1-01 Input voltage setting 200 V*4
E1-03 V/f pattern selection F
E1-04 Max. output frequency 50.0 Hz
E1-05 Max. output voltage 200.0 V*4
E1-06 Base frequency 50.0 Hz
E1-07 Mid output frequency 2.5 Hz
E1-08 Mid. output frequency voltage 15.0 V*4
E1-09 Min. output frequency 1.2 Hz
E1-10 Min. output frequency voltage 9.0 V*4
E1-11 Mid. output frequency 2 0.0 Hz
E1-12 Mid. output frequency voltage 2 0.0 V
E1-13 Base voltage 0.0 V
E2-01 Motor rated current 1.90 A*2
E2-03 Motor no-load current 1.20 A*2
E2-05 Motor line-to-line resistance 9.842Ω*2
F6-01 Operation selection after communications error 1
F6-02 Option card external fault detection selection 0
F6-03 Option card external fault stopping method 1
F6-05 Current scaling via communication option card 0
H1-01 Terminal S3 function selection 24
H1-02 Terminal S4 function selection 14
H1-03 Terminal S5 function selection 3 (0)*5
H2-01 Terminal M1-M2 function selection 0
H2-02 Terminal M3-M4 function selection 1
10-8
User Parameters
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
H3-02 Terminal A1 gain 100.0%
H3-03 Terminal A1 bias 0.0%
H3-08 Analog input A2 signal level selectoin 2
H3-09 Analog input A2 function selection 2*6
H3-10 Terminal A2 gain 100.0%
H3-11 Terminal A2 bias 0.0%
H3-12 Analog input filter time constant 0.30 sec.
H3-13 Terminal A1/A2 switching 0
H4-01 Terminal FM monitor selection 2
H4-02 Terminal FM gain 100%
H4-03 Terminal FM bias 0.0%
H4-04 Terminal AM monitor selection 8
H4-05 Terminal AM gain 50%
H4-06 Terminal AM bias 0.0%
H4-07 Terminal FM signal level selection 0
H4-08 Terminal AM signal level selection 0
H5-01 Station address 1F
H5-02 Communications speed selection 3
H5-03 Communications parity selection 0
H5-04 Stopping method after communications error 3
H5-05 Communications error detection selection 1
H5-06 Send wait time 5 msec.
H5-07 RTS control ON/OFF 1
H5-08 Communications Selection 0
H5-09 CE detection time 2.0 sec.
L1-01 Motor protection selection 1
L1-02 Motor protection time constant 1.0 min
L1-03 Alarm operation selection during motor overheating 3
L1-04 Motor overheating operation selection 1
L1-05 Motor temperature input filter time constant 0.20 sec.
L2-01 Momentary power loss detection 0
L2-02 Momentary power loss ride through time 0.1 sec.*2
L2-03 Min. baseblock time 0.1sec.*2
L2-04 Voltage recovery time 0.3 sec *2
L2-05 Undervoltage detection level 190 V*4
L3-01 Stall prevention selection during acceleration 1
L3-02 Stall prevention level during acceleration 120%
L3-04 Stall prevention selection during deceleration 1
L3-05 Stall prevention selection during running 1
L3-06 Stall prevention level during running 120%
L4-01 Speed agreement detection level 0.0 Hz
10-9
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
L4-02 Speed agreement detection width 2.0 Hz
L4-05 Operation when frequency reference is missing 1
L4-06 Frequency reference value at frequency reference loss 80%
L5-01 Number of auto restart attempts 0
L5-02 Auto restart operation selection 0
L5-03 Fault Retry Time 10.0 sec.
L6-01 Load detection selection 6
L6-02 Load detection level 15%
L6-03 Load detection time 10.0 sec.
L8-02 Overheat pre-alarm level 95 °C*2
L8-03 Operation selection after overheat pre-alarm 4
L8-06 Input phase loss detection level 5.0 %*2
L8-09 Ground fault protection selection 1
L8-10 Cooling fan control selection 0
L8-11 Cooling fan control delay time 300 sec.
L8-12 Ambient temperature 45 °C
L8-15 OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds 1
L8-18 Soft CLA selection 1
L8-19 Frequency reference during OH pre-alarm 20.0%
L8-32 OH1 detection selection for fan failure 1
n1-01 Hunting prevention function selection 1
n1-02 Hunting prevention gain 1.00
n3-01 High slip braking deceleration frequency width 5%
n3-02 High slip braking current limit 150%
n3-03 High slip braking stop dwell time 1.0 sec.
n3-04 High slip braking OL7 time 40 sec.
o1-01 Monitor selection 6
o1-02 Monitor selection after power up 1
o1-03 Digital operator display scaling 0
o1-05 LCD Focus 3
o1-06 Monitor mode Selection 0
o1-07 2nd monitor selection 2
o1-08 3rd monitor selection 3
o1-09 Frequency reference display unit selection 0
o2-01 LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable 1
o2-02 STOP key during control circuit terminal operation 1
o2-03 User parameter initial value 0
o2-04 kVA selection 0*2
o2-05 Frequency reference setting method selection 0
o2-06 Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected 0
o2-07 Cumulative operation time setting 0 hrs.
o2-08 Cumulative operation time selection 1
o2-09 Initialize mode 2
10-10
User Parameters
Factory
No. Name Setting
Setting
o2-10 Fan operation time setting 0 hrs.
o2-12 Fault trace initialize 0
o2-14 kWh monitor initialize 0
o2-15 HAND key function selection 1
o2-17 Standard / IP54 Selection *7
o3-01 Copy function selection 0

o3-02 Read permission selection 0
T1-02 Motor output power 0.40 kW*2
T1-04 Motor rated current 1.90 A*2
*1. Parameter function is only valid if a Digital Operator with LCD clear text display is used (LCD or HOA Digital Operator)
*3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity and the protection class.
*5. The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire-sequence.
*6. Setting switched to “B” when PI controller is enabled
*7. The setting depends on the protection class of the Inverter.
10-11
10-12

E7 Users Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

E7 Users Manual en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

E7 Users Manual en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual No.

1 Handling Inverters .................................................................. 1-1

3 Digital Operator and Modes....................................................3-1

4 Trial Operation .........................................................................4-1

5 User Parameters ......................................................................5-1

6 Parameter Settings by Function............................................ 6-1

8 Maintenance and Inspection.................................................. 8-1

9 Specifications ......................................................................... 9-1

10 Appendix ............................................................................... 10-1

This is absolutely imperative!

Transportation and storage

Measures to Ensure Conformity of OYMC Frequency inverters to the EMC Directive

Recommended Line Filters for Varispeed E7 (IP00 and NEMA 1 / IP20)

CIMR-E7Z44P0 3G3RV-PFI3018-SE B, 25 m*1 18 1.3 141 x 46 x 330

CIMR-E7Z4045 3G3RV-PFI3130-SE 130 4.7 90 x 180 x 366

CIMR-E7Z4075 3G3RV-PFI3170-SE 170 6.0 120 x 170 x 451

CIMR-E7Z4300 3G3RV-PFI3800-SE 800 31.0 300 x 160 x 716

CIMR-E7Z20P7 3G3RV-PFI3010-SE 10 1.1 141 x 45 x 330

CIMR-E7Z22P2 3G3RV-PFI3018-SE 18 1.3 141 x 46 x 330

CIMR-E7Z2037 3G3RV-PFI2160-SE 160 6.0 120 x 170 x 451

CIMR-E7Z2110 3G3RV-PFI3600-SE 600 11.0 260 x 135 x 386

EMC Specifications of Varispeed E7 (IP54)

The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.

Table 1.1 Varispeed E7 Models

Inverter model MODEL: CIMR-E7Z40P4 SPEC: 40P41A Inverter

Output specifications OUTPUT: AC3PH 0-480V 0-200Hz 1.8A 1.4kVA

Fig 1.1 Nameplate Example

Inverter Model Numbers

Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers

Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications

Inverter Software Version

Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less

Digital Operator Diecast case

Bottom protective cover

Fig 1.4 NEMA 1 Inverter Appearance (18.5 kW or Less)

Control Circuit Terminals

Main Circuit Terminals

Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement (18.5 kW or less)

Fig 1.6 Inverter Appearance (22 kW or More)

Control Circuit Terminals

Main Circuit Terminals

Fig 1.7 Terminal Arrangement (22kW or More)

Cable Entry Plate

Fig 1.8 IP54 Inverter Appearance

Exterior and Mounting Dimensions

400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW

Fig 1.9 Exterior Diagrams of IP00 Inverters

Fig 1.10 Exterior Diagrams of NEMA 1 / IP20 Inverters

Fig 1.11 Exterior Diagrams of IP54 Inverters

400 V 15 326 172 498

Max. Dimensions (mm)

Checking and Controlling the Installation Site

Controlling the Ambient Temperature

Protecting the IP00 or NEMA 1 Inverter from Foreign Matter

Keeping the IP54 protection

Installation Orientation and Space

30mm min. 30mm min. 120mm min.

Horizontal Space Vertical Space

Fig 1.12 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space